Otis Sigma SI210 PDF

Test & Commissioning
IRIS I
System
Rev. No. 0
MMR Elevator_SI Doc. No.
DL
EL) 06-008
FOD Test & Commissioning for Page 0/17
Field Industrial Engineering SI210 Controller Date July. 2006
Index
1. System Overview…...…………………………………………………..………………. 1
1.1 General...……………………………………………………………………………….1
1.2 Major Specification………………………………………………………………….....3
2. Comparison between DI210 & SI210 Controller…...................................................7

2.1 Summary…………………………………………………………………………….….7
2.2 Major changed parts………………………………………………………………..…8
Appendix1. Cut view of traveling cable………………………………………….……..15

Appendix2. Cut view of EVV cable………………………………………………...…...16
Appendix3. PCB application………………………………………………………...…..16
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
1. System overview
1.1 General
1) Sigma Elevator
Power Distributed and Inverter Control Elevator
2) What is the distributed control system?

This system distributes and assigns separate micro processors to their
functional properties and transmits control data required for independent operators
through the transmitting media network so as to be processed independently.
Thus, this system possesses enhanced reliability, safety and flexibility through
additional functions.
3) System configuration
- Si210 controller system configuration
High frequency
RCRC1VD INVERTER REACTOR
MCCB CONVERT
EMI
ER HCT- U
고주파
DVR FI LC HCT- V
AC
I.M TM
380V DVR FI LC
C1ST 15Kw or above RE

CISPR Pub21
1024
CLASS A standard
B
P/ R CWT
satisfaction
DPP- 131, 111 DPB- 100( Ext ensi on)

Driv e control FLU
LDU
BRAKE Current control
I PM dr i ve LDC UL
DOC- 120 BRAKE Error detect
+
STACK Er r or det ect S.G. LDD SD1U
CPU: 80C186
Supervision125K BPS
SD2U
SCG1 FI RE
DPC- 120, 121 FULL
B
CRT
DAS
Protection circuit / Failure detect
FI RE
HALL NET Speed, current control FULL
SCG2 Parallel comm. With DOC-PCB
PWM, current command DCL- 242
A/D signal convert DCV- 100
Prallel NET
SCG3 BRAKE control
HAND PC
RS- 232C
( 9600 BPS)
SCC
( 2PORT)
DOM- 110A
M/C Room, Hoist way, Controller

+
Hoi st way si gnal
DHG- 160, 161
I/F Car si gnal

signal I/O junction board
SD2D
78K BPS LON c ontrol SD1D

CAR- NET DL
( 1PORT)
FLD
Aut o DCD 201 203 204 CAR- NET HALL NET
announc e RS-232 Micro Private
(DOV-200) Supervisory Fire, Emerg. DOOR cont r ol
leveling RELAY PCB power
panel ( SAV, MAV, DAV)
RELAY PCB RELAY PCB
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
4) Main functions of distributed control

-. Diagram
DOC-120 PCB 186 (16 Bit) Relative E/L

DOC-120 PCB
G/A-3
DPRAM (256B) DPRAM (2 KB)
G/A-1 G/A-2
M-LON (8 Bit)
I/O PORT
DSP(16 G/A (COM. G/A (COM. EMBEDDED CON-

OR 32 Bit) CLON(8 Bit) ELM) ELM) TROLLER(8Bit)
DPC PCB DCL PCB
DHG-161PCB CRT DCD- PCB
#1~32
Voi ce synt h.
DOV-100 PCB
-. Main functions of distributed controller

Processor Name Capacity Operating Freq. Function
186 16 Bit 20 MHz E/L operation and position control
DSP 32 Bit 40 MHz MOTOR and speed control
16 Bit 16 MHz MOTOR and speed control
M-LON 8 Bit 10 MHz CAR NETWORK transmitting host
Control of input/output signal of
S-G/A 8 Bit 16 MHz
hall side equipment
G/A-1 8 Bit 16 MHz HALL NETWORK transmitting host
Supervisory network (CRT,ESMI…)
G/A-2 8 Bit 16 MHz
Transmitting HOST
G/A-3 8 Bit 16 MHz Host of parallel network
Control of input/output signal of
C-LON 8 Bit 10 MHz
car side equipment
EMBEDDED CONTROLLER 8 Bit 12 MHz Door motor INV control
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
1.2 Major Specification

1) Specification
Items DI1 60 m/min DI1 90~105 m/min

CPU Operation CPU : KU80C186EC-20 (16 bit)
Speed CPU : TM320C32PCM40 (32 bit,DPC-111,112)
Speed CPU : 320F(C)240 (16 bit,DPC-120)
Communication(COMM.) Control panel ↔ Operating board (OPB) : LON COMM.
Control panel ↔ HALL(B/T B/D) : G/A COMM.
Control panel ↔ CRT&ESMI : G/A COMM.
Control panel↔ Control panel:G/A COMM(DOC-120 PCB)
Control panel ↔ Auto announcement : CAR LON,RS232C
CP(Speed CPU) ↔ MAIN CPU : Parallel signal processing
Control panel ↔ DOOR : Parallel signal processing
DOOR INV DOOR
Parallel operation Duplex operation
Service floor 24 32
Max. stroke 60m 80m
Min. floor height 2500 mm
Max. load capacity 1600kg (24 Persons)
Traction machine H438B-2,H317C,H422B-2
TKXS,TKM,TKL,TKXL,H438B,H422B(Di1 M/C)
ROPPING 1 : 1 ROPPING
Position/Speed detecting ROTARY ENCODER (1024 P/R)
Load detecting device STRAIN GAUGE,POTENTIO METER,MICRO S/W
Rated power 5.5, 7.5, 9.5, 11, 13, 15, 18KW
MOTOR Voltage/Freq. 310 V / 50(43) Hz
Pole 4 Pole
Cont r ol INVERTER INV distributed control
Type CONVERTER All wave rectifier circuit using by diode
Br ake t ype Regenerative resistance brake type
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2) Functions of control panel block
NO Block Configuration Functions

Power Noise Noise filter E/L power end conduction noise damper
1 processing section (CISPR Pub 22 Class A)
Surge absorber Lighting surge damper
P Converter 3-phase diode Converts 3-phase AC voltage to DC
o section module voltage. Regenerative braking method
w (Not a converter control)
e Chemical Smoothes and charges the DC power.
r DC link condenser Arranged in serial or parallel by INV capacity
section Divided voltage Divides DC link voltage when
s resistance condensers are arranged in serial
2
t Regeneration Regenerative IGBT Drives to consume regenerative electric
a processing Regenerative power produced by operating condition
c section resistance used of loads as regenerative resistance.
k (Built-in type S-IPM is used up to 15kW )
Inverter IPM Converts DC voltage into AC voltage
section (INTELLIGENT of the frequency by the number of motor
POWER MODULE) turning
Charging circuit Charging resistance Protect DC link end condenser after power
3
section ON
Charging circuit Composed of C1VD contactor
4 contactor (OPTION)
Generates AC VOL and door supplied

power used for in/out-side CTRL board
Control transforme
5 Power section by getting down 3-phase power AC VOL
and DC VOL by connecting to DOP-PCB
SMPS Power supplies for PCB, Encoder(DC)
As a filter on the side of motor, INV of
6 Reactor section
13kW capacity or more fitted
7 Brake control Brake PCB Current control type brake PCB (DPB PCB)
section
Wire wound Current limiter of traction machine
resistor
Composed of main circuit power driving
8 Contactor section (C1ST),brake driving charge(C1BR),
discharge driving (C1VD,Option)
Connects control panel and outer
9 Terminal section
equipment (DOM PCB)
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
NO Block Configuration Functions

Composed of power earth, panel frame GND connecting
in/outside equipment and DC panel.
10 Earth bar
(Digtal and Analog GND's are connected at power earth)
11 DOC-120 PCB Operation controlling CPU PCB which controls operation

P C B
sequence and Position, detects security circuit,

perform external COM I/O I/F.
Speed controlling CPUB/D which controls motor speed
DPC-120, 121 and current, checks power section security circuit and
I
DPC-140 PCB
PCB performs a rescue operation in ALP operation.
n
DPP-131:
c
IPM driving(built-in Regen.IGBT),Detecting DC LINK safety

~15kW
o n
DPP-1XX PCB
DPP-111: Driving Inverter IGBT,regen.IGBT,Detecting DC LINK
18~22kW safety
t
Inputs machine room OPR and EEPROM displays E/L

r
DOA-100 PCB and TCD conditions.

o
l
As a local monitoring board B/D, performs a gate array

l
*DOS-100 PCB communication, using DOC-120 CRT port

e
(Relay contact output).

r
DC power supply(CAR LON:24V,I/F:48V, Contactor: 110V),

DOP-116 PCB control power fuse, and LED indicating
status of fuse
*DOR-131 PCB For emergency, Micro leveling operation

*DOR-101 PCB For Supervisory panel, RELAY PCB
*DOR-110A PCB For emergency (export),RELAY PCB
*DOR-120 PCB For private power operation, RELAY PCB
DOM-110A PCB Connects control panel and outer equipment
*: OPTION PCB
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
3) Applicable external equipment
NO Unit Name Applicable Standard

1 TR M/C and Motor * Refer to item 4)Table of applicable units by speed & capacity.
2 ENCODER * ROTARY ENCODER : 1024 P/R
* 1B(1 B contact) Type position detector applied
3 Position Detector * 1 LDC applied is basic.(Applied if LDU and LDD slack rope increase)
* MAGNETIC LEAD SWITCH
* Door Type : SAV1(DCD-201 PCB), MAV1(DCD-203 PCB),
DAV1(DCD-204 PCB)
4 Door Device * Unit configuration is a integrated model of link configuration.
* CONTROL : INVERTER CONTROL (DCD-20X PCB)
* MOTOR Power : 3Φ AC110V
5 CRT & ESMI * WINDOW type CRT supervisory panel for SIGMA
* Remote monitoring board (Elevator Status Monitoring Interface)
6 Load detection device * 60~105m/min : STRAIN GAUGE(0%~110%) ,PTM,MICRO S/W
* 60 m/min: (SDS1U, UL, FLU)(SDS1D, DL, FLD)
7 Limit switch * 90~105m/min:(SDS1U,SDS2U,UL,FLU)(SDS1D,SDS2D,DL,FLD)
* Refer to installation manual for install position and adjustment
8 DCL-242 PCB
DCL-243 PCB * Perform a LON comm. with C.P through OPB LON PCB.
(DCL-241 PCB) * Inputs by button and outputs by lamp
* Parallel comm.(DOV-200 PCB) with auto announcement
PCB parts of outside C.P
* Inputs by additional function S/W and load compensation device.

DCD-20X PCB * INV. DOOR(=SAV1,MAV1,DAV1) CONTROL PCB (CPU: P80C31)
* Adjusts spec. speed pattern and closing force with DIP switch.
* Detects absolute position of 32 point by disc and photo-sensor.
DHG-161 PCB * L-Door Button PCB : G/A comm. With C.P
* Inputs by button and outputs by lamp
* Inputs by 2 additional hall function switches.
* Indicator(BCDoutput) + direction light + additional light +Lantern output
DOV-200 PCB * Auto announcement , parallel comm. with DCL-242 board
DHI-2XX,4XXPCB * Landing Indicator PCB (Vertical type ,Horizontal type)
* Indicates 19SEG floor, direction light, additional light
DCM-10X PCB * Landing and Car DML PCB : A combination Hall and Car
DCM-11X PCB * DML Floor & direction light, additional light(10X:Vertical,11X:Horizontal)
* Car INDICATOR PCB : LON comm.
DCM-12X PCB
* Hall indicates DOT MATRIX, Indicates direction light, additional light
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2. Comparison between Di210 & unified Si210 Controller.

Note: - Si210 Control Panel applied for Di1 elevator from January 2003.
- The type of Control Panel can be realized on the name plate of Control panel.
2-1. Summary
Unified Control Panel (hereafter: CP) means that CP of mid rise elevator (Si1, Di1) are
unified to Si210 CP. Model numbering is not changed as Si210 CP applied. For example:
1) Di1-PA15(1000)-CO-060-08/08 for Di1 elevator, 2) Si1-PA15(1000)-CO-060-08/08 for
Si1 elevator*
- The type of CP is written on CP.
Before unification
Si1 Machine, load detector for S.G*

Si1 CP Si1 T/M*: WLC,WMC(Brake: Current control)
(Si210)
Si1 DOOR: SBD1(Distributed control)
Si1 OPB:Si1
Si1 OPB : Si1 extemal,DCL-243
external, DCL-242 applied
applied
Si1 IND : Si1 external, DOT* essential
Di1 Machine, load detector for M/S*,PTM*

Di1 CP Di1 T/M : TK Type(Brake: Resistor control)
(Di210)
Di1 DOOR: SAV1(Distributed control no applied)
Di1 OPB : Di1 external, DCL-240 applied

Di1 OPB:Di1 extemal,DCL-244 applied
Di1 IND : Di1 external, 7-SEG* essential
After unification
Si1 Machine, load detector for S.G*
Si1 T/M*: WLC,WMC(Brake: Current control)
Si1 DOOR: SBD1(Distributed control)
Si1 OPB
Si1 : Si1 extemal,DCL-243
OPB:Si1 external, DCL-242 applied
applied
*: Unified CP Si1 IND : Si1 external, DOT* essential

(Si210)
1) Si1 elevator: SIGMA elevator
only for Korean market, Di1 Machine, load detector for M/S*,PTM*
2) S.G: Strain gauge, Di1 T/M : TK Type(Brake: Current control)
3) T/M: Traction Machine,
Di1 DOOR: SAV1(Distributed control applied)
4) DOT: Dot matrix Di1 OPB:Di1
Di1 OPB : Di1 extemal,DCL-243
external, DCL-242 applied
applied
5) 7-SEG: 7 Segment
Di1 IND : Di1 external, 7-SEG* essential
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2-2. Major changed parts

: This document shows changed items as installation view when Si210 CP is applied for
Di1elevator.
1) Door part
: The difference between Di1(SAV1,MAV1,DAV1,HAV1) and Si1(SBD1) is whether
distributed control is applied or not. Distributed control means communication
function between door PCB(DCD) & DCL PCB, and this function was applied
for Si1. Unified CP that is for Si1 & Di1 applies for the function. But there is no
reflected connector for Di1.
Therefore the function can be realized by using CONN PCB of apparatus box.
DCL-243 PCB
When one of SAV1, MAV1, DAV1& HAV1 door is applied,

DR CABLE(#AEG05C372) is to be wired and
connected between DCL PCB and CONN. PCB additionally.
(Related to TCD 145)
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Figure of DR CABLE: For the connection, refer to name tags on cable.
- When starting up Di1 with Si210 CP, following works are required for the door parts.
① Wire and connect DR CABLE(# AEG05C372)
② Insert the plugs of DR CABLE into DRIN/DROUT cap of DCL-243 PCB.
③ At another side of DR CABLE, connect receptacles into Y3-01,02, Y4-08,09 and
fork terminal to TERM1-01.
④ Caution: TERM1-01 is not the ground but P48V line. (If not connect, TCD 145
may occur)
⑤ Check if SPEC DATA in address $0014 is $01H.
⑥ Apparatus box on car top is not changed as comparing with Di1.

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
⑦ In case that there is any error on door PCB, TCD 192 may occur.
(Refer to the connection of Y4-08)

2) OPB PART
DCL PCB changed
Di1 with Di210(Di1 CP): DCL-244 PCB applied
Di1 with Si210(Unified CP): DCL-243 PCB applied
② The function of DIP S/W on DCL PCB
SPEC DATA for load detector(Potential meter) is different.
<DCL-244
< DCL-240 PCB>
PCB > <DCL-243
< DCL-242PCB>
PCB >
D IP SW 1 D IP SW 1
NO HEX O PB ID & T.R.* NO HEX O PB ID & T.R.*
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 X X 01 MAIN FR O NT 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 X X 01 MAIN FR O NT
2 0 1 0 0 0 0 X X 02 SUB FR O NT 2 0 1 0 0 0 0 X X 02 SUB FR O NT
3 1 1 0 0 0 0 X X 03 MAIN DISABLED 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 X X 03 MAIN D ISABLED
4 0 0 1 0 0 0 X X 04 SUB DISABLED 4 0 0 1 0 0 0 X X 04 SUB D ISABLED
5 X X X X X X 1 0 40 PTM * APPLIED 5 X X X X X X X 0 00 T.R.* O FF
6 X X X X X X X 0 00 T.R.* O FF 6 X X X X X X X 1 80 T.R .* O N
7 X X X X X X X 1 80 T.R.* O N
※ 0: OFF, 1: ON, X: N/A * T.R.: Terminal resistor
3) Car part
The decorative concept is differs between Di1 & Si1, but this document describes
the difference concerning control system.
Application of load detector is as follows:
- Di1: Micro switch and potential meter applied
- Si1: Strain gauge applied
① Above application is followed even unified CP.
② Installation procedures are same as before.
③ The adjustments of load detector(Micro switch and potential meter) are as follows:
★ SPEC DATA
Address: $0018H
1) Micro switch: $00H
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2) Potential meter X 1EA: $41H

3) Potential meter X 2EA: $42H
★ Load compensation (In case potential meter applied)
1) NO LOAD POINT SET: “A61E“(Same as Di1 CP)

2) FULL LOAD POINT SET: “A62E” (Keep 100% load in car,
and set “100E” by annunciator)
→ For the details, refer to below.
A62E - FULL LOAD POINT SET

[Preparation]
- Locate the car at bottom floor and keep the car 100% load.
- Switch NORMAL/STOP S/W on DOR-131 PCB to STOP.
- Place SW2 on DOC-1XX PCB to WE.
- Check if R5SC(Safety Check) relay is off.
- FULL LOAD POINT SET is to be done after NO LOAD POINT SET.
[Checking LCD]
- Press “A62E” and check if LCD is follow:
A C D = 0 3 [ 1 6 ] 0 0 % A C D = 0 3 [ 1 6 ] 0 0 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
K : A 6 2 E L O A D ? K : 1 0 0 E
When “LOAD?” is displayed, enter “100E”.

- When finishing FULL LOAD POINT SET, “SUCCESS” is displayed in 4th row.
If failed, “FAIL” is displayed in 4th row.
A C D = 0 3 [ 1 6 ] 1 0 0 % A C D = 0 3 [ 1 6 ] 0 0 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
S U C C E S S K : F A I L K :
And check if current load is displayed on LCD.

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Note:
- If the car is not on bottom floor, “MOVE BOT” appeared on 4th row.
- If R5SC is not off, “R5SC” appeared.
- If SW2 is not WE, “W ENABLE” appeared.
- If there is a problem on NO LOAD SET, “CHK NOLD” appeared.
4) Traction Machine part

The difference between Di1 and Si1 concerning Traction Machine(hereafter: TM)
① Brake control system concerning TM
- Di1: TM type(TKXS,TKM,TKL,TKXL) / resistor control by using BSR,BDR resistor

- Si1: TM type(WLC,WMC) / current control by using DPB-100 PCB.
② Connection of Rotary Encoder(hereafter: R.E)
Di1: The end of R.E CABLE consists of plug housing and connect to AD housing
on DOC-1XX.
Si1: It consist of cables with fork terminal and connect “TMLRE” terminal on DOM PCB
After unification
① Brake control system concerning TM
- Di1: TM type(TKXS,TKM,TKL,TKXL) / current control by using DPB-100 PCB.

- Si1: TM type(WLC,WMC) / current control by using DPB-100 PCB.
② Connection of R.E (Same as before)
- Di1: The end of R.E CABLE consists of plug housing and connect to AD housing
on DOC-1XX. Remove AD cable between DOC and DOM PCB, connect
the plug from R.E into AD housing on DOC-1XX.
- Si1: It consist of cables with fork terminal and connect “TMLRE” terminal on
DOM PCB.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
5) EE part
① Figure of unified CP: 1273(H)*750(W)*395(D)
Front Side View
DPB-100 PCB
DPC-14X PCB
DOC-120 PCB
DPP-1XX PCB
DOR-1XX PCB
DOM-110A PCB
DOP-116 PCB
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
② Auto announcement
: When applying unified CP for Di1 elevator, follow the works as follow:
◆ Auto announcement system is not changed as comparing Di1 CP.
◆ Traveling cable for speaker(Y3-19,20) is same like Di1 CP.
◆ Traveling cable Y3-19,20 is not connected to DOM PCB but SC-08,09.
◆ DOV-200 PCB is located behind DOC-1XX PCB.
◆ When applying for DOV-200 PCB set SPEC DATA address $0014 to $01.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
③ C1BR, C1ST contactor(hereafter: CTT.)
(Maker: LG→ INDIA TELCO)
Item D rawing NO S tandard application Remark

A E G04C 690*D TP 1-D 18(C 1B R) Motor 5.5~22kW 1E A /1S E T(C 1B R)
C ontactor A E G04C 691*B TP 1-32+D N22 Motor 5.5~11kW
(C 1B R, C 1S T) A E G04C 691*C TP 1-50+D N11 Motor 13~15kW 1E A /1S E T(C 1S T)
A E G05C 437*C TP 1-80+D N11 Motor 18~22kW
④ IPM, DPP PCB

Application IPM R .IGBT* DPP PCB
Motor 5.5kW 2R25370A (MIG50Q201H) N/A D PP -131(A EG05C267*A)
Motor 7.5kW 2R25371A (MIG75Q201H) N/A D PP -131(A EG05C268*A)
Motor 9.5~11kW A EG05C 441*A(P M100RS E120(LG)) N/A D PP -131(A EG05C269*A)
Motor 13~15kW A EG05C 440*A(P M150RS E120(LG)) N/A D PP -131(A EG05C270*A)
◆ IPM (AEG05C440*A, AEG05C441*A) in unified CP is named as S-IPM, other IPM is
just IPM.
◆ 15kW stack has same structure with 11kW stack depend on applying S-IPM.
That is, R.IGBT* is not used, applying DPP-131 PCB, other stack devices are
equal to 11kW.
*R.IGBT: Regenerative IGBT
⑤ Cable color application
Volts C able for signal C able for communication

10V & below Blue Blue/W hite
11~50V B rown -
51~415V Red -
⑥ Vinyl color(cap) of motor power cable application (from 23th manufacturing

week of 2002)
DIV. R,U S,V T,W
Color Black Red Blue

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
⑦ Transformer for control power application.
The transformer is different depending on door type.
DIV. Drawing NO Application Remark
SBD1 AEG02C272*A,B - Korean market only
SAV1,MAV1 AEG05C368*A 380, 400, 440V Terminal 12P
DAV1,HAV1 AEG05C368*B 380, 400, 440V Terminal 12P
⑧ ROM VERSION (Dated on Mar. 2003)
DIV. Version Remark
OS ROM V2.02 / V2.03 ROM Type: M27C2001-12F1

DOC-120 PCB
M_LON ROM V2.00 / V2.01
DPC-140 PCB
DPC-121 PCB OS ROM V3.01 / V3.20 TKXS TR M/C: V3.01 (TCD58)
DCL-242 PCB
DCL-243 PCB C_LON ROM V2.00 / V2.01
⑨ Traveling Cable & EVV Cable
★ Standard: Signal cable(36C)+Power cable(6C)+Communication cable(2C)
In case of DAV1 door type: Signal cable(42C)+Power cable(6C)+Communication

cable(2C) applied.
★ In case that Y5, 6 are applied, additional signal cable(30C) would be added.
(Observation elevator, Air conditioner, VMD, Car Door Locking Device, etc)
※ Cut view of the cables are shown on appendix.

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Appendix1. Cut view of Traveling cable
*BK: Black, WH: White
Appendix2. Cut view of EVV cable

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Appendix3. PCB application

1) PCB in Control Panel
DIV. PCB DWG. NO Application Remark
DOC PCB DOC-120 PCB ASY AEG02C257*B Standard OS ROM MC272001
DOA PCB DOA-100 PCB ASY 3X06304*A Standard
DPC PCB DPC-140 PCB ASY AEG10C432*A Standard
DOV PCB DOV-200 PCB ASY AEG05C369*A Auto announcement Di1 machine
DPB PCB DPB-100 PCB AEG02C265*A Standard Brake PCB
DPP-131 PCB ASY AEG02C267*A Motor 5.5~15kW 15kW S-IPM
DPP PCB
DPP-111 PCB ASY AEG02C293*B Motor 18~22kW IGBT
AEG05C281*B SAV1, MAV1 DOOR Door Fuse[3A]
DOP PCB DOP-116 PCB ASY
AEG05C281*C DAV1, HAV1 DOOR Door Fuse[6A]
AEG05C338*A Fire, private power R1HI RELAY N/A
DOM-110A PCB ASY
AEG05C338*B Fire, private power R1HI RELAY
DOM PCB
AEG05C322*A Standard, emergency R1HI RELAY N/A
DOM-111A PCB ASY
AEG05C322*B Standard, emergency R1HI RELAY
DOR-100C PCB ASY AEG05C288*A Korean emergency
AEG00C697*A Supervisory panel R4FSX RELAY N/A
DOR-101 PCB ASY
AEG00C697*B Korean supervisory panel R4FSX RELAY
AEG05C290*A Fire R4FMX RELAY N/A
DOR-110A PCB ASY
AEG05C290*B Emergency (export) R4FMX RELAY
DOR PCB
DOR-120 PCB ASY AEG02C262*A Private power
AEG05C286*A Standard
AEG05C286*B Micro leveling R1ML RELAY
DOR-131 PCB ASY
AEG05C286*C Emergency R4LF RELAY
AEG05C286*D Micro leveling & emergency R1ML&R4LF RELAY
IFMAIN2 PCB IFMAIN2 PCB ASY 2R25081*A VMD
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2) PCB in others
DIV. PCB DWG. NO Application Remark
AEG08C734*A 25~32 floor
AEG08C734*C 17~24 floor
DCL PCB DCL-243 PCB ASY Standard
AEG08C734*D 9~16 floor
AEG08C734*E 1~8 floor
DCD-201 PCB ASY 2R24690*A SAV1 DOOR
DCD PCB DCD-203 PCB ASY 2R24690*C MAV1 DOOR
DCD-204 PCB ASY 2R24690*B DAV1 DOOR
AEG02C376*A Standard
DHG PCB DHG-161 PCB ASY
AEG02C376*B Duplex HUC,HDC,HI2,HF1,HF2,HC1,HC2 MIC
DHI-201 PCB ASY 3X08831A 2 digits(vertical type) IND TYPE :VID TYPE INDICATOR
DHI-221 PCB ASY 3X08837A 2 digits(horizontal type) IND TYPE :HID-A/C132
DHI-231 PCB ASY 3X08840A 2 digits(horizontal type) IND TYPE :HID-A/C122
DHI PCB DHI-430 PCB ASY AEG05C867*A 2 digits(vertical & slim type) IND TYPE :VID-M532S
DHI-440 PCB ASY AEG05C868*A 3 digits(vertical & slim type) IND TYPE :VID-M532S
DCI-210 CB ASY 3X03440A 1 digit CPI TYPE : CID-10
DCI-230 PCB ASY 3X03442A 0 digit OPB TYPE : CBM-10,21,31C
DHF-120 PCB ASY AEG02C264*A H.Lantern, H.Chime SIMPLEX
DHF PCB
DHF-121 PCB ASY AEG02C264*B DUPLEX (HF2,HFP2,HFU2,HFD2 MIC)
MULTI PCB MULTI PCB ASY AEN06C601*A OPB sharing SUB, disabled OPB
EM.UNIT EM UNIT ASY 3R45835A 12V DC
INTERPHONE OPB INTERPHONE PCB 2R23182A OPB INTERPHONE
PCB
DAC PCB DAC-200 PCB ASY AEG00B205*A ALP
Annunciator
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Field Industrial Engineering SI210 Controller Date July.2006
Index
1. Description of ANN screen………………………………………………………. 1

1.1 Initial screen of annunciator ………………………………………………..…1
1.2 ACD MODE ……………………………………...……………………………..2
2. ANN Function Mode ………………………………………………………...……3
3. Annunciator Mode………………………………………………………...……….6
4. Trace Data reference Method ……………………………………………..…...16

4.1 Mode for Error Log Table reference …………………………………….......16
4.2 Key function………………………………………………………………..…...16
4.3 Additional Information Flag Table ………………………………………..….18
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
1. Description of ANN screen

1.1. Initial screen of annunciator
Initial screen : When the main power turn on, LCD display will show as below.
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16
R1 A C D = 0 4 [ 0 1 ] 0 0 %
R2 E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
R3 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
R4 K :
1) Row 1 : Operation mode, present floor, load weight and speed of elevator.
① ACD=27(Column1~ 6) : Operation Code( ex: 27*Auto operation, 4*Maintenance
operation...) ※ Refer to the MODE Description
② 01FL(Column 8 ~11) : Present floor
③ 00%(Column 13 ~ 16) : On stop, present load weight (%) of the elevator.
2) Row 2 : When an error occurs, it shows the trouble code of the top level error,
condition of the operation, output of main signal and direction of elevator.
① E000(Column 2 ~ 4) : Trouble code of top level error.(TCD No. 1 ~ 255)
ex)
031 DC LINK Overvoltage 116 POSI ON error(LDU)
052 INV reverse running detection 172 SD1U input error
084 R5SC RELAY ON error 200 CNET LON comm. Error
② 00(Column 6 ~ 7) : Operation condition of the top level error
ex)
01 R5SC Cut 10 FAST RUN Cut
02 R5SC Cut possible 20 SAFETY Drive operation possible
04 C1ST Cut 40 REST operation possible
08 C1ST Cut possible 80 HALL CALL Cut possible
③ 100100(Column 9 ~ 14) : Displays output of main signals.

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
- "1" : Means that switches, relay and contactors, etc. are operating.
- "0" : Means that switches, relay and contactors, etc. are not operating.
- Each column means as follows;
C9 R5SC C10 C1ST C11 C1BR C12 C1BS
C13 DOOR OPEN command C14 DOOR CLOSE command
④ S(C16) : Displays the present direction of elevator.
- "S" : STOP "U" : UP "D" : DOWN
3) Row 3 : Displays input condition of main signal such as switches, relays and
contactor, etc.
C1 R5SC C5 LDC C9 C1ST C13 CDS
C2 48V C6 LDCX C10 C1BR C14 DCLS
C3 UL C7 SDS1D C11 SUPPRESS C15 DOLS
C4 DL C8 SDS1U C12 LDS C16 SES
- "1" : Means that switches, relay and contactors, etc. are operating.
- "0" : Means that switches, relay and contactors, etc. are not operating.
1.2 ACD MODE

Mode Description Mode Description Mode Description
00 Stop 01 ALP operation 02 Earthquake control door open
03 Failure 04 MAINT operation 05 Earthquake control finished
06 Earthquake control 07 Earthquake ctrl slow opr 08 Bottom F slow opr (Spec.ROM F height error)
09 F/H measurement prep. 0A F height meas. Opr 0B Bottom F slow opr (C.RAM F height error)
nd
0C Unused 0D Unused 0E 2 fire opr
0F 1st fire operation 10 Arrival opr finished 11 All Fs opr after earthquake ctrl
12 Emergency return opr. 13 Fireman opr 14 Fireman return opr
15 Rescue arrival opr. 16 Rescue opr 17 Rescue arrival opr finished
18 Rescue return opr. 19 Fire operation finished 1A Fire opr
1B TM temp. detecting opr finished 1C TM temp. detecting opr 1D Unused
1E EGN driven opr finished 1F EGN driven opr 20 CP temp.detecting opr finished
21 CP temp. detecting opr. 22 REST 23 Standby opr finished
24 ATT operation 25 Semi-auto opr 26 Backup opr
27 Auto-operation 28 Aircon. drain oper.

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2. ANN Function Mode
Annunciator function mode

MAIN MODE SUB MODE Resetting
Classification
MAIN MODE KEY Input SUB MODE KEY Input KEY Input
Operation Floor height measurement Op. ★ A12E START 3 FFFF
related mode Input lowest floor call ★ A13E
Input middle floor call ★ A14E
Input highest floor call ★ A15E
Input lowest floor call (Hold) ★ A16E FFFF
Input middle floor call (Hold) ★ A17E
Input highest floor call (Hold) ★ A18E
Input random floor call CxxE xx -> Floor
Memory DATA READ & WRITE ★ A21E Address INC 0 FFFF
related mode ★ A22E Address DEC 8
Address Input xxxxE
Address Re-input BBB
PROTECTION release AAE
Data Input xxE
TRACE DATA READ A23E Item INC 0 FFFF
(TRACE when error occurs Item DEC 8
5000h ~ ) Block INC 1
Block DEC 9
TRACE DATA READ A24E Item INC 0 FFFF
(TRACE when reset occurs Item DEC 8
4400h ~ ) Block INC 1
Block DEC 9
Statistics Data read & A25E Item INC 0 FFFF
Deletion Item DEC 8
DATA Deletion CCCC
Statistics Data deletion A26E Deletion check E FFFF
Reset count without power failure A27E FFFF
Emergency stop TRACE A28E Item INC 0 FFFF
Data read Item DEC 8
Deletion all CCCC
Spec SPEC DATA READ & WRITE ★ A31E Address INC 0 FFFF
related mode ★ A32E Address DEC 8
Address Input xxxxE
PROTECTION release AAE
Data Input xxE
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
※ ★ mark is same function as DI1 model.
※ ★ mark is same function as DI1 model

Classification
MAIN MODE KEY Input SUB MODE KEY Input KEY Input
Error TCD DISPLAY ★ A41E TABLE INC 0 FFFF
related mode TABLE DEC 8
ERROR LOG DISPLAY ★ A42E TABLE INC 0
TABLE DEC 8
First error 1 FFFF
Last error 9
Display mode change C
(Time->Trace)
ERROR LOG CLEAR ★ A43E
TCD CLEAR ★ A44E
DSP mode DSP READ ★ A51E Address INC 0 FFFF
Address DEC 8
Address Input xxxxE
DSP SPEC WRITE ★ A52E
Parameter NO LOAD POINT SET ★ A61E FFFF
related mode FULL LOAD POINT SET ★ A62E Load Input xxxE FFFF
HALF LOAD POINT SET A65E Load Input xxxE FFFF
RTC SET ★ A69E Date/Time mode change C FFFF
Data Input xxE
State check OS ROM version check A01E FFFF
mode DSP ROM version check A02E FFFF
PCB Protection check A03E FFFF
Multi-step deceleration value check A06E FFFF
Door condition check A71E FFFF
Car Load display A86E FFFF
Device Test Hall Check Mode A82E FFFF
mode Car Check Mode A83E FFFF
POSI measurement mode ★ A85E UP operarion UP Switch FFFF
DN operation DN Switch
110% Function test mode A87E Testing Load Input (%) xxE FFFF
SDS Test mode A89E SDS Test (UP) 3 FFFF
SDS Test (DN) 7
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
※ ★ mark is same function as DI1 model

Classification
3. Annunciator MAIN
Mode MODE KEY Input SUB MODE KEY Input KEY Input
Other mode LCD INITIALIZE " 00000 " FFFF
DCO On Mode A84E FFFF
110% Cut mode ★ A88E
CRT Data reset A90E
ESMI Control(Maint) A91E A93E
ESMI Control(Inspection) A92E A93E
ESMI Control Reset A93E
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
00000 = LCD Initialize

** Preparation **
1. Set the S/W 3 on DOC-120 PCB to the DOA Off position.
2. Set the S/W 3 to the DOA On position after connects between DOA-100 and DOC-120.
** Screen check **
1. Press the '0' over 4 times and then LCD will be displayed within 3 sec.
A01E = OS ROM Version check

** Screen check **
1. Check the Ver. No and Date at Row 4 after A C D = 2 7 [ 5 ] 5 0 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
input A01E.
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
2. Ex) Version 1.0, creation date is July 15th 1999. V 0 1 . 0 0 9 9 / 0 7 / 1 5
3. Auto-reset about 2.5 sec passed.
A02E = DSP ROM Version check

** Screen check **
1. Check the Ver. No and Date at Row 4 after
A C D = 2 7 [ 5 ] 5 0 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
input A02E.
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
2. Ex) Version 1.0, creation date is July.1999. V 0 3 . 0 0 9 9 . 0 7
3. Auto-reset about 2.5 sec passed.
A03E = PCB Protection check

** Screen check **
1. In case that the PCB Protection function is not
A C D = 2 7 [ 5 ] 5 0 %
applied (for export)
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
- Shows "PROTECT DESABLED" at Row 4. 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
P R O T E C T D I S A B L E D
2. Protection function is applied (for domestic) A C D = 2 7 [ 5 ] 5 0 %

- Shows "PROTECT ENABLED" at Row 4. P e r mi s s i o n : X
R E MA I N : 3 3 6 H o u r
P R O T E C T E N A B L E D
3. Auto-reset about 6 sec passed.

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
CXXE = Random floor call

** Screen check ** A C D = 2 7 [ 6 ] 5 0 %
1. If makes call of 8th floor : 'C08E' Input. E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
If makes call of 12th floor : 'C12E' Input. 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
K : C 0 8 E
A06E = Multi-step deceleration function Parameter check

** Screen check **
2 S t e p
1. Multi-deceleration function is not applied,
D e c e l e r a t i o n
annunciator will be shows 'DISABLED'
- - > D I S A B L E D
Auto-reset if press the any key. K :
2. Multi-deceleration function is applied, T 9 = 1 . 0 T 1 0 = 0 . 5

annunciator will be shows as picture. A c c = . 3 3 J e r k = . 3 3
Row 1 Data (unit=sec) P l a t e : 4 9 6 0 m m
U P : [ 1 4 ] D N : [ 0 3 ]
T9 : Time setting of 1st deceleration zone velocity :
Rising Time Set (Multi-step deceleration function)
T10: Time setting of 1st deceleration zone uniform velocity
Row 2 Data
Max. acceleration and Jerk of 1st deceleration zone according to setting of T9 and T10.
Row 3 Data (unit=mm)

Running distance from 2nd deceleration start point to stop position of E/L,
it is corresponding to above data (Row 2 Data)
; Min. distance from last floors level to shelter plate
Row 4 Data
shelter plate fixing distance
3. Auto-reset if press the any key.
A23E = Error TRACE Data read (Error TRACE DATA clear A22E $3FF2 =>”00”)
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
** Screen check **
1. "TRC X-Y" will be displayed after input A23E
X : Traced Total Block No. Y : Present Block No.
Screen of A23E
A C D = 0 3 [ F ] 5 0 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
Item No. 0 0 : 5 0 0 0 = 0 8 2 4 1 6 2 2
T R C 5 3 0
- 1 K :
Address
Total Block No. Traced Block No.
2. To read the Item No. on the higher, input '0' or lower , input '8'
ex) If you input '0' two times on A23E initial screen, indicates as below.(Address will
be increase 4 per one)
LCD Screen
A C D = 0 3 [ F ] 5 0 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
0 2 : 5 0 0 8 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 1
T R C 3 - 1 K :
The displayed data and address are Hexadecimal value.

3. To read the Block No. on the higher, input '1' or lower , input '9'
ex) If you input '1' one time on A23E initial screen, indicates as below. (Address will
be increase 400 per one)
A C D = 0 3 [ F ] 5 0 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S Note] Refer to the Trace Data reference Method
0 0 : 5 4 0 0 = 0 8 2 4 1 6 2 2
T R C 3 - 2 K :
4.To cancel A23E mode, input 'FFFF'
A24E = Reset TRACE Data read

** Screen check **
A C D = 0 3 [ F ] 5 0 %
1. The method is same as above A23E mode.
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
(Address start from 4400)
0 0 : 4 4 0 0 = 0 8 2 4 1 6 2 2
T R C 3 - 1 K :
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
A25E = Statistic Data read

** Screen check **
1. "STA DATA" will be displayed at Row 4 after input A25E.
LCD Screen
A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 5 0 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S Note] Refer to the Trace Data reference Method
0 1 = 4 5 . 0 2 3 k M
S T A D A T A K :
Statistic data Number Statistic value
2.To read data number on higher, input '0' or lower '8'

ex) If you input '0' two time on A25E initial screen, indicates as below.
LCD Screen
A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 5 0 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
0 3 = 2 3 8 5 c n t
S T A D A T A K :
Statistic data Number Total running count
3.To clear the value of Data number, input 'CCCC'. But, number 1~9 are impossible to clear.
ex) If you input "CCCC"at data number 12, the original data will be changed to '0'.
LCD Screen Note] The Units of statistic data
A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 5 0 % 1) Distance [km]
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S 2) Time [hh:mm:ss]
1 2 = 0 c n t
C C C C 3) Count [cnt]
S T A D A T A K :
4) Rate [%]
A26E = Statistic Data Clear

** Screen check **
1. All statistic data in Data number 10~22 will be clear after input A26'E'.
A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 5 0 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
S T A D A T A R E S E T
[ E ] E N T E R K :
2.To cancel A26E mode, input 'FFFF' without clear.

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
A27E = Non power failure Reset Count read

** Screen check **
1. "ResetCnt" will be displayed at Row 4 after input A27E.
LCD Screen
A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 5 0 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
C n t = 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 3 3 1 the latest occurred reset (Nov. 1st 13:31)
R e s e t C n t K :
Non power failure Reset Count
2. To cancel A27E mode, input 'FFFF'

3. Non power failure Reset Count will cleared when the Log Clear(A43E) mode
is accomplished.
4. To clear the reset count when the maintenance finish by A43E.
A28E = Emergency stop Trace Data read

** Screen check **
1. "ESTPxx-yy" will be displayed at Row 4 after input A28E.
LCD Screen
A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 5 0 %
F L = 0 5 D A T A = 0 0 0 2
D A T E = 0 7 / 1 0 1 6 : 1 5
E S T P 0 2 - 0 1 K :
Total Traced data count The rank of the present Traced data count
2. Row 2 "FL=" Emergency stop occurred floor, "DATA=" The reason of the emergency stop,
it is related toTCD 164.
Row 3 "DATE=" Data of emergency stop occurred time. (Occur on July. 10th 16:15 at
5th floor by safety circuit off)
3. '0' key for displaying the next data and before data is displayed by '8' key.
To clear all data has been stored, input 'CCCC' and auto-reset the mode.
'FFFF' is reset this mode without data clear
A65E = Half Load point set (50% precision load setting)

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
** Preparation **
1. Loading weight 40% ~ 60% on the cage at bottom floor.
2. NORMAL/STOP S/W to STOP position in controller.
3. S/W2 to WRITE position on DOC PCB
4. Check if R5SC(Safety circuit check) Relay is OFF
5. Make sure that NO LOAD POINT setting passed and then try to HALF LOAD setting.
** Screen check **
1. Input A65E
LCD Screen
A C D = 0 3 [ 1 ] 4 2 % A C D = 0 3 [ 1 ] 4 2 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
K : A 6 5 E L O A D ? K : 0 5 0 E
Indicates 'LOAD ?' at Row 4, input the percentage of the loaded weights with decimal value.
ex) 50% --> 050E, 60% --> 060E
2. When the weight compensation for comp. chain/rope is done.

Indicates 'SUCCESS' at Row 4, if fail, the process will show 'FAIL'.
LCD Screen
A C D = 0 3 [ 1 ] 5 0 % A C D = 0 3 [ 1 ] 4 2 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
S U C C E S S K : F A I L K :
** Reference ** Check below if failed the Half Load

When the car is not located in bottom floor, point setting
indicates 'MOVE BOT'at Row 4. * NORMAL/STOP S/W position (STOP)
'R5SC OFF': Safety relay is OFF * S/W2 (WRITE)
** The present situation for Half Load Point **

- The real load in car is detected by set value of no load and full load point. But in case
the relation of detecting feature graph is not line symmetry but curved line symmetry,
some error may occur around half load about 8% even the detected value around of no load
and full load are almost exact, Then performing the half load point setting, it will reduce
the load detecting error.
A71E = Door condition check
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
** Screen check **
1. "INV DOOR" will be displayed at Row 4 after input A71E.
LCD Screen
A C D = 0 3 [ 1 ] 0 0 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
O : 0 0 0 I : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
I N V D O O R K :
Row 3 Door output status

O:0 0 0
Disabled persons door signal ( '1' On )
Nudging signal output ( '1' On )
Door CPU Retry signal ( '1' On )
Row 3 Door input status
I:0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DOOR CPU WDT Signal( '1' Normal )
DOOR Error #1
DOOR Error #2
DOOR Error #3
MON Signal ( '1' Detection )
CLS Signal ( '1' Detection )
** Door Error **
** Caution **
Door Er r or 3 Door Er r or 2 Door Er r or 1 1.In case the site has applied
Posi t i on er r or 0 0 1 SAV1,MAV1,DAV1,HAV1
door. Door Error1 will set
Temper at ur e er r or 0 1 1
when an error occurring as
Vol t age er r or 1 0 1
Door thermal, low voltage,
Cur r ent er r or 1 1 1 over voltage, over current.
Command er r or 1 1 0 2. Refer to TCD 192 and Door
H/W Ske. for more
Information.
A82E = Hall Check mode

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
** Caution **
This mode for checking the Hall B/T ID,Indicator,Hall call register lamp,Hall Lantern...
** Screen check **
1. "HALL CHK" will be displayed at Row 4 after input A82E. This mode is available under
attendant operation and OLS ON status.
LCD Screen
A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 0 0 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
H A L L C H K K :
** Check point **
1). Dip S/W setting condition of Floor ID on DHG PCB.(HEX value)
2). DC 24V check between HA connector 3 and 4 .
3). Check if light on of B/T lamp till 2~3sec after press the B/T under HA is connected
condition.
4). Check if IND Digital, Direction lamp, Additional lamp(Inspect ,Full) are in due order
flickling.
5). Separates the HA connector from DHG PCB, when above 2,4 items are normal
condition.
6). Repeats above 1)~5)items on each floors B/T.
§ Separates the HA connector from DHG PCB, when all indicators are turned off for
protection of PCB from electric shock.
2. To cancel A82E mode, input 'FFFF'.
A83E = Car Check mode

** Caution **
This mode for checking the DCL PCB ID in car side.
** Screen check **
1. "CAR CHECK" will be displayed at Row 4 after input A83E. This mode is available under
attendant operation and OLS ON status.
A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 0 0 %
LCD Screen
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
1) Displays the floor character (B2~B1, 1 ~ 10, 20,
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
30...) in due order. C A R C H K K :
2). Lights on the CPI lamp (UP,DOWN,FULL,OUT OF SERVICE) in due order.
3). Repeats above 1)~2) items per 6 sec.
A86E = Car Load Mode
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
** Screen Check **
1."WD:XXX%" will be displayed at Row 4 after input A86E. XXX is counted the present
car load (%) .
LCD Screen
A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 0 4 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
1 4 F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AD Converter data of Potentiometer or DFTR
WD : 0 0 4 % K :
AD Converter input data of second POT(DFTR)
AD Converter input data of first POT(DFTR)
Row 4 "WD:XXX%" XXX means changed load data from load sensors input loads.
A87E = 110% Function test mode
** Screen Check **
1. "110-> " will be displayed at Row 4 after input A87E.
LCD Screen
A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 0 4 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
1 1 0 - > K :
1) The availableness data for input on "110->XX" is from 0 upto 99.

ex) When you try to 110% load test with 20% of car load, input "20E".
"110->20" will be displayed at Row 4 after input "20E".
2) If the load is heavy then displayed data, light in "FULL" lamp, BZ operation and
Door close holding.
2.To cancel A87E mode, input 'FFFF'.
A88E = 110% Cut Mode
* 110% Cut Mode is a function that E/L can running one time with 110% load in car under
superintendent inspects.
** Screen Check ** A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 0 4 %
1. "110% CUT" will be displayed at Row 4 after E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
input A88E then disappear after about
1 1 0 % C U T K :
2.5 sec passed.
2. The mode will be auto-canceled after car running start.
A89E = SDS Check Mode

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
** Screen Check **
1. "SDS CHK" will be displayed at Row 4 after input A89E.
LCD Screen
A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 0 4 %
1 U : 0 0 0 0 1 D : 1 7 3 9 S/W operates distance (unit:mm)
2 U : 0 0 0 0 2 D : 2 6 7 3
S D S C H K K :
2. Check of SDS operates position

-> If the car is not reached at top floor, 1U/2U data will be show "0000".
After running to top floor, will be shows measured data as below;
A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 0 4 %
1 U : 1 7 3 4 1 D : 1 7 3 9
2 U : 2 6 6 8 2 D : 2 6 7 3
S D S C H K K :
3. Compulsion deceleration function test

** Caution : Testing without passenger and under door closed (DMC S/W ON).
Key in "3" for the Up direction test after the

A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 0 4 %
car is located at below than middle floor.
1 U : 1 7 3 4 1 D : 1 7 3 9
2 U : 2 6 6 8 2 D : 2 6 7 3 Check if the car deceleration is changing
S D S C H K K : 3 well by SDS operates.
Deceleration running till UL S/W operates)
Key in "7" for the Down direction test after

A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 0 4 % the car is located at above than
1 U : 1 7 3 4 1 D : 1 7 3 9
middle floor.
2 U : 2 6 6 8 2 D : 2 6 7 3
Check if the car deceleration is changing
S D S C H K K : 7
well by SDS operates.
(Deceleration running till DL S/W operates)
A90E = CRT Data Reset Mode
All recorded CRT control data reset in Main B/D
A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 0 4 %
. (Service floor data, Door timer) E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S
** Screen Check ** 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
C R T R e s e t K :
1."CRT Reset" will be displayed at Row 4 after
input A90E then disappear after about 2.5 sec passed 2. MODE Auto cancellation
4. Trace Data reference Method
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
4.1. Mode for Error Log Table reference

: Key in ‘A42E’ under normal mode
4.2. Key function
‘0’ : Log Table Index Increment
‘8’ : Log Table Index Decrement
‘1’ : Scanning of the first occurred TCD
‘9’ : Scanning of the last occurred TCD
‘C’ : Displays TCD occurrence time ÅÆ Displays Trace Data (Toggle)
‘FFFF’ : Escape from Error Log Table reference mode
* Key usage is same as under trace data displaying mode.
< Occurrence time displaying >
Breakdown time
Each 2 digit display Month,
A C D = 2 7 [ 1 2 ] 1 0 % day, hour, minute
E 2 2 3 - 0 0 0 5 1 5 1 4 2 0 May 15th14H 20M
C n t = 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
L O G 1 1 - 0 1 K : Trouble solved time
Displays Occurrence sequence: The first breakdown of all 11 trouble
Breakdown times : Initialized when log table be cleared
Trouble code
< Trace Data Displaying >

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Lift position when breakdown
Operation mode when breakdown Running speed when breakdown
Car run direction

Current
A C D = 0 3 [ 1 0 ] 6 0 M
when breakdown
reference TCD
E 2 2 3 - 0 0 1 0 0 % U
C 1 F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
T R C 1 1 - 0 1 K :
Load when
breakdown
Displays Log Data

Sequence and Trace Additional
Data reference mode information
Sped Profile
Output contact About each
Step when break
Input contact when breakdown breakdown
down
when breakdown Refer to B.
Refer to C.
Refer to A.
A. Input contact Bit Table
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
R5SX SCS R5SC SUPRS C1ST C1BR DOLS LDS CDS LDU LDC LDD
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Maint
UL SD1U SD2U SD2D SD1D DL SHOE RDMC High R1MM CLS
M
* SUPRS : DSP RUN Flag * R1MM : MSK operation signal input

* Maint M : Machine room Maint signal Input * High : Car high switch input
B. Output Contact Bit Table
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R5SC SUPRS C1ST C1BR R2OP R2CL R1ML R2DM
C. Speed Profile Step

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Smooth Smooth Smooth Smooth
wave in wave in wave in wave in Finish
Steady Normal Steady
beginning finishing beginning finishing
Stop
part
accelerati
part
speed
part
decelerati
part
speed
on running on Profile
accelerati acceleratio deceleratio decelerati
on n n on
4.3. Additional Information Flag Table
TCD 5 10 56 70 74 92 96 97 98 99 114
Servo Hexa High DOC Gear ΦB ON CLS CLS R5SC OFF
0
deci- mode B/D CAR error

miss
mal
I/O
value
R7RD T/M ΦA IN CAR CDS CDS C1ST ON
1
error
miss
Car Rated Normal LDS LDS C1BR
2
speed (CAR)
Mode Normal OLS OLS R2LD
(Russia
3
Additional Information Bit
m/c
room)
7 6 5 4
Hall Encoder OLS

Motor LDC
CRT IGBT SD1U
Error CT turn SD1D
Duplex Shelter M/C
plate room
8
No. maint
ANN Floor Normal
9
No. (CAR)
Dispatc
D C B A
h
Spec
SVC.
2 step-
decelera
E
t-ion
time
F
Set bit is input of

error detected
Remark
Bit
Remark
TCD
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ON
OFF
error
error
116
FOD
ON
OFF
error
error
117
Field Industrial Engineering
Set bit is off error detected
lsion
ation
switch.
SD1D
SD2U
SD2D
SD1U
119
Compu
deceler
Counted speed in operation
controller when error
detected.
126
Hexadecimal
Value (m/min)
Load status when error

detected
value
(15th bit : minus load)

130
Hexadecimal
SI210 Controller
Input contact when error

CLS
LDS
OLS
RDZ
MMR Elevator_SI
CDS
detected
132
Test & Commissioning for
(When activated ‘1’)

CLS
LDS
OLS
RDZ
CDS
detected
133

Date
Page

Rev. No.
CLS
LDS
OLS
Doc. No.
RDZ
CDS
detected
134

CLS
LDS
OLS
CDS
detected
0
135
DL

20/21
July. 2006
EL) 06-008
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
TCD 136 164 168 171 188 190 191~195 196

Mode R5SX Off Detect low Level CLD Paramet Door error 1 Reopen
error speed 500mm er count
0
overshoot SPEC excess

error
ALP error R5SY Off Detect over CDS Off error Door error 2
1
speed
Over R5SC Off LDS Down Door error 3
speed On
2
error
Operation LDS Off OLS Up On
3
error error
Floor CDS Off Abnormal
height speed when
4
Sum power fault

Operation ON CAR Abnormal
cut On direction
5
when power
Bit
fault
Safety cut IN CAR SDS Over
6
On Speed
Error Abnormal
7
detection Backup RAM

Normal
8
Off
C1BR Off
A 9
C1ST Off
DL
B
activated
UL
C
activated
E D
F

Input contact when
Set bit is a reason
Set bit is a reason
Set bit is a reason
Set bit is a reason
Set bit is a reason
Time over in case

Photo-shoe input
Bit #0 is reset.
Refer to “A71E”
Remark
error detected
mode in ANN
manual
of error
of error
of error
of error
of error
Pcb
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Index
1. PCB application…………………………..…………………………………..…1
2. DOC PCB…………..………………………………….………….…………......3
3. DOA-100 PCB…………………………….…………..………………….…….11
4. DOP-116 PCB………………………..……………………..……..……….…..11
5. DPC PCB……………………………………………………………………….14
6. DPP-10X PCB…………………………………………………..……….….…19
7. DCL PCB…………………………………………………………..…………...23
8. DOV PCB………………………………………….………………..………….27
9. DOS PCB………………………………………………………………………29
10. DHG PCB……………………………………………….……………………34
11. DCM PCB…………………………………………..………………………...40
12. DPB PCB…………………………………………………………………….42
13. DOR PCB…………………………………………………………………….43

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
1. PCB application
1.1 PCB classification
1) Classification by name
A B C D E F
Type Location Function Speed Seg. Work. seg.
Working Segment
When works are

Function
segmented within a PCB,
mark with 0~9.
PCB Segment
When the PCBs of the same
PCB speed segment function has various
1 : 60 ~ 105m／min forms and are not cla-
2 : 120 ~ 150m／min ssified in A,B,C and
3 : 180 ~ 240m／min D, mark with 0~9,
When the PCB is used commonly A, B… sequentially.
regardless of speed,
PCB function segment
use the type name developed
C : Control
and applied first.
P : Power (Power supply)
A : Annunciator
S : Supervisory panel
PCB location seg. L : LON
P : Power electronics R : I／O(Input／Output)
O : Operation D : Door
H : Hall G : G／A (Gate Array)
C : Car I : Indicator
D : Door V :Voice(Voice synthesizer)

D:Distributed control F : Flickering
S : Monitoring panel
M : Dot Matrices
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2) PCB application standard
Segment Usage Speed Si210 60~105 m/min
Main CPU PCB for operations DOC-120(Expansion, Unified model)
Control DSP PCB speed control DPC - 120, 121
Panel GDC PCB DPP - 111,131
Power rectifying section DOP -116
ANN PCB DOA - 100
Mic PCB DOM - 110A
Relay PCB DOR - 101,110A,120,131
Panel for local Supervisory DOS-100
Brake Control PCB DPB-100(Expansion, Unified model)
Safety Relay PCB DOR-131(Expansion, Unified model)
Car Car LON PCB DCL-242
CPI PCB DCM-10X,11X,12X. DCI-2XX
Hall PCB DHG - 161
Hall Vertical type PCB DCM - 1XX,DHI-20X,430,440
Horizontal type PCB DCM - 11X,DHI-2XX
Door INV. DOOR PCB DCD-20X,

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2. DOC PCB
2.1 Layout of DOC PCB
1) Diagram of DOC-120 PCB
SW2
+5V WE
SD
ANN
ANNUNCIATOR
1 Green CONNECTOR
TD1 EEPROM : Write Enable
ST Green : able to Write
TD2
1 Green : unable to Write
TD3 DOA-100
SH
EXT1
POWER S/W SW3
G/A Comm.
1 HJP
Terminal
SM resistor set. SH R/E Direction setting
CAR Comm.
JP1
1 (Jumper in
SM :TR-M/C Normal set
case of :TR-M/C Rev ered set Terminal resistor
SL
SC
SL terminal)
1 Red DIR
DIR Main CPU
RIGHT
LEFT
Reset Red ALM
SPEC2
MRES BAT1
SPEC1
CB Green SYS1
Conn Function
Display ing
SD DEBUG LED Function Green SYS2
condition
1 ST HPC I/F
⊙ Comm.OK Hall RAM Red PF
SH HALL Communication TD1 TMR1 Back-
○ Stand by Comm.Check
SM CRT Communication
Green
Comm.OK CRT Comm. Up LON
SL Spare(No use) TD2 ⊙ Battery
CA Stand by Check Red
CB CAR Safety SW(1,2fire operation) ○ CDS
Comm.OK Display ing
CA CAR DOOR(OPB SW,SES..) ⊙ LED Function
TD3 Spare Condition
1 HA HALL,PIT SW ○ Stand by
○ Normal
AC Additional output DIR R/E direct. detect to VA
● Detect
AA INPUT(Fire,Airconditioner...)
Seg. Function connector
HA AB OUTPUT(Fire,Airconditioner...) ○ Normal Alarm
NOR/ABNOR DZ checking during power failure ALM of DPC
● Detect sign. detect
AD R/E power,Φ A,Φ B phase detection PCB
MIANT Door open is available at out of DZ under Mainte
Run CPU
1 SC CAR Communication SY S1 ⊙ Normal
WDT
TB1 PCB power supply(5V, 15V, GND) Safety Error Safety CTT
R5SC ○ Speed CPU
AC AF SW connection in CP condition
SY S2 ⊙ Normal
WDT
● Safety
CT CTT connection in CP
○ OPEN Hall door Normal
R2LD PF ○ Power failure
1 MAINT NORMAL condition Detect detect
● CLOSE ●
1 4
2 Door Zone LON comm.
5 RDZ ○ DZ LON ⊙ Normal
3 6 condition check DSP
AA ABNORMAL ● Out of
Car door operation
R1ML
○ CTT OFF Each CTT CDS ○ OPEN
5V
1 Red Red Red Red Red Red CLOSE condition
R7LF ●
R7FN ● CTT ON
condition 15V
LED Condition
R5SC R2LD RDZ R1ML R7LF R7FN
○ OFF ● ON GND
AB BUZ
⊙ Blinking GND
1
SW that detect door open zone
DOC-120
G48
1 with beeping when MG Brake
3
opened forcedly AEG02C257
A TB1
AF CT
2.2 Function of DOC PCB

1) Details
DIR (red): Indicates rotary encoder direction setting. If there is any error
on the direction setting, LED will light up. If normal, LED will remain off.
ALM (red): Indicates alarms. If there is one error among the following 5
conditions, relative LED will light up.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
No. Conditions Error detection method
1 Safety relay error R5SC Relay remains OFF
2 DOC PCB Watchdog error SYS1 LED remains ON or OFF
3 DPC PCB Watchdog error SYS2 LED remains ON or OFF
4 P48V error PF LED remains ON (Lights up)
5 LON communication error SER LED remains ON
SYS1 :Flickers when DOC Watchdog is normal. If abnormal, remains ON or OFF.

SYS2 :Flickers when DPC Watchdog is normal. If abnormal, remains ON or OFF.
PF : Remains OFF when P48 is normal. If abnormal, remains ON.
LON : LED for checking LON communication. If the communication with CAR LON is
normal, it will flicker. If abnormal, remains ON or OFF.
TD1 : G／A Com checking LED. Flickers during communication and remains OFF
other times.
TD2 : G／A Com checking LED. Flickers during communication and remains ON
other times.
TD3 : G／A Com checking LED. Flickers during communication and remains
OFF other times.

CDS : Car door switch checking LED. When door is closed, it will be turned on.
( Open: OFF)
R5SC :Safety checking LED. If normal, remains ON
R2LD : Hall door checking LED, it will be turned on when all of hall door are closed
RDZ : Door open Zone checking LED. If car is at Door Zone it will be turned off.
But it is at out of door zone, it will be turned on
R1ML,R7LF, R7FN : CTT work checking LED. when related CTT work, they will be
turned on
Caution
Green LED will flicker and red remains OFF in normal conditions.
Yet, TD1 , 2 , 3 LED flicker in a shorter internal than other green LED.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2) Function table of switches, jumpers and dip switch(located in PCB)
No. Name Switches Function Usually
1 SW2 Slide switch WE : EEPROM writing + 5V position
2 RESET Tact Run CPU Reset
3 SPEC2 DIP SW(8P) Spec. setting 2
4 SPEC1 DIP SW(4P) Spec. setting 1
5 TMR1 HEX SW Light timer of car
6 NOR/ABNOR Jumper 6P Detects door zone in emergency Normal
7 DIR Jumper Pin Selects rotary encoder direction
8 SH Jumper Pin Terminal R setting 1 G／A
9 SM Jumper Pin Terminal R setting 2 G／A
10 SL Jumper Pin Terminal R setting 3 G／A
11 JP1 Jumper Pin Terminal R setting 4 G／A
12 SW3 Slide switch ANN(DOA-100) Power switch
13 MAINT Jumper Pin Door open out of DR zone in maint.OPR Removed
① SW2 : WE position → EEPROM writable : when spec.is changed into DOA PCB at
the side
+5V position → EEPROM unwritable : normal
Slide
+5V W
After spec. modification, JP1 shall be positioned on +5V to prevent

the spec. data from deletion.
Reset : Reset Run CPU ,Speed CPU and LON CPU
③ SPEC setting 2 : SPEC2

SPEC2 Setting during ON Setting during OFF
1 Forcedly door closing is invalid Forcedly door closing is valid ※ Non-defined
switch shall be
2 Door time fixed(5 sec) Door time is flexible( SPEC data)
used for other
3
purpose.
4
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
SPEC setting 1 : SPEC1

SPEC Setting during ON Setting during OFF
1 With duplex operation( DOC-120) Without duplex operation
2 Lift # 2( DOC-120) Lift # 1
3
4 Load detector - Potentiometer Load detector - MICRO S／W
5 Setting to verification mode Normal position
6 With voice synthesizer Without voice synthesizer
With emergency and control setting ( In case

7 Without emergency and control setting
returning to reference floor by CRT is applied)
8 In-factory checking mode Normal (TCD 41,199)
Car 1 and 2 of Bit 2 can be set only when 1st bit is ON.
checking mode of 5th bit is ON, checking points can be registered through
CRT monitoring system.
In-car light timer setting(TMR1)
BIT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Seg. No limit 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 15 20 30 45 60 90 120 180
Factory set value is BIT A (30 min).

TMR1, In-car light timer setting, is to set the time SPAN for in-car light to turn OFF
when there is no hall call or car call.
Setting Bit value to 0 means, light will be turned ON／OFF by switch.(Remains
ON status)
Hexa switch is weak, be sure to use cross-shaped driver of a proper size.
NOR/ABNOR : Jumper that checking Door Zone in a rescue by handle.
- Normal position : NORMAL
- Position during handle
operation : ABNORMAL
Jumper
1-2,4-5:Normal
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
(Fig. 1)
If 1-2 and 4-5 are connected by setting the switch to "Normal" in a normal
condition as shown above Fig.1, 48V power is input through LDC and processed
in LDC process section. If a rescue operation is required in case of power failure
or other errors, set the switch to "Abnormal". Then, the buzzer operated by battery
power will sound beyond door opening zone and will not sound in a door opening zone.
This function is very convenient for a manual rescue.
Reference : H/W SKELETON. " Hoistway Input Circuit Diagram"
Buzzer will not sound without R5SC relay is not energized, be sure to energize
R5SC relay.
Be sure to set main MCCB to OFF in a manual rescue operation.
Verify that the buzzer sounds beyond door opening zone with
this switch in Abnormal position during connection check.
Be sure to set the switch in Normal position after operation checking.
Auto/Mainte selection : It is located at DOR-13X PCB in case DOC-120 PCB
is applied.
DIR : Decision of the direction of rotary encoder. LEFT SHORT PIN
- Right arrangement : RIGHT RIGHT
DIR
- Reverse arrangement: LEFT
In case jumper pin is not jointed, System will consider that right direction.
SH : Terminal resistor setting for hall net
Set the terminal resistor at 'SH' at each elevator in case of single operation.
But in case of parallel operation, set as below Fig.2
E/L #1 E/L #2 Set SH Jumper pin in case of (1 line Hall Net).

Remove SH Jumper Pin But remove it in case of 2 line hall nets
SL CONN.
Set Set
1st rise of Hall 2nd rise of Hall (Fig.2) Hall network for parallel operation
Net Net
Do not set the terminal resistor 'SL' connector

In case of single elevator, insert jumper pin on TRM1
In case of duplex system, remove SH jumper on both elevator, and set the hall
type by dip switch( SPEC1-7th pin ON) on DHG PCB of E/L #2
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
SM : Terminal resistance setting of CRT monitoring net.
E/L #1 E/L #2
Remove SM Jumper pin SM SM Set SM Jumper pin
CRT
monitoring
panel (Fig.3) CRT monitoring panel network in duplex operation
In case of duplex operation, insert jumper pin into only the side to which CRT
monitoring panel is not connected directly.(Farther side from CRT SV panel)
SW3 : Power switch for ANN
Whenever it is connected to DOC PCB, surely turn off this switch if main power
is turned on. After ANN connection, turn on this switch. If you key in '0' 4 times on
key pad, the screen will be initialized.
Function of each connector in DOC PCB
Connector Number of Pin Function
CA 18 PIN Car input signal and door input／output signal

CB 8 PIN Car side switch input
CT 18 PIN CTT wiring in Control panel(DOC-120)
AA 8 PIN Input in control panel
AF 8 PIN Switch Input in control panel(DOC-120)
AC 8 PIN Output in control panel (Relay drive)
AB 18 PIN Input and output(Relay drive) in control panel
HA 10 PIN Hoist way limit switch input
TB1 TERMINAL BLOCK DC power supply in DOC PCB
SD 9 PIN RS-232 Serial Port(for DOV-200 Announcement Comm.)
ST 9 PIN RS-232 Serial Port(for HPC)
AD 4 PIN Rotary encoder power supply and signal
SH 4 PIN Hall board G／A communication

SM 4 PIN Monitoring panel & GEMS G／A communication
SL 4 PIN G／A communication in Parallel operation(DOC-120)
SC 2 PIN Car LON communication
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2.3 Program IC (Board)

Program IC is likely to be removed or changed by light or static electricity as it is written
electrically. Much care should be taken in handling. Program element is attached by
DOC-XY TYPE sticker. X represents horizontal coordinate(1 15) and Y
vertical coordinate(A M) as shown in Fig. 4
1) DOC-120 PCB
① ② ③ ④ ⑤
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Fig. 4. Program IC in DOC-120 PCB
Program IC of DOC PCB
Name Loc. Coor. Applied IC Function
U51(EVEN) ① 1A M27C1001,M27C2001 Contains driving CPU O/S and driving program
U52(ODD) ② 2A M27C1001,M27C2001 Contains driving CPU O/S and driving program
U55 ③ 3A 28C64 Sets spec.
U40 ④ 5C GAL22V10 Drives speed CPU and output side
U51 ⑤ 5D 27C256 LON CPU O／S and program
*IC ,M27C2001, is applied to unified type control panel

* If each program has erased or damaged, following symptoms will happen
Name Function Symptoms
U51(EVEN)Operates run CPU SYS1 LED does not blink.
U52(ODD) Operates run CPU SYS2 LED does not blink.
U55 Sets spec. Floor information is garbled.
U40 OUTPUT DRV Each relay and contactor doesn't operate.
U51 Operates LON CPU LON CPU O/S and LON program communication is invalid
2) Checking point at failure

When SYSI LED doesn't flicker
- Verify that +5V voltage is within +4.65V~+5V.
- Verify that ROM(27C010) is properly inserted.
(Verify that even side and odd side are not switched.)
When no letter appears on LCD(Liquid Crystal Display) of DOA-100 PCB
- Verify that ANN connector is properly connected.
- Make LCD brighter by turning the variable resistance(VR1) of DOA-100 PCB
( New model has nothing)
When floor information can not be written
- Verify that the jumper of coordinate 3B is set to WE position.
(Writing is possible only with WE position)
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
3. DOA-100 PCB
3.1 Description of DOA-100 PCB
1) DOA-100 PCB is composed of LCD and Key pad and connected by DOC PCB and
16P twist flat cable.
2) LCD displays the current state of control panel and can be inputted various commands,
address, data, etc. through key pad.
3) As DOA-100 PCB has a timer, the back light turns OFF automatically without any
key pad input for about 7 minutes. Press any one of "E", "A", "6" and "2" key on
the pad to turn ON the back light again.
3.2 Layout and function of DOA-100 PCB
4. DOP-116 PCB
DOP PCBs are the power source PCB of DI 1(60~105) E/L. This is the source of
DC 24V(Car LON PCB), DC 48V (Relay,outer signal input I/F power), DC110V(C1ST,
C1BR, C1VD contactor power) and AC power source and fuse. This also displays the
fuse
condition.
4.1 Applicable drawing
Type Assembly drawing Application
DOP-116 AEG05C281*A For unified type control panel(SDB1)
AEG05C281*B For unified type control panel(SAV1,MAV1)
AEG05C281*C For unified type control panel(DAV1,HAV1)

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
4.2 Outside view(SIZE : 170*270) of DOP-116 PCB
Fig.1 Layout of DOP-116 PCB
4.3 Input / Output of DOC-116 PCB

1) 3 Phase I/O part
변경
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2) Single Phase I/O part
* 주기1.
* 주기1.
SBD1: 5[A]
SAV1,MAV1: 3[A]
DAV1,HAV1: 6[A]
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
5. DPC PCB
5.1 Configuration and Diagram
1) Configuration drawing of DPC-140
Power WDT
OSC DSP & CPU rest
8MHz TMS320F(C)240 Circuits
RAM POWER STACK

DPP BOARD
KM6161002 ERROR
EEPROM RS422 ALP

AT29C512*2
Communication
MAIN PCB Comm,& BUFFER

ADS7862 HALL CT
IOIF 74F244(5)
PC
ENC-A ROTARY ENCODER
SERIAL
ENC-B ( DOC 1**)
I/F
C1VD DRIVER C1VD CONTACTOR

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2) Diagram of DPC-140 PCB
DPC-140
DPC-120
VA
+5V +15V -15V GND
Seg. Function Remark

VA POWER(+5,+-15,GND) 60m/m
VF
VF POWER(+5,+-15,GND) 90~105m/m
VB HALL CT
VC C1VD Drive China
VD ALP Comm. ALP
VE IO, I/F(DOC1XX PCB)
VG DPP 1XX PCB connection
SPI For designer monitor
VG
JTAG
VB
VDA For DA CARD

VJ Brake Control SI
LED LED state Function Remark

LED1
ALM CPU
OFF H/W error E/L Normal Red
ALM ON detection E/L Stop LED2
VJ
Flicker 1. Low voltage detection For normal

Green
(2times/1sec) 2. Scanning CPU error detection E/L Monitor
OFF or CPU error
CPU ON CPU error detection &
Flicker(2times/1sec) EL condition monitoring CPU Normal(STOP)
SPI
Flicker(4times/1sec) CPU Normal(RUN)
VC
Jumper Location Function Remark

JTAG
JP1 MP Norm al
VD
MC For Designer
JP2 WE ROM Write Enable During ROM w riting
NC Norm al
JP3 Sigm a Sigm a Model set SI
Di1,2 Di Model Set Di1,2
DA CARD
JP4 75/150[A] IGBT Type IGBT Capacity

100/200[A]
VE
VD
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
5.2 Detail of DPC PCB

1) Check connector connection before power input
① In case of 60~105m/min, verify that connector VA(Control power), VB(CT), VC(C1VD),
VE(1/0,1/F), VG(GDC), VJ(DPC PCB= Brake control current) are connected.
VD(Used for ALP function), VDA(D/A CARD), VH(SERIAL) and VF(Control power for
120~150m/min) are not connected.
2) Check Jumper
- Verify that Jumper, inverter H/W over-current detector, are set according to the table
Table 1) Setting of J5H(DPC-111,112) and JP4(DPC140) Jumper
Jumper No. IPM, IGBT Capacity Motor Capacity
No. 1 ~ 2 50A, 75A, 150A 4.4KW~7.5KW. 13KW~15KW
No. 3 ~ 4 100A, 200A 9.5KW~11KW. 18KW~22KW
Table 2) JP1(DPC-140)
Jumper No. Function Motor Capacity
MP 50A, 75A, 150A
MC 100A, 200A
Table 3) JP3(DPC-140)
Jumper No. Function Motor Capacity
SIGMA For Sigma Model Same as unified CP, Brake control current
DI1,2 For Di model
3) Check J1J, J1G(DPC-111,112) or JP2(DPC-140) Jumper

Jumper must be inserted to 1~2 pin of J1G at ordinary times(DPC-111.112)
(Move jumper to 3~4 pin when you do DSP SPEC writing )
Jumper pin must be inserted to NC pin of JP2 at ordinary times(DPC-140)
(Move jumper to 'WE' when you do DSP SPEC writing)
Insert jumper to 1~2pin of J1J during software booting(DPC-111,112)
Set the jumper to 1~2 of J1G(DPC-111,112) or 'NC' of JP2(DPC-140) when you reset
the DOC PCB after DSP SPEC writing.
4) Check control power when inputting power

As power voltage is set in the factory, checking is usually unnecessary.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
If circuit operation is abnormal, check the voltage according to the table 4.

If the measured value is out of the regular range, never reset the value, and
Measure again with another instrument in case of measuring equipment failure.
Table 4) Power input terminal
Measuring point Voltage Error correction
VA (+5V - GND) DC + 5V ± 2% 1. Verify that AC 93~122V is applied
VA (+15V - GND) DC +15V ± 2% to SMPS power input terminal
VA (-15V - GND) DC -15V ± 2% 2. Check the output voltage of SMPS after
removing connection between SMPS
and DPC PCB. If each power is out of range
from allowable error ± 2%, replace SMPS
3. Check the output voltage of SMPS after
re-wiring between SMPS and DPC PCB
If each power is out of range from
allowable error ± 2%, replace SMPS
4. If SMPS is normal, replace DPC PCB
5) Check WDT
Verify that CPU LED(Green) flickers at 0.5 second interval with power ON.
The LED flickers at 0.25 second interval in motor operation.
Caution: WDT(WATCH DOG TIMER) monitors that the program calculation of speed
control CPU operates properly. If WDT does not flicker at 0.5 second interval
during adjustment or it remains ON or OFF the speed control CPU may
seriously fail. Thus every error shall be inspected thoroughly.
In such case, check 5V ±15V power, ROM or ROM socket error, or connector
connection error.
6) Check ALM LED
Verify that LD1 ALM LED(Red) turns ON, and then, OFF after about 2 seconds. ALM
LED is for inverter H/W safety check and turns ON when the followings are detected.
- Over current is detected in inverter.( J5H (DPC-111,112) or JP4(DPC-140)
Jumper is not inserted)
- WDT of speed control CPU has failed.
- U phase arm -short circuit in case of IPM and GATE SMPS power has failed.
- IGBT U-phase ARM is short-circuited and GATE PCB power has failed.
- IGBT V-phase ARM is short-circuited and GATE PCB power has failed.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
- IGBT W-phase ARM is short-circuited and GATE PCB power has failed.
- Over current is detected on DC Link end.
- Regenerative IGBT and GATE transformer power have failed.
Caution: If ALM LED turns ON in inputting power and does not turn OFF, operation is
impossible. Perform an inspection according to the above a)~g) as shown below.
Verify that J5H or JP4 Jumper is properly inserted.(If not inserted, ALM LED turns ON)
Verify that WDT LED is flickering normally.
In c) ~ h) cases, check the connectors of DPC-111,112,140 PCB and verify that
GATE SMPS, GATE TRANS input is applied by AC 110V+10%,-15%..
Check IGBT stack or IPM connection conditions(disconnection and loose bolts)
7) Check C1VD contactor input (Option)
Verify that C1VD contactor is energized about 3 seconds later from power input.
Caution: If DC Link volt. does not reach 330V even after 8 sec. (Low- voltage error),
turn OFF C1VD contactor and then ON. Then, check the voltage after 8 seconds.
If the voltage is still low, turn OFF the contact and generate charging circuit failure error.
In this case, main power circuit connection, GATE SMPS(Trans) input or connection,
charging circuit OFF, IPM, IGBT or regenerative IGBT ON may have failed.
Thus, check these conditions.
8) Check pin
There are check pins in DPC-111,112,140 PCB for maintenance and
installation. The following signals are allocated to check pin.
PIN No. Function
PIN 1(labc_PEAK) Outputted peak voltage of 3phase current
PIN2(+5V-CHK) 5V power WDT
PIN3(/IAS_CHK) Reverse(-) value of motor U-phase current
PIN4(/IBS_CHK) Reverse(-) value of motor V-phase current
PIN5(/ICS_CHK) Reverse(-) value of motor W-phase current
PIN 8 GND
9) Cautions for adjusting of speed control gain value

① Adjusting of speed control gain value affects riding comfort and leveling accuracy
of the car.
Use accelerator to change gain.
Speed control gain can be changed within -50 % ~ 150 %.(Refer to Annunciator data)
High gain value causes excessive vibration and low gain value causes stalling
or starting shock.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
6. DPP-10X PCB
The DPP-111,131 are each improved PCB of DPP-101,130. And they can be
changeable each other.
6.1 Function and details
As DPP-101,111 PCB is located in the back of DPC PCB, visual inspection is
difficult. Thus, when ALM LED(Red) of DPC PCB turns ON or when inverter
malfunctions, check DPP-101,111 PCB after removing the set screw.
1) Diagram of DPP-101 PCB(IGBT 200A, Motor 18kW~22kW)
No. Function (TP7)

GLX
1Pin Regen.IGBT +15V pow er
17 10 2Pin Regen.IGBT - 9V pow er
9 1 3Pin Regen.IGBT Gate output
4Pin Regen.IGBT Ground
1 4
6
1
1
TP7
To VG7 CONNECTOR
GP
of DPC-111 PCB TP6
1 4
9
5
No. 기 능
Function Remarks
5
1
VA
1Pin Low er Arm +15V pow er TP5

TP4:U-phase
2Pin Low er Arm - 9V pow er 1 4
30
29
TP5:V-phase GU
3Pin Low er Arm Gate output
TP6:W-phase
4Pin Low er Arm Ground
TP4
4
7
1 4
VR2
OV
Over current setting

VR(detected at 770V) TP3
5
1
1 4
BR
Regen. volt. setting

GV
VR(700∼ 730V regen.)

VR1 No. Function Remarks
Red Caution 1Pin Upper Arm +15V pow er TP2
TP1:U-phase
LED1
Don't touch stack w hen

7
2Pin Upper Arm - 9V pow er

TP2:V-phase
CHG
light ON after pow er OFF. 3Pin Upper Arm Gate output 1 4

TP3:W-phase
4Pin Upper Arm Ground
1
6
Seg. Function
ON DC Link end, 50V or less TP1
GW
OFF DC Link end, 50V or less 1 4

DPP -101
9
5
Seg. CONNECTOR func. Seg. CONNECTOR func. Seg. CONNECTOR func.

GXW Separated pow er W- Regen.IGBT signal
GU U- IGBT signal GP
Temp. SW(radiator)
GXV Separated pow er V- GV V- IGBT signal Power supply(each phase)
GXU Separated pow er U- GW W- IGBT signal GLX (separated TRANS)
1 3 1 3 1 3
4 5 4 5 4 5
GXU GXV GXW
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
* The outward appearance of DPC-111 may different but its function and connectors are same.
2) Diagram of DPP-131 PCB( IPM 50A,75A,100A, motor 5.5kW~11kW,

S-IPM 50A,75A,100A,150A motor 5.5kW~11kW,
Seg Function
Connected to IPM
GU1 15V
GU2 Ground_U
Connected to 'VG'
Seg Function connector of DPC PCB
GV1 15V
GV2 Ground_V
Seg Function
GW1 15V
GW2 Ground_W
Caution
Seg Function
GX1 15V Don't touch
GX2 Ground_W
SIGMA stack w hen light
ON after pow er
GX3 -9V
OFF.
Seg Function
Seg Explanation
TH1 Thermal1
GW1 Ov er 50V on DC link
TH2 Thermal2
GW2 Below 50V on DC Link
LED100
6.2 Main performance

Item Performance
Detecting short-circuit Detects short just like arm short-circuit, IPM & IGBT short within
5~6㎲ by output short, and outputs an error signal.
GATE soft cut circuit Cuts driving circuit within 10㎲ after a short-circuit is detected.
This process is carried out slowly for 10㎲ to protect IPM & IGBT
from spike voltage resulting from short circuit.
Timer & reset circuit When a short-circuit is detected, the timer starts counting at the same
time that GATE cut circuit operates and turns off 10~20ms. Driving output is
cut regardless of the input signal of driving circuit until timer
finishes. When the input signal of driving circuit is OFF after timer
finishes, resetting circuit operates and stops the cut state.
Detecting the power voltage Breakdown of power circuit and 15V power is drop to 12±0.5V during
error power failure, it displays error.
Driving circuit IPM class is lower than 100A, it will controlled by DPP-130,131
(IPM150A : DPP-120,121 / IGBT 200A: DPP-101 )
Overheat detection If radiating plate temp. reaches 85℃, it detects error.
Detecting error of IPM inner Maintains breakdown condition about 2ms when IPM error occurs
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
6.3 Variable resistance

1) OV variable resistance sets DC Link over current level. The factory setting is 770V.
This setting may be changed temporarily for testing by turning the volume.
After testing, be sure to return to the origin position.
* Measuring point
DPP-101,130 DPP-111,131
a. Each end of R31 on DPP101,111
b. TE40 and TE100 on DPP130,131 8.02± 0.5V 7.9±0.5V
2) BR(brake) variable resistance sets regenerative operation starting voltage level.

The factory setting is 730V. This setting may be changed for testing by turning
the volume. After testing, be sure to return to the origin position. Each end of C12 is
7.6+/-0.5volt.
* Measuring point
DPP-101,130 DPP-111,131
a. Each end of C12 on DPP101,111
b. TE40 and TE70 on DPP130,131 All should be 7.5± 0.5V
3) In case of DPP-111,121,131, the potential difference between regenerative voltage

and over voltage
* In case of DPP-111,131, variable resistance adjustment point is not exist.
6.4 Check connector and connection before inputting power

1) Checking the type name of DPP-1XX PCB according to IGBT capacity shown below.
PCB type name IPM, IGBT capacity
DPP-131(130) IPM 50,75,100A
Drive motor: : Max. rating- lower than 11kW
S-IPM 50,75,100, 150A
Drive motor: : Max. rating- lower than 15kW
DPP-111(101) IGBT 200A
18kW ≤ Drive motor≤ 22kW
2) Check the connection condition of each connector. Verify that all connectors
are connected to their proper positions.
6.5 Check the control power when inputting power

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Caution: As DC link voltage(500~700V) is input to DPP-1XX PCB after inputting power,

special attention should be paid to safety.
1) Usually control voltage needs no checking. If any error is found in circuit
operation, verify that GATE SMPS or GATE TRANS input is within AC110±10%
and check the connectors.
6.6 Verify that charging(discharging) detecting LED lights is ON

1) LED(Red) on PCB lights ON if DC Link voltage is 50V or more and it and dims
(goes) lights OFF if the voltage is less than 50V. LED lights ON again when the DC link
begins to be charged with FFB is inputted
Caution: As it takes about 15 seconds for DC Link voltage to be discharged
completely after power OFF, never touch DPP PCB and stack while LED light is ON.
2) When LED does not light ON though main power is inputted,
IPM & IGBT short, or regenerative IGBT OFF error, wrong wiring of recharge
resistance(RCR), Recharging circuit ON error, or luminescent diode may damaged.
Inspection should be carried out after DC link voltage discharged.
* DC Link voltage is condenser power, Surely check the voltage for safety.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
7. DCL PCB
7.1 Function
DCL-243 PCB is car operation PCB(CLON) mounted with MC143150BIFU

neuron chip and is applied to 60~240m/min.
1) Installed in OPB in single elevator and forms a serial communication network with
CNL LON of CP
2) Detects call button in car, open, close and ex_open(elongates door close time for
3 minutes and closes the door regardless of door time with a close button
registration)buttons, control board switch, on car connection box switch input, and car
load, and it transmits them into DOC PCB through network.
3) Controls car call B/T, open, close and ex_open response lamp and Up/Down direction
lamp, full lamp, CPI, and car-chime(gong) with display commands through the network of
DOC PCB.
4) The additional command signals from CP that are related with door are transmitted to
DCD PCB. And it receives some error signals of door through parallel communication for
easy installation & maintenance
5) It transmits voice synthesis guide data to the voice synthesis board in OPB through LCD
connector.
6) Functional Classification
No. C la s s ific a tio n Ite m S p e c ific a tio n
1 C o n n e c tio n S ig n a l R e fe r to T a b le 1 ∼ 9 .
2 M e m o ry ROM O n e 2 7 C 2 5 6 3 2 K B yte
3 In p u t/O u tp u t In p u t 1 ) N o n v o lta g e s w itc h in p u t b y c o m p a ra to r : 3 9 E A
C a r c a ll b u tto n in p u t:3 2 flo o rs (M A X . 6 4 flo o rs )
O p e n , c lo s e , e x o p e n b u tto n : 1 re s p e c tiv e ly
U p , d o w n , s ta rt, b y p a s s b u tto n o n O P B : 1 re s p e c tiv e ly .
2 ) V o lta g e s w itc h in p u t b y c o m p a ra to r : 2 4
O P B s w itc h :1 5 . O n c a r c o n n e c tio n b o x s w itc h :5
C a r lo a d d e te c tin g s w itc h : 3 . P h o to s h o e s w itc h : 1

3 ) A n a lo g ~ d ig ita l c o n v e rte r in p u t: 4 c h a n n e ls
D F T R (D iffe re n tia l tra n s fo rm e r): 2 , P o te n tio m e te r: 2 .
O u tp u t 1 ) T R d riv in g b y I/O m a p p e d I/O m e th o d : 7
C P I d riv in g : 3 . 1 1 0 % o v e rlo a d b u z z e r d riv in g : 1
C h im e 1 ,2 s trik e d riv in g : 2 . L C D b a c k lig h t: 1
2 ) T R d riv in g b y m e m o ry m a p p e d I/O m e th o d : 3 9
C a r c a ll b u tto n re s p o n s e la m p : 3 2
O p e n , c lo s e a n d e x o p e n re s p o n s e la m p : 3
U p , d o w n a n d fu ll la m p o n o p e ra tin g b o a rd : 3 . B u tto n b u z z e r: 1
4 D C power V o lta g e +24V±5%

C u rre n t TYPE 3 A
5 PC B spec. S iz e 2 3 9 × 1 3 3 .3 m m
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
7.2 Diagram of DCL PCB
DRIN,DROUT: related distributed door
POT: Potentiometer CBL: Connector for 64 fl extention
LCD : Voice
IND : CPI synthesis guide
connection device(DCV-100)
CCN1 : MAIN LD1:LED for PCB

Connector state indication
SW1:ID setting,
terminal resistandce
U1:NEURON
setting
CHIP
U2:DCL
ROM
DFTR : Differen.
trans. input
LAMP:UP,DOWN,
FULL LAMP
CIN:IN-CAR
(OPB)input OP:OPEN
B/T & LAMP
EOP:EX OPEN
B/T & LAMP
ONC:ON-
CAR INPUT CL:CLOSE
B/T & LAMP
BZ1:CALL
B/T BBZZER
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧
① CB1:CALL BUTTON 1~8F ⑤ CB3:CALL BUTTON 17~24F
② CL1:CALL BUTTON LAMP 1~8F ⑥ CL2:CALL BUTTON LAMP 17~24F
③ CB2:CALL BUTTON 9~16F ⑦ CB3:CALL BUTTON 25~32F
④ CL2:CALL BUTTON LAMP 9~16F ⑧ CL2:CALL BUTTON LAMP 25~32F

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
(Fig.1) Layout of DCL PCB
DCL-200 BOARD 구성
NEURON CHIP
PULSE Serial
ROM MAC COMM. Net Work
Process Port TRANS
32K
NetWork
Process
RAM CPI
32K Application driving동
CPI구
Process I/O
Port
OPB Input CAGE RAM
Power DC24
ONCar Input Input 2K 전 원
supply
WDInput DDC
Volt
DDC
Photo Shoe input EEPROM CLOCK
512B &CTL.
Differen. trans &
Control Potensionmeter
( 제어신signal
호) 차동 TRANS Input
input
Lamp Output CAGE

Buzzer Output Output
Chime Output A-D
CONV
For car type DIP DIP

buf
Car Type 설정용
setting LCDOutput
S/W
(Fig.2) Configuration diagram of DCL PCB
7.3 Setting of DCL

1) Serial communication line(CCN1) connection
DCL PCB application to sub & disabled type OPB is possible but we mainly apply it to
Main OPB
In case DCL PCB is applied to sub & wheel chair type OPB, set the PCB ID on
Dip switch
DOC PCB
Set the terminal resistance
DCL PCB
SC-01,02
CCN-1-01,02 SC-01,03
Tail cord cable Hoistway cable

SC-01,03 SC-01,03 SC-01,03
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
(Fig.3) Terminal resistance setting in OPB
2) Car operating board ID and terminal resistance setting

DIP SW1 is used for car operating board ID and terminal resistance setting.
Table 1) Car operating board ID setting
DIP SW 1 Car operating board
No. Hex
ID terminal resistance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 1 0 0 X X X X X 01 Front side MAIN
2 0 1 0 X X X X X 02 Front side SUB
3 1 1 0 X X X X X 03 Disabled MAIN
4 0 0 1 X X X X X 04 Disabled SUB
5 X X X X X X X 0 05 TML. R. Non-setting
6 X X X X X X X 1 80 TML. R. setting
※ Legend; 0:OFF , 1:ON , X:Ignorance (Note ; TML R : terminal resiste
3) Cautions for DIP switch setting

When setting car operating board ID
Attentions shall be paid so that car operating board ID may be a value among
the above table1. Especially the car operating board ID of DCL PCB for on
car operation switch input shall be set as front side of MAIN(01 HEX).
If the setting is other than the above values, communication with DOC PCB of
control panel is impossible. CPI will reset and call will not registered.
setting a terminal resistance
Terminal resistance is set on the final end of communication line(Refer to Fig. 3).
4) Check LED indication
LED-LD1 indicates DCL-243 PCB operation condition as shown below.
NO Indication Conditions required Remarks
1 OFF CPU run error, COMM. error No P24V power, PCB(H/W) error, etc.
2 ON(1 sec.interval) CPU run normal, COMM error Comm. line connection error, DIP SW car
operating board ID and TML R setting error
3 ON(0.3 sec.interval) CPU run normal, COMM. normal
5) Main OPB ID check by CPI when main power turned on

Check if DCM-11X or 12X is connected to DCL-243 PCB
The ID of main OPB "01" will be displayed on DCM-11X or 12X when main power
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
turned on.
8. DOV PCB
8.1 DOV-200 PCB( Auto voice synthesizer device)
1) Function
DOV-200 PCB is for voice synthesizer.
It is composed of CPU(PIC16C63,PIC16C73), RS232C communication section, DA
conversion section, amplification section, and power detection & battery section and
others.
2) Diagram of DOV-200 PCB
3) System configuration
DOV-200 PCB configuration
Com. method: RS232
CPU : PIC16C63, PIC16C73
MEMORY : ROM(27C040, 27C080) → Voice data stored
D-A converter : Converts digital voice data analog data
Amplifier: Amplify analogized data and outputs through speaker
(Max.output:2Watt, 8Ω)
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
4) Spec. setting
Spec. setting method: Spec. can be modified by DIP SW(SW1).
Table) Bit allocation chart
Seg. Bit 1~4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8
Refer the below " EX)" ON : ON : ON :Chime is operated ON : Announces
Function.
for underground floor Announcement for Announcement for

"Thank you"
setting 4F is omitted 13F is omitted before Announcement
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Ex.) In case ON
underground floor is
B4 OFF
* In case the lowest floor is 1st floor, please turn off DIP SW No. of 1~4
Underground Underground
Dip SW Dip SW
(=lowest) floor (=lowest) floor
B1 ON: 1st B4 ON: 3rd
B2 ON: 2nd B5 ON:1st & 3rd
B3 ON: 1st&2nd B6 ON:2nd & 3rd
Once the underground floor is set, other floors are set automatically.
Announce recordings in sequence with bits 1~4 turned ON.
Thus, voice synthesizer can be tested with this bit 1~4 in factory or field.
Be sure to turn them OFF after testing.
Bit 5 and Bit 6 should set same as floor setting spec. of the building.
Bit7 sets addition or deletion of chime before broadcasting depending on user's
requirements.
Bit8 sets addition or deletion of 'thank you' message depending on user's
requirements.
5) Volume adjusting switch
Adjusting method of volume : Enable bits 1,2,3,4
Turning the volume(VR1) to clockwise will decrease volume sound
(opposite direction will increase volume)
After volume adjustment, bits1~4 should be set again referring above 4).
6) Power failure detection
DOV-120 PCB detects power failure and announces power failure (twice).
As power failure announcement uses local battery, it starts after 10 minutes
when supplied the battery is charged.
7) Power switch
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Turns ON and OFF DOV-200 PCB power.

8) Indicator(LED1,LED2)
LED1 : Indicates status of power. Lights ON with power ON.
LED2 : Indicates the operation status of DOV-100 PCB. This lights ON announcement.
9) Connector connection
CN1: For communication CN2: For power supply and
(Connect CN1→DOC-120 PCB SD connector) speaker connection
PIN NO Function (CN2→Power supply for speaker)
1 -
PIN NO Function
2 Rx
1
3 Tx
2 SPEAKER1
4 -
3 SPEAKER2
5 GND
4 GND
6 -
5 DC24V
7 -
8 -
9 -
10) Check points before operation

Check CN2 connector for power(24V, GND) connection.
Check power switch and LED1.
Check speaker and matching transformer connection .
(The rating of speaker matching transformer is 16Ω/8Ω.)
Verify that BIT6 in DOC PCB(Spec. setting DIP SW) is ON.
Verify that data of SPEC address "0034","0036" are"0xFF".
Verify that data of SPEC address "0014" is"0x01".
9. DOS PCB
9.1 DOS-100 PCB(Local Supervisory panel)
1) General
DOS-100 PCB is mounted inside the monitoring board. It is connected to the control
panel (DOC-111, 120 PCB) by a line enabling it to monitor overall elevator conditions.
Contact signal is non-voltage contact and the accepted current is 2 A or less.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Lay out of DOS-100 PCB(Size 218*280 mm)
DOS-100 PCB configuration

Block diagram of DOS-100 PCB is as shown below.
DOS-100 PCB
MPU &
SM connect. in G/A com. KEEP RY & External
BUS
DOC-120 PCB sect. RY sect. device
CTRL sect.
G/A Communication section

G/A communication section communicates with inside G/A of DOC-111 & 120
through SM connector, decodes control board information received through
communication, and transmits it to MPU in DOS-100 PCB.
MPU & BUS control section
The MPU used in DOS-100 PCB is one chip type 89C52. MPU analyzes the data
transmitted from G/A, transmits it to bus controller, and controls relay.
Keep relay & Relay section
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
As the relay in DOS-100 is connected to seven segment lamp which shows floor
information,
E/L conditions can be informed to monitoring board. As the keep relay(keep type)in
DOS-100 PCB maintains its conditions during power failure, the last condition of E/L
can be seen with outside equipment power only.
2) Indicator
Indicator
DOS-100 PCB has 2 LEDs.
LED NO Function Indication
LED1 Watch dog run Flickers at 64ms interval with PCB normal
LED2 COM condition indication Flickers at every control panel call (128ms)
3) Switch
DOS-100 PCB has 2 switches.
Switch Function Remarks
S1 CPU reset
S2 Refer to Table 1. Refer to Table1 and ID set chart.
Table 1) ID setting DIP SW set chart

BIT Function
1 ON: Connects terminal resistance, OFF: Deletes terminal resistance
2 ON: Invalid the call from C.P , OFF: Effective the call from C.P and In normal
3 ON: Voice synthesizer effective , OFF: Invalid Voice synthesizer
4 Plans its application when an option is received.
5 Plans its application when an option is received.
6 ON: "-" letter displaying, OFF: "B","b" displaying
7 ON: Korea SVP set only, OFF: Normal local SVP
8 ON:Lamp type OFF: Digital type
4) Connector
PW connector(Power) :No.1=VCC(+ 5V), No.4:GND(0V)
SM connector(Communication) → Connected to SM connector in DOC-111,
120 PCB.
PIN 1 : Com. line 1 PIN 2 : Com. line 2
KA connector(22 PIN) → Connected to other equipment
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
PIN Ry Relay Usage1 Usage2 Usage3

DATA
No. No. Type (7-SEG type CPI) (Lamp type CPI) (Binary type CPI)
1 RY1 D0 7-SEG driving(a) 1st floor LAMP BINARY1

2 RY2 D1 7-SEG driving(b) 2nd floor LAMP BINARY2
3 RY3 D2 7-SEG driving(c) 3rd floor LAMP BINARY3
4 RY4 D3 7-SEG driving(d) 4th floor LAMP BINARY4
5 RY5 D4 7-SEG driving(e) 5th floor LAMP BINARY5
6 RY6 D5 7-SEG driving(f) 6th floor LAMP BINARY6
7 RY7 D6 7-SEG driving(g1) 7th floor LAMP
8 RY8 D7 7-SEG driving(g2) 8th floor LAMP
9 RY9 D0 7-SEG driving(A) 9th floor LAMP Upper limit forced reduction error
10 RY10 D1 7-SEG driving(B) 10th floor LAMP Lower limit forced reduction error
Keep type
11 RY11 D2 7-SEG driving(C) 11th floor LAMP Stop between floors
12 RY12 D3 7-SEG driving(D) 12th floor LAMP Door open unable
13 RY13 D4 7-SEG driving(E) 13th floor LAMP Door close unable
14 RY14 D5 7-SEG driving(F) 14th floor LAMP Starting unable
15 RY15 D6 7-SEG driving(G1) 15th floor LAMP Bad leveling
16 RY16 D7 7-SEG driving(G2) 16th floor LAMP Brake operation failure
17 RY17 D0 7-SEG driving(h,j) 17th floor LAMP
18 RY18 D1 7-SEG driving(H,J) 18th floor LAMP Failure
19 RY19 D2 7-SEG driving(N1,N2) 19th floor LAMP
20 RY20 D3 20th floor LAMP
21 RY21 Keep type D4 21st floor LAMP
22 RY1~RY21 common line RY1~RY21 common line RY1~RY21 common line
Caution: As spec. segment of use1,2 and 3 is input by communication, a separate setting

is unnecessary.
7-SEG as configuration.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
KB connector(22 PIN) → Connected to other equipment

PIN Ry Relay DAT Usage1 Usage2 (Lamp Usage3
No. No. Type A (7-SEG type CPI) type CPI) (Binary type CPI)
1 RY22 D0 22nd floor LAMP
Keep
2 RY23 D1 23rd floor LAMP
type
3 RY24 D2 24th floor LAMP
4 RY25 D3 Unit light Unit light Unit light
5 RY26 D4 UP direction light UP direction light UP direction light
6 RY27 D5 DN direction light DN direction light DN direction light
7 RY28 D6 Safety light Safety light Safety light
8 RY29 D7 OUT OF SVC light OUT OF SVC light OUT OF SVC light
9 RY30 D0 Fire light Fire light FIRE light
10 RY31 D1 Power supply light Power supply light Power supply light
11 RY32 D2 Self-generator light Self-generator light Self-generator light
General
12 RY33 D3 OPEN light OPEN light OPEN light
type
13 RY34 D4 CLOSE light CLOSE light CLOSE light
14 RY35 D5 MAINT light MAINT light MAINT light
15 RY36 D6 OVER LOAD light OVERLOAD light OVER LOAD light
16 RY37 D7 AUTO light AUTO light AUTO light
17 RY38 D0 ATT light ATT light ATT light
18 RY39 D1 INDE light INDE light INDE light
19 RY40 D2 PARK light PARK light PARK light
20 RY41 D3 EME light EME light EME light
21 DN lamp driving
22 RY1~RY21 common line RY1~RY21 common line RY1~RY21 common line
Caution: As spec. segment of usage1,2 and 3 is input by COM, separate setting

is unnecessary.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
10. DHG PCB

10.1. DHG-160,161 PCB
The DHG-161 is the improved PCB of DHG-160. And it can be changeable each other.
1) Outward appearance
E/L#2, disable type button I/F(HUC,HDC)
SW1: ID setting switch
E/L #1 IND I/F(HI1) Normal Button I/F(HU,HD)
CPU
E/L #2 IND I/F(HI2)
HC2:Hall chime HA: Hall comm. and power

HF2:Hall lantern
HP: Parking
SW2:No use HF1:Hall lantern
HVF: VIP/Fire HC1:Hall chime
2) Feature
This DHG-161 PCB has ASIC chip GVC14605 for serial communication and
CPU 89C51.
HUC,HDC,HF2,HC2,HI2 are used for E/L#2 (In case of duplex system)
It composes serial communication network with DOC-111,120 PCB at hall under
single elevator system.
It transmits hall button and switch inputs to DOC PCB through network.
It drives hall button lamps, indicators, hall lanterns and hall chimes with receiving
output signal form DOC PCB
Disable button input also proceeded in a PCB as normal type button
(In case duplex system is applied, disable button port can be used for E/L #2)
It has watch dog timer(LED2) that checking CPU down.
LED1 checks the communication condition .
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
3) Power
Voltage Use Power source
Drives Chime& Hall Lantern SSR Rectified power from control
DC24V
Supplies power to IND PCB transformer power in CP
DC5V Circuit logic power Downward graded transformer power
form DC24 of PCB.
AC100V Drives Hall Lantern lamp Output power of control transformer
4) Function
Floor ID setting by DIP SW1
－ DIP SW appearance － DIP SW setting
ON ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Floor ID Set section Button type
(HEX Value) segment section
－ It is possible to set upto Max 63 numbers ID by using FLOOR ID set section
(No. 1 ~ 6)
*A condition that all switches are 'OFF' is not exist for Floor ID.
－ Set the button type by using button type segment section( No.7~8)
DIP switch No.

Button type Remark
7 8
OFF OFF Normal Type(Including disable type) Do not handling
－ Example of DIP SW setting
Ex1) In case normal type ID setting for lowest

floor (ID=01H)
On
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Off
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
－ Dip switch setting method
All switches are off position before ID setting.

When the DHG PCB is installed, handle the dip switches.
Non stop floors will not have ID
ex) Normal Button types -Total 13 floors (over ground 10Fls, Under ground 3Fls)
Building floors Service floors DIP SW set data(16 hexadecimal) Remark
10 OK BO
9 OK OA
8 NON STOP None button at hall
7 OK 09
6 OK 08
5 OK 07
4 OK 06
3 NON STOP None button at hall
2 OK 05
1 OK 04
B1 OK 03
B2 OK 02
B3(Lowest floor) OK 01
－Floor ID set table by using DIP Switch(SW1)
1 : ON 0 : OFF (Normal type button

DIP S/W 1 HEX
Fl oor value
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1( Lowest) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
2 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 3
31 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1F
32 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 20
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Dip SW2 is not required any setting. Leave them all at 'off' position.
5）Communication and power cable connection
It composes hall station in case of single operation( Sigma 60~105m/min)

* Max. hall node numbers are 32 in single network
Power ＆
Communication
DOT IND
G/A
★ B/T & controller

-Up/Dow n button input Sw itch
★ Up/Dow n lamp output
Hall input
VIP, PARKING
Hall station network configuration of parallel operation( Sigma 60~105m/min)
E/L NO.1 E/L NO.2

Parallel communication
NO.1 DOC PCB NO.2 DOC PCB
network
G/A G/A
G/A
Com m unication ("SL" CONN.)
Line "SH" CONN
E/L #1 DOT IND. E/L #2 DOT IND.
E/L #1: hall lantern & chime E/L #2: hall lantern & chime
Com m unication
Line
G/A
DHG-PCB
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Hall station network configuration of one hall rise parallel operation

( Sigma 60~105m/min)
E/L NO.1 E/L NO.2
Parallel communication
NO.1 DOC PCB NO.2 DOC PCB
network
G/A G/A
G/A
Com m unication
("SL" CONN.)
Line "SH" CONN
E/L #1 DOT IND. E/L #2 DOT IND.
E/L #1: hall lantern & chime E/L #2: hall lantern & chime
Com m unication
Line
G/A
DHG-PCB
To next floor
E/L #1,2 Button
Terminal resistance and network configuration
－Network diagram under single operation system
DOC B/D #01
Terminal resistance
(SH of HJP)
(It should be jumped #32 IND
always on DOC PCB) DHG-161
Hall #32
DHG-161
Hall #31
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
④ Network diagram in case of 1 rise hall button for duplex system
Main board of E/L#1 Main board of E/L#1

DOC PCB of E/L #1 DOC PCB of E/L #2
SH : Open SH : Jumper(short)
SL : Open SL : Open
DOC B/D #01 DOC B/D #01
SL
SL
SH SH
DHG-161
Hall #32
DHG-161
Hall #31
DHG-161
Hall #2
DHG-161
Terminal Hall #1
resistance
6) Connector name and function
Name Function Remark

HF1 Drives Hall Lantern of E/L#1
HF2 Drives Hall Lantern of E/L#2
HC1 Drives Hall Chime of E/L#1
HC2 Drives Hall Chime of E/L#2
HP Parking Switch input(E/L #1)
(In case of E/L #2, input goes to DOC PCB directly)
HVF VIP switch input(E/L #1)

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
11. DCM PCB

11.1.DCM-1XX PCB
1) outward appearance
Additional Lamp3
DOT of 1st digit(1 place)
displaying Additional Lamp1
DOT of 2nd digit

(10 place) displaying Additional Lamp2 HI: IND I/F
Direction displaying DOT

Additional Lamp4
2) Function and feature

DCM-1XX PCB receives serial data from DHG-161(160) and DCL-242(241) PCB to
DOT IND, and displays current elevator position, direction and additional information.
① It receives serial data as clock and enable signal from DHG-161(160) or DCL-242(241)
PCB, and drives DOT and additional lamps.
In can display not only numbers but also alphabet(capital letter and small letter).
It can drive 4 of additional lamps
Button energy save mode function(It can be adjustable by SPEC in DOC PCB , only
for VIX-532 type Indicator)
3) Power
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
DC 24 V is used for display drive power which is supplied from DHG-161(160) or

DCL-242(241) PCB, and using for logic power by stepping down DC24V to DC5V
4) PCB types and application scope
DCM-1XX PCBs in Sigma elevators can be classified to DCM-10X, DCM-11X
and DCM-12X( 3 types)
The usage purpose of additional lamp is classification standard.
Table) DCM PCBs

PCB Drawing No. Usage Additional Lamps
DCM-102 AEG00C767*A Slim vertical (Sigma standard) 2EA (LAMP1,4)

DCM-103 AEG00C767*B Slim vertical (Sigma standard) 3EA (LAMP1,2,3)
DCM-114 AEG00C769*A Horizontal CPI (Sigma standard) 0EA
DCM-115 AEG00C769*B Horizontal CPI (Sigma standard, EME) 1EA(LAMP2)
DCM-116 AEG00C769*C Horizontal CPI (Sigma standard) 2EA(LAMP1,3)
DCM-117 AEG00C769*D Horizontal CPI (Only Korea Domestic) 3EA(LAMP1,2,3)
DCM-124 AEG00C770*A CPI, Mounted on OPB (Sigma standard) 0EA
DCM-125 AEG00C770*B CPI, Mounted on OPB (Sigma standard, EME) 1EA(LAMP6)
DCM-126 AEG00C770*C CPI, Mounted on OPB (Only Korea Domestic) 3EA(LAMP3,4,5)
DCM-127 AEG00C770*D CPI, Mounted on OPB (Only Korea Domestic) 4EA(LAMP1,2,3,4)
5) Connectors
DCM-10X DCM-11X, 12X
Name Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal
1 DC24V 1 DC24V
2 GND 2 GND
3 DATA 3 GND
HI HI
4 CLK 4 DATA
5 ENABLE 5 CLK
6 ENABLE
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
12. DPB PCB

12.1. DPB-100 PCB
1) DPB-100 PCB explanation
Applied drawing No.
Type name Drawing No. Remark
PCB ASY AEG02C265*A It applied to expansion and unified type CP
DPB-100 PCB outward appearance(SIZE :100*140)
2) Main I/O of DPB-100 PCB

"VK" Terminal(6P) "VJ" Connector(MOLEX,10P)
NO Function NO Function
1 Brake Coil_B 1 P4.5V
2 Brake Coil_A 2 BK_PWM
3 C1BR_N 3 BR_UV
4 P110V 4 BR_OC
5 C1BR_P 5 BK_I
6 EARTH 6 P5
7 GND
8 N15
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
"VK" is connected to "VK" of DOM PCB, and "VJ"

is connected to "VJ" of DPC PCB
LD1(LED)
P110V is power input checking LED. When it is
inputted to "VK-04", LED will be turned on.
TP1,TP2(CHECK PIN) : It must be lower than ±2V when power is checked.
13. DOR PCB

13.1. DOR-13X PCB
DOR-130(Expansion type CP) and DOR-131(Unified type CP) have same function
Just the existence of E.STOP S/W is different.
R5SC, R2LD, RDZ, R7LF and R7FN relays are applied for standard, R1ML is for
micro leveling. And R4LF is applied in case 2nd pit switch is applied to elevator
1) DOR-130 PCB
DOR-130 PCB outward appearance(SIZE :100*280)
DOR-131 PCB outward appearance(SIZE :100*280)

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2) DOR-110 PCB
As for relay connection PCB , this PCB is used when fire fighting control option
is applied. And R4FMX is applied in case 2nd pit switch is applied to elevator.
3) DOR-101 PCB
As for relay connection PCB , this PCB is used when supervisory panel is applied.
R4FSX Relay is only for Korea domestic.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
4) DOR-120 PCB
As for relay connection PCB , this PCB is used when generator control option is applied
to elevator.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Test
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Index
1. Start up in slow speed …………………………………………………………….. 1
2. Insulation measurement …………………………………………………………...4
3. Checking voltage …………………………………………………………………...8
4. Non-scaffolding method (MSK operation) …………………..…………………..12
5. Preparing high-speed commissioning …………………………………………..18
6. Potentiometer ................................................................................................25
7. Adjusting in high speed operation ……………………………………………….26

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
1. Start up in slow speed

1.1. Preparation for start up
1) Tools and measuring instruments
Tools should be correctly verified before use.
Spaners
Drivers
Plier, nipper, compressing tool, lantern
Iron measure(15 ㎝), tape measure(3~5M)
Mini clip : For measuring CHK terminal

Common line : 2 wires longer than 1 meter with alligator clips on both ends.
Digital multi-meter
Input impedance : 1 ㏁ or more
Min. voltage measured : 10 ㎷
Ammeter : AC 100A range

Megger tester
High pressure Megger(500V, Battery type, 200 ㏁ or more internal resistance)
Manual type not permitted

Speedometer
Others : Electrical drawings
2) Checking and oiling
Check on entrance and equipment of hoistway
1. Is the elevator free of any obstacles in its traveling?
2. Are the landing doors closed on all floors?
3. Is operating board installed?

Are DCL-242 PCB connecting MIC JACK and ROM
4. Are PCB MIC in apparatus box and wiring MIC connected to the same names?
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
5. Is safety shoe connected to MIC in apparatus box?

(Safety shoe line should be jumped if car door is not installed)
6. Is the apparatus box properly connected to DOOR PCB(DCD PCB)

connecting JACK "PJ1"?
7. Are "PJ1" No. (12) and (15) line removed from MIC?
8. Are MIC JACK No. 12 ,13 and 14 lines and the COMMON(EVV)Line connected
by the same line?
9. Are the?: "ON CAGE operable"; "E.STOP S/W normal";

"AC_CUT(DMC-CUT1)","DMC(DMC-CUT2)" S/W cut ?
10. Is S/W in operating board set to Normal mode (IN_CAR S/W applied)?
11. Is car door closed? (CLS shall be ON .)
For Car & counter weight side
1. Is each PCB connecting MIC JACK connected properly in control board?
2. Is each IGBT connected tightly at the back of control board?
3. Are power inducing and electric motor wiring terminal properly connected?
4. Is RE line induced into control board separated from electric motor wiring?
5. Are MCCB and circuit breaker fuse cut ? Do they have the rated capacity?
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
6. Is ground wire with each equipment and building ground wire secured?
7. Is the shield line of rotary encoder grounded?
8 Is MIC line insulated properly? (0 5 MΩ or more)
9. Is control board properly connected to TAILCODE wiring and MIC?
10. MIC of LSU and LSD is common?
☞ Common point when without COM JACK :DOM PCB TML1 terminal (1~2 7~3 7~8)
11. Are GRS and MB MIC JACK inserted in control board?
12. Are main power of U, V and W on motor side and power cable connected
according to the drawing?
13. Check each PCB and IGBT , power cable for connection and contact
conditions.
14. Check glass tube fuse in DOP-116,DOM-110 PCB for error, and
connection conditions.
15. Check conductivity through tester.
☞Check the DC 48V between UB 04 and AB 01 on the DOC 120 PCB
16.Verify that AUTO-MAINT S/W in DOC-120 PCB,DOR-13X PCB,

INSPECTION S/W is set to "MAINT" position.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
17. Verify that DOC NORMAL - ABNORMAL S/W is set to "NORMAL"(1~2, 4~5).
☞ Set to "NORMAL" when power ON
18. Verify that RUN-STOP S/W is set to NORMAL(RUN).

(DOC-120,DOR-13X,INSPECTION S/W)
19. Are there any foreign matters on governor pulley?
20. Are switch lever and catch weight set?
21. Is wiring terminal properly connected?
22. Check grounding conditions.
3) Traction machine
Are the connection parts securely tightened and the taping satisfactory?
Are the tightened bolts to each part secure?
③ Are the sheave, pulley and rotor of motor free of foreign material and of undesirable
contact with other parts?
Is the compression level of springs on magnet brake appropriate?
Is the stroke in the rated value?
Are the oil level proper?
Is the ground wire to motor secure?
4) Others
Is each door to machine room posted with a sign of "Authorized personnel only" and
"DO NOT ON" in MCCB?
Is the illumination in machine room appropriate?
If light power cannot be supplied from the building, obtain power from TML1-10 and
TML1-12 of terminal block on control panel. This time, power is obtainable only within
300W.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2. Insulation measurement
2.1. Purpose
To prevent damage to equipment or electric shock by detecting possibilities of insulation
failure and safety hazard resulting from elevator's fault.
1) Electric shock prevention

① Pay full attention to the main inverter (diode, IGBT, condenser, contactor) circuit to
which DC 550V with the car stopped or DC 700V with the car running have been
charged. Turn OFF the MCCB and let the main circuit discharge at AL electrolytic
capacitor for more than ten minute. Make sure that LED1 lights OFF and zero(0)
voltage is obtained with a tester. (LED1 lights OFF if discharged to less than 50V)
2) Protection of PCB from burning
Be sure to follow the below before insulation measurement.
Caution : Semi-conductive element is also used in high-voltage circuit.
Thus, the element can be damaged by direct circuit earth. Be sure to carry
out low-pressure Megger test at all terminals of control board before
Megger test.
Low-voltage Megger: Use low-voltage Megger(Voltage : 15V) or DMM.
Carry out Megger test at all connectors and terminals in control panel.
High-voltage megger: Use battery-type megger(Rotation type inapplicable).
Carry out megger test at terminal blocks and contacts in control panel.
3) Control panel ground wiring
CP ground plate
EARTH PLATE TO
E1 ○ B/D lead line ground,Trans ground
GND PLATE E2 ○ EMI Filter. E terminal
E3 ○ Lightning surge absorber.E terminal

G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 FG
E4 ○ Reactor,Motor E terminal
E5 ○ Control trans. E terminal
DPC PCB "GND" E6 ○ DPB-100 PCB "VK-06"(extend type)
E7 ○ INV. DOOR(Y4-04) E terminal
DOM 100 PCB "GND" E8 ○ CAR EARTH "Y1-15"
DOC PCB F.G terminal. E9 ○ LIMIT S/W CABLE "E"
DOC PCB "GND" E10 ○ GOVERNOR EARTH.
ROTORY ENCODER EARTH

E11 ○
DOP- 116 PCB
SMPS "FG"(BASE model)
"TML3- 10" E12 ○
FLAT COPPER WIRE
○ E17
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
② Separate GND plate from control panel and connect it to F.G earth plate with flat
copper line and then ground.
2.2 Preparing insulation measurement

1) Car and hoistway
Verify that MCCB S/W of building and control panel turn OFF.
Set all switches in and on the car to normal position.
Be careful that final limit switches and POSI shall not be in the OFF position.
Car should not operate the final limit switches.
Car should be not closed POSI.
Landing doors and car doors should be closed U V W
on all floors.
Motor terminal U, V, W common
(Refer to Fig.1)
SHORT-CIRCUIT WITH CLIPS
Short-circuit terminal block X,Y and Z common
with clips (When a reactor applied). (Fig.1) SHORT-CIRCUIT OF MOTOR
TERMINAL BOARD
2) Control panel
Remove connectors from DOC PCB.
Remove connectors from DPC PCB
Remove connectors from DPP PCB
Remove connectors and terminal from DOP PCB
Remove connectors and terminal from DOM PCB
Remove connectors from DOR PCB
Remove connectors from DPB-100 PCB (BRAKE current applied)
When separating GND plate from F.G ground plate,
separate the flat copper which
connects them each other.(Refer to Fig.3)
Caution: As DC 550V has been charged on

the main circuit condenser for
1 minute after MCCB turn OFF make sure that SHORT-CITCUIT WITH CLIPS
zero voltage is obtained with a tester. (Fig.3) SHORT-CIRCUIT OF MAIN

CIRCUIT DIODE
Turn OFF the "MCCB for "Light" brake in control panel and short-circuit secondary
side of MCCB.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2.3 Measuring insulation

Table 3) Rated insulation resistance value
Circuit Measuring section Rated value
Main circuit Power terminal block (TERM1,MCCB)~ FRAME
Motor terminal block (TERM2) ~ FRAME 1 ㏁ or
Motor circuit more
Reactor terminal block ~ FRAME
2nd contact of lightihg MCCB ~ FRAME
Control circuit 2nd main contact of C1ST contactor ~ FRAME
0.5 ㏁ or more
2nd main contact of C1BR contactor ~ FRAME
2nd main contact of C1VD contactor ~ FRAME
Caution : 1st No.5 main contact of C1BR is connected to frame. The 1st main contact of
C1ST and C1VD are connected to noise filter where leakage current
(max. 40mA) flows
1) Restoring and checking the connectors

Connect all connectors in DOC, DPC, DPP,DPB,DOP PCB (Refer to Table4)
Check the MIC & Jack connected condition for between IPM, regenerative IGBT and
DPP-1XX PCB.
Caution : "GU","GV","GW","GP" and "GLX","GX" which connects power stack section and
DPP-1XX PCB may damage IGBT if jack is disconnected with power ON. Be sure
to check the above conditions before power supply. Caution with static electricity
Table 4) Main connectors
PCB Connector Remarks
DOC-120 PCB AB, AC, HA, CB, CA, AA, AD,CT,AF CT,AF:DOC-120
DPC-120,121 PCB VA, VB, VC, VG,VJ VJ:DPC-112,120
DPP-111,131 GLX, GXU, GXV, GXW, GU, GV,
PCB GW, GP, GX
DPB-100 PCB VJ,VK DPB-100:extend
DOP-116PCB PS, UB, SH, XHA, SMPS, TML2(TML3) TML3:DOP-115
③ Check screws on inverter section (diode module, regenerative IGBT,U.V.W-phase

IGBT, chemical condenser) are tighten firmly.
As connector connection on input side and output side can be changed each other,
check the connected state.
Connect all disconnected ground lines to each ground terminal.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Release the clips for short circuit of R,S,T on AC input side and P, N on DC output side.
Release the clips for short-circuit U,V and W in motor terminal.
Release the clips for short-circuit X, Y and Z in reactor terminal.
3. Checking voltage
3.1. Checking before power supply
1) Checking Items
Measure input voltage on the 1st side of MCCB in the building.
Changing the control transformer tap, if not match for B/D power supply.
Check DPC-120,121 PCB connector.
In case of 60~105 m/min, verify that VA(Control power), VB(CT), VC(C1VD_ option),
VE(IOIF),VJ(DPB-100,current control) and VG(DPP) connectors are connected.
Check DPC PCB Jumper
Check the settings on the basis of the below Table.
- "J5H"(DPC-111,112),"JP4"(DPC-120) JUMPER
JUMPER NO IPM, IGBT Capacity MOTOR Capacity
1~2 50A, 75A, 150A 4.5KW~7.5KW. 13KW~15KW
3~4 100A, 200A 9.5KW~11KW. 18KW~22KW
Capacity of motor defined on nameplate

ex) In case the motor capacity is13/15KW, setting 15kW.
If both jumpers are not inserted, hardware error will occur.
- JP1(DPC-120)
JUMPER NO Function Remark
MP NORMAL -
MC Only for factory -
- JP3(DPC-120)
JUMPER NO Function Remark
SIGMA SIGMA model set SI210 model inclusion
DI1,2 Di1,2 model set -
Check J1J JUMPER
Without jumper : The usual times (3-4 JUMP PIN inserted when DSP SPEC. WRITE)
Check DPP-1XX PCB connector
Check the type of DPP-1XX PCB according to IPM,IGBT capacity as shown in the
below Table.
PCB Type IPM, IGBT Capacity
DPP-131 50,75, 100, 150A (Motor 5.5 ~15kw)
DPP-111 200A (Motor 18~22kw)
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
DPP-131 is for IPM driving PCB and DPP-111is for IGBT driving.
Verify that all connector are connected to their proper positions.
2) Checking after power supply

Turn ON the building power.
Check the input voltage of DOC-120 PCB.
Verify that DC is 48V±5% between AB connector No.1 and F.G.
(For checking safety circuit-R5SC)
Check the voltage output of SMPS on DOC-120 PCB TB1 terminal block.
DOC-120 PCB Measuring Point Voltage
TB1 5V - GND DC +5V ± 5%
terminal block 15V - GND DC +15V ± 5%
Check input voltage of DCL-242

Verify that voltage between CCN1 connector No.4 on DCL PCB and ground is
DC 24V±5% in operating panel.
Verify that voltage between ONC connector No.13 on DCL PCB and ground
is DC48V±5% in operating panel.
Verify that voltage between CCN1 connector No.3 on DCL PCB and ground is
DC 0V 0.1V in operating panel.
Check voltage DOP-116 PCB
XHA MIC 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 : DC 24V±10%
Check WDTs of DPC-120,121 PCB
Verify that LD2 CPU LED(green) flickers at 0.5 second interval on the power supply.
(It flickers at 0.25 seconds when the motor is running)
Caution: WDT(watch dog timer) monitors that the speed control CPU performs
calculation correctly. If WDT does not flicker at 0.5 second interval, or ON only or
OFF only, speed control CPU may failed seriously.
Thus, if only one error occurs, thorough inspection is required. At this time,
check 5V power supply, ROM or ROM socket, and connector connection.
Check ALM LED

Verify that LD1 ALM LED(Red) lights up after the power supply, and then, OFF in about
2 seconds.(ALM LED is for inverter hardware safety check)
a) Detecting over_ current on inverter.(or J5H (=DPC-111,112)JUMPER is not inserted)
b) WDT failure on speed control CPU.
c) Short-circuit of IGBT U-phase arm and failure of gate Trans power.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
d) Short-circuit of IGBT V-phase arm and failure of gate trans power.

e) Short-circuit of IGBT W-phase arm and failure of gate trans power. IPM ARM SHORT
and GATE SMPS voltage error detection
f) Detecting over_voltage on DC link end.
g) Failure of regenerative IGBT, gate trans, Gate SMPS power.
ALM LED lights up when hardware errors are detected as stated in a) ~ g).
- Verify that JP4 jumper is properly inserted.( LED1 turn ON if not inserted)
- Verify that WDT LED flickers normally.
- In the above c) ~ g), check the connectors of DPP-1XX PCB and verify that Gate
SMPS(trans) input is applied by AC 110V±10%.(GTS connector in control panel
No.1↔3 : AC110V)
- Check IGBT stack for connection conditions(disconnection and loose volt).
Check C1VD contactor input(Option)
- Verify that C1VD contactor is inputted in about 3 seconds after the power supply.
Caution: If DC link voltage does not reach 330V 8 seconds after C1VD input(low- voltage
error), turn OFF C1VD contactor and then ON. Then, check the voltage after 8
seconds. If voltage is still low, turn OFF the contact to generate charging circuit
failure error.
- In this case, main power circuit connection, GATE SMPS(trans) input or connection,
charging circuit OFF, or IGBT, regenerative IGBT ON may fail. Thus, check these
conditions. If start the recharging, LD1 will be light ON.
Caution: It takes about 10 min. for DC link voltage to be completely discharged when
power OFF. Thus, never touch DPP-1XX PCB and the stack when LD1 lights up.
- When LED does not light up though C1VD contactor is input after the power supply
inverter may be short, or regenerative IGBT ON, charging circuit OFF or LED diode may
fail. Checking should be carried out after DC link voltage is disconnected.
Check DPP-1XX PCB
- Checks that charging detecting LED is ON.
LD1(red) on PCB lights up if DC link voltage is 50V or more and dims, then, turns OFF if
the voltage is less 50V. LD1 lights up again when the DC link begins to be charged.
- When LED does not light ON even if after the power supply, inverter may be short, or
regenerative IGBT ON, charging circuit OFF or LED may fail.
Checking shall be carried out after DC link voltage is disconnected.
Caution: It takes about 10 min. for DC link voltage to be completely charged when power off.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Thus, never touch DPP-1XX PCB and stack area while LD1 lights ON.
3) Checking voltage
Check MCCB and PCB voltage on each section as shown in table1 and 2.
Table 1) AC voltage input (Trans 2nd side output)
MIC/PIN Voltage FUSE & Capacity LED Remark
PS-12,14,16 3Φ 85V FS1,2/6A LED1,2 'BRAKE COIL,C1ST,C1BR driving
PS-07,09,11 3Φ 37V FS4,5/3A LED4,5 Relay driving,external input,I/Fsignal,switch input
PS-01,03,05 3Φ 19.2V FS6,7/3A LED6,7 CAR LON PCB power

PS-02,04,06 3Φ 19.2V FS8,9,10,11/10A LED8,9,10,11 HALL BUTTON power
PS-17,19 AC 110V FS12/3A LED12 SMPS input power
PS-17,19 AC 110V FS12/3A LED12 INV. FAN driving
PS-18,20 AC 110V FS13/3A LED13 GATE SMPS,GATE TRANS input power
PS-21 "E" GATE SMPS,GATE TRANS "E"
PS-13,15 AC 110V FS14/5A LED14 Door motor input power(SBD1)
PS-13,15,10 AC 110V FS14,16/3A,6A LED14,16 Door motor input power(SAV1,MAV1,DAV1,HAV1)
TML2-02,01 AC 220V FS15/10A LED15 Checking lighting power supplied(DOP-113PCB)
TML3-02,01 AC 220V FS15/10A LED15 Checking lighting power supplied(DOP-116 PCB)
Table 2) AC/DC voltage output

UB-03,05 DC 110V FS3:3A(Base model) LED3 'BRAKE COIL,C1ST,C1BR driving
UB-04,01 DC 48V Relay driving,external input,I/Fsignal,switch input
UB-07,02 DC 24V CAR LON PCB power
XHA-04,03 DC 24V HALL BUTTON power(1~8FL)
TML2-06,05 DC 24V HALL BUTTON power(25~32FL)
SMPS-01,02 AC 110V SMPS input power
SMPS-03,04 AC 110V INV. FAN input power
SMPS-05,06 AC 110V GATE SMPS,GATE TRANS input power
SMPS-7 E GATE SMPS,GATE TRANS "E"
UB-08,09 AC 110V Door motor input power
TML2-02,03 AC 220V Checking lighting power supplied(DOP-113PCB)
TML3-02,03 AC 220V Checking lighting power supplied(DOP-116 PCB)
TML2-10 E EARTH(DOP-113 PCB)
TML3-10 E EARTH(DOP-115,116 PCB)
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
4. Non-scaffolding method (MSK operation)

4.1. Preparation for MSK
1) Cable work of machine room and hoistway (Non-scaffolding operation)
Caution : Complete governor installation, roping and switch connection.
Governor switch should not be in common.
Make UL and DL of limit switch common in DOM PCB TML1 terminal block.
Make UL switch common with terminal block TML1-07 and TML1-08.
Make DL switch common with terminal block TML1-07 and TML1-03.
Wire the cable of the lowest final limit switch(LSD).
a) Wire the final limit switch cable from the
Control panel that M/C room duct piping has
been completed, to control panel, and bind
it(Refer to Fig.1). M/C Room
b) Draw the cable for lower final limit switch

down to PIT floor through M/C room duct
piping.
c) Bind the cable giving extra in the cord support
of car lower section
d) Wire and bind the remainder cable up to
top of car, and then fix MIC terminal block at Limit S/W cable
a reachable position.
Check connection and insulation.
a) Wire the limit switch ground line Adapter MIC T/B
to control panel and MIC terminal block.

b) Insert adapter cable into final
limit switch cable MIC in machine room, and
insert final limit switch cable, MSB, BZ and
ORS to MIC terminal block in(Refer to Fig.2)
c) Check the connection and insulation
B
o
t
t
o
m
F
L
d) If item c) is normal, insert an adapter plug 300mm or

more
into "MSK" CAP in the control panel. Governor Rope
e) Turn power ON.
(Fig.1) Wiring diagram for

MSK operation
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
ADAPTER MIC T/B FOR MSK OPERATION CTRL B/D MIC

MSK운전용 ADAPTER MIC 단 PANEL
"MSK" 21P
"MSK"
ADAPTER CABLE
FOR LOWER LIMIT SW
MIC TO INSERT
"9P CAP HOUSING"
FOR MSB SW TO "LSD"

INSERT
"7P CAP HOUSING" "LSD"
FOR WARNING
LAMP/BUZZER OF
LOWER FINAL
MSK CAR
LIMIT
"13P CAP HOUSING"
SW CABLE
FOR MIC FOR
COLUMN & STOP SW "LSD"
"9P CAP HOUSING"
POSITION ASSEMBLED:ASSEMBLE MIC TERMINAL BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM FOR MSK OPERATION
FOR MSK OPR TO LOWER PART OF UPPER BEAM. INSERT
MIC CORESPONDING TO EACH PART NAME.
WIRING MIC REQUIRES CAUTION BECAUSE WARNING

FLASHER AND BUZZER ARE POWERED BY AC 220V.
(Fig.2) WIRING DIAGRAM

FOR MSK OPERATION
2) Operation under scaffold-free method

① Make sure the car is travelling in the up
Direction with MSB's up button pressed
and the car is in the down direction with
MSB's down button pressed.
If an error occurs during operations,
put MSB E.STOP switch to the ON position.
② Should the car is travelling in opposition
Directions of the running commands,
check the connection status of the motor
and R.E. Refer to 3) ~
in case of the car in opposite direction.
WIRING/CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR MSK OPERATION
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Be sure to restore to the original state upon the completion of non-scaffolding work.
a) Release UL and DL of limit switch from common state at TML1 terminal block.
For UL switch, release terminal block TML1-07 & TML1-08 from common state.
For DL switch, release terminal block TML1-07 & TML1-03 from common state.
b) Remove MSK connector plug(21P) and connecting plug(9P, 7P) from control panel
and connect to the final limit switches in hoistway.
4.2 Operation from machine room

1) Operation by DOR-13X PCB
Put AUTO/MAINT of S1 switch on DOR-13X PCB to the MAINT position.
DOR-13X PCB has NORMAL/MAINT,UP/DN, DMC, NORMAL/STOP switches.
For M/C ROOM operation should be set NORMAL/MAINT S/W to MAINT side,
and UP/DN S/W to UP or DN toggle.
Low speed operation from machine room should be done with the doors closed
(CDS "ON", LDS "ON")
If "ACD=04" at column 1 6 of row 1 on ANN, MAINT(low speed) operation
is available.
③ Carry out low speed operation from machine room by UP/DN switch on DOR-13X PCB
to UP/DN.
④ Verify that operating direction conforms to operation command by moving it about
100mm.
⑤ Should the car is travelling in opposite directions of running commands, check the
connection status of the motor and R.E.
2) Connection method when motor rotates reversal
Regular and / reverse arrangement(Refer to Fig.3)
Regular arrangement: Car is placed on the motor side.
Reverse arrangement : Car is arranged on the pulley.
REGULAR ARRANGEMENT REVERSE ARRANGEMENT
PULLEY
Motor
DRIVING PULLEY
T/R
SHEAVE
M/C T/R
DRIVING
M/C
SHEAVE
Motor
(Fig.7) REGULAR/REVERSE ARRANGEMENT

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Connection method
a) Interchange U-and W-phase in the event of reverse arrangement or motor is running
in opposite direction.
b) If rotary encodes are connected reversal, insert DIR
jumper on DOC-120 PCB. (Refer to Fig.4) 1 2 3 1 2 3
When motor or rotary encoder is connected reversal, (Fig.4) JUMPER SETTING
followings will occur.

a) Reverse connection of motor: Motor vibrates during operations and stops for emergency
after error "41" occurs.
b) Reverse connection of R.E: The car travels in opposite directions of the running
commands and stop within 5 sec.
c) Main encoder signal input direction reverse and motor power (U,V,W) input phase
sequence error :
1. When press Up button, elevator running down;
2. When press Down button, elevator running up;
3. Whether press Up button or press Down, elevator always running up, low speed
and vibrating.
Means: Change input direction of main encoder signal and motor power phase seq
uence on field, until elevator running normal.
Change method:
1. Change SPEC DATA: Address 0124 setting as 00/01 to change main encoder
signal input direction.
2. After above setting will happen TCD-60 error, need A52E operation.
3. Amend DIR jumper line on DOC-130 PCB to set RIGHT/LEFT.
4. Method of change Motor power phase sequence: 3 phase all need change
Ex) Change U,V,W phase sequence to W,U,V phase sequence.
5. Handle as above on field till direction and speed to normal position.
3) When UP operation
DOR-13X PCB(INSPECTION S/W ASY) AUTO / MAINT S/W to MAINT
UP/DN S/W to the "UP" position until destination
ANN shows "U" and the direction of car travelling up at column 16 of row 2.
4) When DOWN operation
DOR-13X PCB(INSPECTION S/W ASY) AUTO / MAINT S/W to MAINT
UP/DN S/W to the "DN" position until destination
ANN shows "DOWN" and the direction of car travelling up at column 16 of row 2.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Checking point during commissioning

Swiching-on of Main MCCB
YES
Initial screen on ANN
YES
NO -. Check SMPS input/output
SYS1,2 LEDs flicker
-. Check DOC-120 PCB
YES
-. Check T-cable for connection
CAR communication NO
-. Check SC jack on DOC-120 PCB
LON LED OFF or ON -. Check C-LON fuse in control panel
YES
NO -. Check E.STOP switch(APP/TOCI Box)
#R5SC RY "ON" -. Check E.STOP switch(DOC,DOR PCB)
-. EES,GRS,SCS,FLU,FLD
YES
NO -. Check switch
Give UP or DN call
-. Check safety circuit
through control panel
-. Check connections
YES
NO -. When motor rotates reversely,
E/L up(down) change the DIR position on
DOC-120 PCB.(Refer to Fig.4)
5) IN CAR operation (Standard : Non-applied)

Switch the operation switch of the on-car connection box to "NORMAL" position.
Perform IN CAR low speed operation by using top floor button, bottom floor button or
UP/DOWN button of control panel.
6) ON CAR operation
① Switch the operation mode in OPB from "NORMAL" to "MAINT".
(OPB IN_CAR applied)
Switch the operation switch of on-car connection box to "ON-CAR" operation mode.
Check the operation of ON-CAR switch, MSB(switch) and T.O.C.I Box on car.
Caution : Switch ON E.STOP switch and verify that the car operates.
Get on or off a car after switched ON the E.STOP switch.
Upon the completion of low speed operation, verify that the car interferes with entrance
and equipment, while running the car down at 1 meter intervals.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
4.3 Governor test
During governor wedge test, if traction machine sheave doesn't idle for 5 sec. or more,
rotary encoder will fail.
After restoration, enter "A43E", "A44E" for all clear error.
Governor and safety wedge operation test Tripping test
1 Switch to on-car operation on the 1 Separate the governor line.

car top
2 Set up the digital tachometer.
With the switch in the OFF position
2 check that the car comes to stop 3 Remove split pin from connection part
(UP and DN) of governor rope and prepare free fall
3 Drop catch weight. Drop governor rope without braking
4 and measure the speed at the time

Make "SCS" common at TML1 terminal of switching OFF and weight activating
in front of control panel(02 and 06
4 of TML1) and verify that wedge stops Restore all conditions to original
the descending by gripping the rail 5 ones and verify that there is no
and sheave idles when E/L runs down error by performing UP/DN running.(See table7)
5 Return the catch weight to the original Table 7) Governor tripping speed
position by running up the car Speed Car side
(m/min) Switch Weight
Remove the common line from "SCS" 30~45 57±2 61±2
6 and return the governor switch 60 75±2 79±2
lever to the original position. 90 113±2 117±2
105 131±2 137±2
Restore all conditions to original
7 ones and verify that there is no
error by performing UP/DN running.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
5. Preparing high-speed commissioning
5.1 Preparation
1) Installing UL and FLU
Distance between CAM and switch should be 11±1 mm.
When car is ±5 mm of bottom or top floor level, UL shall contact with CAM and not
operate.(When running UP and DOWN slow, car stops at 50~70mm)
FLU should be in position of 200±10 mm from UL.(Refer to Fig. 1 and Table 1)
2) Check on UL and FLU operation condition
Lower the car 2~3 meter above the top floor level in low speed operation.
Run the car in the up direction under speed operation. Distance where the car has
stopped by the operation of UL should be within 70 mm.
Repeat item .
Run the car in the up direction after making UL common. Distance where the car
has stopped by the operation of FLU should be within about 270 mm.
Run the car in the UP and DOWN direction after switching OFF UL.
(This time, car shall run DOWN but shall not run UP.)
Run the car UP and DOWN after turning FLU OFF.
(This time, car shall not run both UP and DOWN.)
Check error while running the car UP and DOWN
after restoring FLU and UL.
3) Check installation and

operation status of DL and
FLD Repeat above item 2)
in the bottom floor.
(Fig.1) INSTALLING FINAL LIMIT

SWITCH
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Table 1) Limit switch installed position

Distance L1 L2 L3 L4 L5
SPEED FLU(D) UL(D) FLU ~ UL SD1U(1D) SD2U(2D)
30 200 50 150 450
45 200 50 150 600
60 200 50 150 1000
90 200 50 150 1400 2000
105 200 50 150 1800 2700
On the basis of bending point side of limit switch CAM when car is on "0"
level(Landing sill of bottom and top floor).
4) Cleaning
Section Working contents
-. Clean control panel, governor, TR M/C, duct and floor.
Machine room -. Assemble control panel, governor,TR M/C sheave and duct cover.
-. Latch the machine room door.(By builder)
Entrance and -. Clean hall door equipment, landing sill, rail and rail bracket.
Hoist way -. Clean rail (Sand defected rail surface with a file)
-. Clean car door equipment on and inside the car.
Car -. Disassemble the wedge roller and guide shoe in wedge assembly,
and remove foreign substances and then assemble them.
PIT -. Clean pit floor and assemble the oil pan.
5) Compensation chain
Bring the car down to the bottom floor and install a compensation chain support to
the bottom of the car.
Install a compensation chain latch at 400mm above pit floor of the counter weight rail.
(Refer to Figure 2)
Connect the chain to the support of the car by using 'U" bolt and bring the car up.
Be sure that there is sufficient extra chain(300mm) on the car side.

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
When the car reaches the top floor,

hang and bind the remainder
compensation chain and untwist the
bands.
Connect the compensation chain to
the bottom of counter weight with "U"
bolt at 230±20mm above pit floor and
cut the rest of chain. (Refer to Fig. 2)
When compensation chain is
connected, assemble double nut and
(Fig.2)Assembling compen. chain
split pin.
Applicable standard for compensation chain(Refer to Table 2)
Table 2) Applicable standard Legend : Chain Rope None
Speed Passengers Stroke (Travel) (m)

Usage Roppin
(m/min) (Load) 20 25 30 40 60 Above 60
P ≤ 15
1:1
30≤ V ≤ 60 P ≥ 17 None Compensation chain
Passenger 2:1 ALL
Hospital P ≤ 15
V = 90,105 1:1
P ≥ 17
V = 120,150 ALL ALL Compensation chain
V = ≥ 180 ALL ALL ROPE
Car, Freight ALL ALL ALL Compensation chain
Note 1) The above standard is applicable to a standard specification. Thus, when car weight
increases due to car interior decoration, separately calculate and apply a standard.
Note 2) For below cases, compensation chain will not be applicable.

Passengers Speed(m/min) Stroke TYPE Remark
11 ~ 15 45,60,90,105 40M or less TRUNK Standard SIZE
17 60,90,105 40M or less Passenger Spec. size
17 60,90,105 40M or less TRUNK Spec. size
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
5.2 Car balancing

1) Adjusting guide shoe
Run the car down to the bottom floor.
Adjust car balance with the gap(30mm) between landing and car sill kept.
The gap of wedge body shall be the same on the right and left.
Raise and adjust the wedge to return automatically(free fall).
Verify that wedge stroke is 84mm and the distance between rail and wedge is
5±0.5mm.
Tighten the fastening nut of the tie rod attached to sling until it contacts with the tie rod.
Tighten the nut half a turn after it contacts with tie rod guide.(Same in 4 points)
How to adjust guide shoe
a) Tighten fastening bolt and set the sizes of push nut and ring to 10mm, with guide
shoe slightly contacting with 6mm size of "A" section.
b) If this 10mm size is not obtained, the car vibrates because the light hold rubber
cannot move. (Refer to Fig. 3)
c) If 6mm size of "A" section is not obtained, regular push pressure(32Kg) cannot be
obtained. If the size is too large, the car may vibrate severely and interfere with
hoistway equipment and car equipment.
d) If the size is smaller than 6mm in "A" section, pushing pressure becomes too
big and starting shock and stopping shock may occur.
Adjust the guide shoe and install the oiler.
(Fig.3) Adjusting guide shoe

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2) Adjusting guide roller

Tension the rope(same spring size) and run the car down to the bottom floor.
No interference will be allowed between clutch cam and landing door.(Close the door)
Keep the car loosening all roller set bolts of the guide rollers.
(4 points on upper/lower section of car)
Loosen bracket and cam for fixing limit switch to avoid interference with the car.
Stay the car in no load condition.
Verify that car operation is not hindered because fastening nut of tie rod is tightened.
Hang the balance weights below the car and adjust balance so that car may be
aligned with the rail center line in static condition.
Wedge body gap shall be the same in right and left side.
Raise the wedge and check that it restores properly.
Verify that wedge stroke is 84mm and the clearance between rail and wedge is
5±0.5mm. At this time, the clearance between hall and car sill should be 30mm.
Tighten the guide roller spring nut(Left/right No. ) to adjust the spring length to 30mm.
Then guide roller contacts the rail. Tighten both spring nuts No. and
to adjust the spring length to 30mm.(Perform in upper and lower section at a time)
(Refer to Fig. 4)
84
(Fig.4) Adjusting guide roller

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
The guide roller adjusted with spring should be ratable by 20Kg force.
Install the limit SW loosened on the normal position.
Fasten the nut of the tie rod attached to the sling so as to contact slightly.
Tighten the nut half a turn after it contacts the tie rod guide.(Same at 4 points)
How to adjust guide roller
a) It is desirable to adjust the car balance in the middle of the floors after works for
movable cable, compensation rope or chain, wiring, etc. are completed. However,
generally, it may be carried out to the bottom floor in consideration of workability.
b) Guide roller should be adjusted within 5kg of front and rear force and within 10kg of
right and left force(but, 3kg and 6kg for 300m/min or faster).
This force should be measured while tensing up/down and right/left of the roller guide
body with spring balance hanging.
c) Also, loading additional balance weights on to the car obtains more sub weight when
balancing. Thus performing car balance with minimum balance weight is essential.
d) Bad balanced car could cause vibration or damage of guide roller. Special attention is
needed.
5.3 Installing and adjusting position detector(POSI) and position detector bracket
1) Adjusting shield plate distance of POSI
① Position the car to the bottom floor level, install POSI bracket temporarily on the rail,
and adjust it up and down vertically on to the basis of the rail.(Refer to Fig. 5)
Install levelling device on to the support arm of the door machine base.
SHIELD
SHIELD POSI. PLATE
PLATE 40mm or more
RED-MARK 14
18. 5 120
59 24 250 278
120
50 16. 5
38
67
14
(Fig.5) ADJUSTING RANGE OF SHIELD PLATE
Position the temporarily induction plate installed on to the middle of POSI,

adjust it to be shielded up to 40mm(red-mark) deep and fix it.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Table 3) Function and usage

No. Name Function and usage ② LDU
① LDC Floor height measure/door zone sensing./floor count.

① LDC
② LDU Slack rope compensation
③ LDD
③ LDD
Connect MIC connector(LD) of POSI to machine room and on car connection box.
Turn on door machine DMC and DCO.
Caution: If a magnetic material is near, its operational features may be varied.
MAGNETIC MATERIAL
70mm
MAGNETIC MATERIA
MAGNETIC MATERIA
MAGNETIC MATERIA
MAGNETIC MATERIA
70mm 70mm 50mm

MG SW
s ide s ide
70mm
MAGNETIC MATERIAL
(Fig. 6) Min. gap between magnetic material and POSI

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
6. POTENTIO METER
6.1 Installation
Ä«
Car ¹Ù´Ú
Floor
Cushion Rubber
¹æÁø°í¹« L
Screw
½ºÅ©·ç
60mm
BASE
1) Move the base and adjust the distance(L) from car bottom and top of base to be 15mm
by screw
2) Spec setting of Potentio meter (Load sensor type + Number of sensor)
Applied 1EA : $0018 => “41” ,DFTR : “81” Potentio meter : 40 DFTR : 80
Applied 2EA : $0018 => “42” ,DFTR : “82”
SPEC1 Dip S/W pin No.4 ON position on the DOC-120 PCB.
6.2 Connection table
MIC name : POT MIC name : PTMA

NO Signal Name NO Signal Name MIC name : PTM1 PTM
1 P24 1 NO Signal Name
2 REF_VOLT 2 REF_VOLT 1 REF_VOLT 1
3 SIGNAL1 3 SIGNAL1 2 SIGNAL

2
4 GDC 4 GDC 3 GDC
5 REF_VOLT 5 4
3
6 SIGNAL2 6 5
7 GDC 7 POTENTIOMETER ASY
8 8 (AEG00C629)
DCL240PCB 9
10
11 MIC name : PTM2 PTM
12 NO Signal Name
13 REF_VOLT 1 REF_VOLT 1
14 SIGNAL2 2 SIGNAL
15 GDC 3 GDC 2
16 4
3
17 5
18
19
"PTM"CABLE` ASY 20 * In case it supplied 1 sensor,
(AEG00C746) 21 connect the MIC to PTM1
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
7. Adjusting in high speed operation

7.1 Operating board ID & CPI check
1) Car operating board ID & CPI check by ANN
Enter "A83E" in ANN normal mode.
"CAR CHK" which means CAR CHECK is displayed in ANN.
DCL-242 PCB operates.
Bottom floor car call button lights ON as Tab.1 according to car operating board ID
set in DCL-242 PCB.
Tab.1) Car operating board ID
NO Car OPB ID(HEX) Light ON times
1 Front MAIN 1 1 time
2 Front SUB 2 2 times
3 Disabled MAIN 3 3 times
4 Disabled SUB 4 4 times
5 Rear MAIN 5 5 times
6 Rear SUB 6 6 times
CPI of appropriate OPB indicates ID settled.

Each lamp(UP,DOWN,FULL,OUT OF SERVICE) of appropriate OPB CPI lights ON
in order.
Items ~ are repeated in approximately 6 sec. period.
To release CAR CHECK MODE, enter "FFFF" to switch to normal mode.
2) Check point during abnormal operation
LED indication confirmation
LED-LD1 indicates operation state of DCL-242 PCB, and the spec. is as follows.
NO State Condition Remark
1 Light OFF CPU RUN ,Comm. Error P24V power error, PCB(H/W) defects
CPU RUN OK,Comm. Error Comm. line's bad connection,
2 ON in 1 sec. Period
DIP SW's setting error
3 ON in 0.3 sec. period CPU RUN OK,Comm. OK
DIP switch
Setting car operating board ID
Operation board ID's value should not exceed from the value set from Tab.1).
Especially, car operating board ID of DCL-242 PCB for in-car, on-car running
OPR SW input must be set from front of MAIN(01 HEX). When value other than
above specified is set, communication of control panel with DOC-120 PCB cannot
be established. At this time, CPI is cleared and call is not registered.
Setting terminal resistance
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Set terminal resistance at the end of communication line(See Fig.3).

When terminal resistance is not set in communication end line, DCL-242 PCB
installed to operating board back section of the terminal resistance set can not
communicate with DOC-120 PCB. This time, CPI is cleared and the call is
not registered.
7.2 Hall button & IND check
1) Setting floor ID : using DIP switch (SW1-8P)
Structural drawing of DIP switch
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(Fig.1) Structural drawing of DIP switch
Setting DIP switch
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Floor ID setting segment (Hex) Button type segment
(Fig.2) BIT assigning of DIP switch
Setting the ID is possible, 63 maximum, by using Floor ID setting segment(No.1~6).

(OFF condition does not exist.)
Button type setting by using button type segment(No.7~8)
DIP switch No.
Button type
7 8
OFF OFF General button
ON OFF DUPLEX 2'ND HALL NET
Setting DIP switch

ex.1) When setting the lowest floor hall button ID(ID=01)
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DIP switch operation method

- Verify DIP switch state, which is OFF(state when delivery) before operating.
- Operate DIP switch in direction of ON.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
- For DIP switch setting, set 1 from bottom floor as reference floor and increase
by 1 according to increase of each floor(See Tab.2). But, if there is non-stop
floor, set ID without consideration of that floor.
Tab.2) Example of general type 15 stories(12 above & 3 under the ground) building floor ID
B/D floors SVC floors Setting DIP SW(HEX) Remark
12 STOP 0D
11 STOP 0C
10 NON STOP Without button unit
9 STOP 0B
8 STOP 0A
7 STOP 9
6 STOP 8
4 STOP 7
3 STOP 6
2 STOP 5
1 STOP 4
B1 STOP 3
B2 STOP 2
B3 STOP 1
Floor ID setting table using DIP switch(DS1)

- Setting general type Floor ID Ex) 1 : ON 0 : OFF
DIP SW 1
Absolute FL HEX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
2 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 3
∫ ∫ ∫
31 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1F
32 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 20
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2) Button connection check

Diagram of hall serial communication
DOC- 120 PCB

SH
Control panel
TX1
LED 1 2 3 4
DC24V
SH
XHA(CAP)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
XHA(PLUG)
Machine
room 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GND DC24V
HA TOP FL
1
DHG- 161 PCB
2
GND 3
DC24V 4
5
6
Hoist way
HA TOP FL- 1 IND PCB
1
DCM -1XX
2
GND 3
DC24V 4
HI
5
6
B/ T PCB
TRM R (120 Ohm)
HA Bottom FL
Vertical button ASY
1
2
GND 3
Diverging box DC24V 4
5
(Fig.3) Hall serial communication diagram 6
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
3) Hall button & IND PCB check(on the basis of Simplex)

Check point before power ON
Perform this before inserting hoist way cable plug.
- Turn off the control panel power.
- Check resistance, disconnection, and jumper in control panel as Tab.3.
Tab.3) Check points before power ON
NO Checking point Checking contents
R = 2± 1Ω (check of pulse trans problem in

1 XHA CAP 1 - 2
DOC-120 PCB)
2 XHA CAP 3 - 4 R = 1㏀ ± 200Ω(DC24V power short check)
3 DOC PCB SH Jumper Must be inserted(TRM R connection state check)
After SH disconnected, R of both ends of SH
4 DOC PCB SH Jumper
must be 120± 10Ω (TRM R check).
After checking above item 4, re-insert SH(JUMPER) in DOC-120 PCB.

- Check hoist way cable(communication network) as Tab.4.
Tab.4) Checks for hoist way cable(communication network)
R = 120± 10Ω (Check of TRM R in diverging box

1 XHA PLUG 1 - 2
of bottom floor)
2 XHA PLUG 3 - 4 Must be opened(Check of DC24V power shortly)
- Insert connector of hoist way cable(XHA).

- If above items , , are normal, power ON.
Check points after power ON
- Checks of control panel side
1 TX1, IDLE1 LED in DOC-120 PCB Both of 2 LEDs must be flickered
Setting Hall check mode

- Switch operation board running switch to independent side.
- Set button & IND PCB check mode.
- If "A82E" entered with KEY PAD of ANN, the below will be displayed in LCD's row 4.
R4 H A L L C H K K :
- Move to floor to be check
- HALL B/T and IND PCB check at hall side
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
- Verify HALL B/T and IND PCB's operating as below flow chart.
- Canceling the HALL CHECK mode by "FFFF" key in.
R4 H A L L C H K K : F F F F
- Switch operation board running switch to normal side.
HALL CHECK MODE?

NO
YES
B8 character ON
B8 character ON LAMP1 ON
B8 character ON UP LAMP ON
B8 character ON DN LAMP ON
B8 character ON UP L/T,CHIME ON
B8 character ON DN L/T,CHIME ON
B8 character ON ALL B/T LED ON
Floor ID DISPLAY(DIPSW1 1~6)
High character:F ,Low character:B/T type DISPLAY(DIPSW1 7~8)
END
4) Installation step of Hall B/T and IND board

① After disconnecting XHA MIC in controller, change the operation mode to MAINT on
the car.
DIP SW(SW1) Floor ID setting on DHG-161 PCB
Connection of HA mic jack on DHG-161
Connection of HI1 mic jack for DHG-161 PCB and IND board(DCM-1XX) joint.
HI2 mic jack : For DUPLEX Lift No.2
Connection of HU,HD(for B/T interface) on DHG-161 PCB.
Connection of HUC,HDC(for Duplex No.2, disabled person B/T applied) on

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
DHG-161 PCB.
Connection of HF1(Hall lantern applied) mic jack on DHG-161.
(HF2 :For DUPLEX Lift No.2)
Connection of HC1(Hall chime applied) mic jack on DHG-161.
(HC2 :For DUPLEX Lift No.2)
Repeat above ~ against all floors.
When you complete work until , connect XHA MIC to CP after main power off.
Turn on the main power after XHA MIC connection to CP
* Above work procedure is to protect PCB damage that occur sometimes while you work
in hoistway for wiring.
Anliso Door Manual
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
FOD Test & Commissioning for SI210 Page 1/16
Field Industrial Engineering Controller Date July. 2006
Index
1. Car door installation manual ................................................................ 2

2. Connection............................................................................................. 4
3. Operation ............................................................................................. 5
4. Other parameter ................................................................................ 10
5. Explain of debugging ........................................................................ 11
6. Trouble shooting ................................................................................ 14
7. Others ................................................................................................ 14
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
1. Car door installation manual
Safety Attention
- Before installation and putting equipment to operation, read this safety attention and
alarm to avoid harm and damage to person and device.
This instructor differentiates safety content in two levels, “Attentive” and “Dangerous”.
- Misuse is dangerous, may occur

Attentive flesh, moderate wound and
economic loss
- Misuse is dangerous, may cause

Dangerous Grievous Bodily Harm, deformity
so much as death and huge
economic loss.
1.1 Affirm and Install
Attentive
z Do not install damaged and absent-part frequency inverter.
z Do not install on the incentive material so as to prevent fire.
z Do not grasp the outline border or terminal block, prevent drop and being
Wounded.
z Make sure to fix the installation, or it may drop down and smash others.
1.2．Lay line
Attentive
z Make sure whether the AC main loop gets the same voltage with the
Inverter rating voltage. Do not make trial on endure voltage of the inverter.
z Do not connect the power supply to the terminal U、V、W.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Dangerous
z Affirm whether the input power is OFF before connection.
z Only allow to connector input power of AC single-phase 220V, and the
Device must be grounded (NEC and other applied standard).
z Only special engineer can do this connection job...
1.3．Operate and Circulate

Attentive
z The temperature of heartsick will become very high; so do not touch to

Avoid scald.
z Do not alter the enactment of inverter freely, this inverter has its own enactment
When leaves factory.
Dangerous
z The power must be switched on after outer line installed. Let the switch be OFF
Before connection.
z Do not touch terminal block of inverter even out of use, be careful of get an
electric shock.
1.4．Maintenance and Inspect

Dangerous
z The inspection should be done 5 min after power cut, or may have the dangerous
Of getting electric shock.
z Special engineer must do the inspection and maintenance.
z Do not touch the terminal block of inverter when power is on, it is very dangerous
Because the block has high voltage.
Use isolative tool when doing inspection and maintenance, avoid girding metal
substance like watch and ring etc.
1.5．Others
Dangerous
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
z Absolutely forbid the alteration to inverter, prevent casualty and incident.
2. Connection
2.1. Control Connection
Terminal Terminal
Pin Function Pin Function
& Mark & Mark
Door open to
1 L Power Phase line 4
position
P1 2 PE GND 5 Common
Door open to
3 N Power neuter line 6
P4 position
1 U 7 Common
2 V Machine Terminal 8 Position

P2
3 W 9 Common
4 PE GND 1 A
1 Open door instruction 3 5V
P3 2 Common 5 B
Door closing P6
3 6 0V
instruction
10 Outer connection
P5 door opening to 9 PE GND
11 position
Notice：P3: open/close door instruction input，it should be the
Input without power.
P4: All P4 output is relay contact output. DC：24V，2A；AC：
220V/110V 1A
P5: P5 connect with open-door input switch (Double steady magnistor), It
should be normally close contact when open/close the door.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2.2. Door M/C Drawing
3．Operation
3.1. Key instruction and function
Attentive
- All parameter should be input by eligible person, pay
(High attention to safety alert)
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
1. OOUT COUT SOUT OIN CIN DSIN
Caution:
Before adjustment read the
operating manual.
- Display the operation state, parameter or

Key /Display Function
value (when input key’P’）or fault code
▲ Raise/increase - May increase parameter number or value

when program.
▼ Descend/reduce - May reduce parameter number or value

when program.
P Descend/reduce - Use to visit set parameter
- Output instruction of door-opening to
OOUT Indicator lamp
position
- Output instruction of door-closing to
COUT Indicator lamp
position
SOUT Indicator lamp - Output instruction of door position signal
OIN Indicator lamp - Input instruction of door-opening
CIN Indicator lamp - Output instruction of door-opening
- Input instruction of out connected door to
DSIN Indicator lamp
position
3.2. Basic Operation
The set basic operation is as below: only open-door speed within 0.5m/s and 0.7m/s
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
can use this way, others set refer to the function sheet
Step/Operation Key Show value

(Deposited
1、switch on the main power
pulse number)
2、press program key P F000
3、Press until display F009 △ F009
4、Press P to display current parameter set value P F050
5、Press to set necessary parameter value △ F070
6、Press P to write set value P F009
7、Press ▽ to return to F009 ▽ F000
(Deposited
8、Press P to exit program P
pulse number)
3.3 System Parameter
Alter and set the parameters by film key of front board to adjust acquired
characteristic of open/close door, like the switch speed etc. 4 digits LED, and
can adjust by graph drawing of former page displayed the selected and set
parameter.
Notice：Disconnect input signal of open /close door before setting the parameter,
or pressing key P doesn't work. If pressing or discontinuously, the numerical
value will alter step by step, if pressing the key is done continuously, the value will
get a rapid alteration. If something wrong with the value setting, it can be reset to
former value by changing F017 to 1 and pressing P.
Parameter Range
Data Function Explain/ Note
Former setting
F000 Not used

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
- Adjust the value by comfortable

degree based on different door width,
- Acceleration of door 0005—0024 the slope increase or decrease in
F001 closing accordance with the value alteration. If
［0012］
the width of door opening is too small,
it will influence the overall speed of
door closing.
0010—0100
- Overall speed of
F002 ［0050］ - Set the highest speed of door closing
door closing

0010—0100 the slope increase or decrease in
- Deceleration of
F003 ［0045］ accordance with the value alteration. If
door closing
door closing.
- Excessive large setting may induce
- Door closing to 0003—0018 impaction when door closing
F004
place buffer
［0005］
- Excessive large setting may induce
- Distance of door 0010—0100 the time of closing too long
F005 closing to place
- Excessive small setting may induce
Buffer ［0050］
impaction when door closing
- Adjust door opening speed based on
- Speed of opening 0002—0015 different type of lock, excessive small
F006
lock setting may cause door opening long
［0008］
time
- Distance of opening 0020—0050 - Adjust the door opening gap based
F007
lock on different type of lock
［0040］
0005—0024 the slope increase or decrease in
- Acceleration of door
F008 ［0012］ accordance with the value alteration. If
opening
door closing.
0010—0100
- Total speed of door - Adjust the total speed when door
F009 ［0050］
opening opening
0010—0100 - Adjust the value by comfortable

- Deceleration when degree based on different door width,
F010 ［0045］
door closing the slope increase or decrease in
accordance with the value alteration. If
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008

door closing.
0004—0018 - Excessive large setting may bring
- Power of amortizing clash
F011 ［0009］
when door opening - Excessive small setting will not make
to door to position
0005—0050 - Excessive small setting may bring
- Amortizing distance clash
F012 ［0005］
when door to position - Excessive large setting will slow
down the speed of door opening
- The wallop will be varied because
0003—0023 door opening signal exists while
- Wallop of urgency closing the door, Excessive large
F013 ［0005］
door opening setting may bring clash, Excessive
small setting may make the stopping
slowly
- Output position 0000—0125

while door opening to - Time of setting signal of output door
F014 ［0005］
position opening to position
- Output position 0000—0125

- Time of setting signal of output door
F015 while door closing to ［0005］ closing to position
position
0—100
- Door position -Door position signal setting data
F016 ［50］
Output position displays by per centum
- Reset to original 0—1

setting data while - Set’1’and press P，all parameter will
F017 ［0］
leaving factory be reset to original data
0030—0080
- Adjust door closing moment,
- Door closing ［0060］
F019 excessive small value will influence
moment adjustment
total speed of door closing
-Extrusion guarding 0—1
- Be no effective if setting 0
F020 function settled ［0］
inside - Be effective if setting 1
Input password 55,

F021 Password
Enter F022-F032。
0—1 - 0 : asynchronous door vane

F022 - Select of door vane
- 1 : synchronous door vane
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
［1］
0—1 - 0 no retentiveness when door closing

- Select of to position
F023 ［1］
Retentiveness -1have retentiveness when door
closing to position
F024 Blank
10-20 - Adjust moment of door in limit speed
- Low speed moment
F025 [15] when opening and closing based on
adjustment
different door weight
- Door opening 30-80 - Adjust the largest moment during
F026 largest moment [60] door opening
adjustment
- Frequency of motor 10-30
under retentiveness [18]
F027
of door opening and
closing
- Moment of 20-50
retentiveness under [30]
F028
retentiveness of door
opening and closing
- Constant select of
opening/closing 0—1 - 0 Constant closing output
F029
when arriving to ［0］ - 1 Constant opening output
position
- Constant opening 0—1 - 0 Constant closing output
F030 /closing select for
［1］ - 1 Constant opening output
position output
- 0 Command Opening and closing
- Automatic opening 0—1 door
F031 and closing door
［0］ - 1 Automatic opening and closing
setting
door
- Time setting of 8—30 - Adjust timing time of automatic
F032 automatic opening
［12］ opening and closing door
and closing door
[Note ]：Parameter F022—F032is set by factory, no need to set on site commonly
4．Other Parameter
4.1. Technical Parameter

Level - IP30
Shockproof - IEC 68-2-6，2mm peak value- peak value（5.16Hz）2g, peak
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Dust Degree - IEC Standard 664 belongs to degree 2
Relative humidity - 90%，without dew
Room temperature -, -25…+70 Storage 0…+50 Use
Refrigeration
- Self Refrigerate
Style
4.2. Electric Parameter
Power Voltage - 230V±%15， 50/60Hz±2%
Slime Standard electro motion

- 2A Max（230V）
Input Voltage
Output Voltage - 3X220V 0，1……50Hz 4A Max
Encoder - Power 5V
Input Signal - None original signal
Output Signal - 250V Max，3A Max
Rating Output Power - 0．5 KVA
5．Explain of Debugging
5.1. Explain of Key Words
1) Offline operate state：Release from main controller and landing door,
Door machine operate separately.
2) Connect with door opening to position switch from outside：Install.
A pair of steady magnistor, contact of switch act close, door machine
Control gets the signal of door opening to position and give the information.
5.2. Step of door machine control debugging

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
1）Install door machine according to sequence, rectify the door machine
height and position、car door fan、door van, let the door in off-line
operation state, ensure the door go to each position without block.
2）Check input power of the door machine control：AC220V±15%；do not
electrify if out of AC220V±15%，or it will damage the door machine control.
3) Make sure the input voltage is common; open the power switch of door
machine control. At the beginning of electrifying, the door machine
controller displays the width pulse number which has been deposited
before leaving factory，move to door opening direction by self-study
speed， input door opening to position signal to door machine control
until the outer-connected door opening to position close. Input door to
position signal to door machine control, the door machine is in door
opening position if the outer-connected indicating lamp on operation board
light in the meantime. The control respond the contract instruction and
board operation unless the door machine control receive the opening and
closing action signal when outer-connected door open to position；the
control does not respond and be in state of low speed without signal, only
display current pulse number.
- There will be no door opened to position signal in any of circumstances as
follows:
* Pin P5 becomes less crowded or something wrong with connect line to
magnistor. Stick in Pin or connect correctly.

* Alnico does not match the position of magnistor，do not activate the
magnistor but adjust the position, let the magnet action close when door
opened to position.
* N、S pole of alnico reversed，the door opened to position magnistor
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
action disconnect. Install upper and nether cover of alnico.

* Contact of magnistor was damaged, replace with another magnistor in
same type.
4) In common case，the door machine was debugged before leaving factory,
electrify on site, the door machine control can open and close in gear so as the
door machine opened to position，jump out P3 contact or 、 on board to do
the door opening and closing operation ， during door closing, the pulse
number of door width descends gradually and displays 0000 when door
closed; in opening process, displays 0000 and increase by degrees until
biggest pulse number appears when door opening to position. It is common if
displays 000X after door closing to position（X is within 0-10）
5) Adjust related parameters based on fact until it reaches to an ideal run curve. If
there is clash when door closing to position, change F004 parameter to a small
value and F005 a litter higher；if door vane can not be opened when door
closing to position, adjust related mechanical set (refer to door machine related
part) and then make F004 parameter higher and F005 a litter smaller.
6) If move door-opening width limit of door machine when install and adjust on site, it
must do self-study in state of offline, and the origination should be out of door
closing to position. (Door is not stopped at door closing to position). The
operation of self-study is as follows:(It can not do self-study if something wrong
with the switch of outer-connected door-opening to position)
Key-Press Display
Step/Operate
P F000
1．Press key of program P
F018
2．Press until display F018
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
3．Press P display current parameter

P 0000
0000
0001
4．Press set 0001 as the parameter
Self-study finished, display
P pulse number of door width
5．Press P and start self-study
and resume to operate state
7) After door machine operate normally, connect door opening and closing control
line to Pin P3；Based on require of main control system, the door opened and
closed signal which is outputted by door machine control is outputted from
terminal Pin P4, connect to the related connection terminal of main control
system（Attention：
The door opening control signal must be the signal without power，or it will
break the door control
The output of door opening and closing to position is by relay ，
the contact can stand AC220V/ 110V、1A；DC24V、2A）。
8）Connect correctly，enter F029 by F021 password and amend parameter，
make output style of door machine control accord with main control system. It is
usually set by elevator factory.
9) After all door machine parameters are accord with the requirement of main control，
the operation of door opening and closing can be done ， amend related
parameter according to system till it reaches an ideal operate state.
6．Trouble Shooting
- When the trouble occurs, the control will be cut off and display a trouble code,
electrify again and work normally after renovating.
Trouble
Reason Method
Code
Machine UVW
E100 Power off，connect UVW correctly, electrify again
connection wrong
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Coder damaged
Or connection Connect correctly or change another coder
trouble
Check if the voltage is within the rate displays on
E001 Over voltage
nameplate
Check if trail cord is jumped or wrong grounding,
E002 Over current
check if machine is blocked up or over loading
E003 Over loading Check if machine is over loading
Transducer is
E005 Over heat Check if environment temperate is over heat
（inside PTC）
7. Others
7.1 Garbage Disposal
- Sellers will reclaim the rejected equipment but do not pay for conveyance. If user
disposes by himself, he must obey the related rule of law，if the method of
disposal doesn’t according to the compulsive rule, the sellers are derelict of
duty, and crust and radiator are made of aluminum. Should obey related
regulation when dispose wire way board.
7.2 Consultation Repair
- Series No. And Order No. Are need in consultation，and should be repeated in reply. Only
can be repaired in a complete set due to technical reason.
Attchment1：Attention in door machine Installation
1) After door machine installed, the high-speed door machine installation bracket
made soleplate, hanger upright, center of door machine and car’s in one line.
Hand push board should be flexible.
2) Adjust the clearance between door vane center and board center is 150+3mm
（landing door is 150mm）.

Close the door by hand，open the door vane maximally to f, adjust clearance
between lock and hook，（see figure），A is 2mm，B is 0mm. If retentiveness is
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
big excessively, augment clearance of A.
B
8. Adjusting of car door belt
16~20mm 14~18mm
1kgf
0.5kgf
Stone for the direction Stone for the direction

SAV Door Manual
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Index
1. Commissioning of Door M/C (SAV1)...…………………………………………..1
1.1Adjusting interlock and clutch …………………………………………………...1

1.2 Door device control circuit (diagram)...………………………………………...3
1.3 Test driving of door machine ………………..…………………………….….20
1.4 Adjusting PATTERN .…………………………………………………………...21
1.5 LED & ERROR ...........................................................................................24
1.6 Check points during door abnormal operation ……………………………...25
2. HAV Door system and Eletric adjustment.………………………………...…..29
2.1 Motor control characteristics .....……………………………………………..29

2.2 PCB function ....………………………………………………………………...30
2.3 Trial run of door operator ...…………………………………………………....31
2.4 DIP Switch setting for door SPEC ...………………………………...............31
2.5 Function of dip switches ..…………………………………………………….33
2.6 Each SPEC adjustment method .....………………………………………....34
2.7 LED function ...………………………………………………………………....34
2.8 Car door electrical circuit diagram.………………………………………....36
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
1. Commissioning of Door M/C (SAV1)

1.1 Adjusting interlock and clutch
※ Adjusting interlock and clutch should be performed in the condition that hall door device,
L-Sill & C-Sill and car door device is identical with the center and the balance is
maintained.
St roke 4± 0. 5
1) Adjusting interlock
① Verify door is identical with the center of
JAMB and L-SILL, and the gap is exact.
2± 0. 5
② Check the gap if HOOK and CLAW 11± 1
gap is 2±0.5mm, and switch stroke

is 4±0.5mm or less(See Figure 1). 2± 0. 5
( 그림1) I nt erl ock & Swi t ch

2) Adjusting clutch
(Fig.1)
① Distance between landing sill and 8± 1

Fi
고정자xed
clutch must be 8±1mm by moving car
C-Si l l
up and down. And adjust verticality 30 30
Movabl e
to be 1mm or less front & back, left L-Si l l
scal
가동자 e
10± 2
& right. Standard distance between landing 10± 2
72± 1
sill and car sill is 30mm(See Figure 2).
( Fi(g. 2) Cl ut클러치
그림2) ch gri p계합
di agram
관계
② After adjusting fixed scale clutch is finished, main fastening should be performed, and
adjust clutch cam with liner so that opening of movable scale maybe 72±1mm with car
door closed completely. At this time, increasing inserting of liner, dimension of
opening will also increase.
3) Adjusting gate switch cam
① Adjust the distance between

Swi t ch
스위치
cam and switch to be 1±0.5mm or
less(See Fig.3).
1± 0. 5mm
Cam
캠
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
② Adjust the length of riding cam

Sw
스위치
i t ch
slowly close door, and adjust
the dimension of opening in
contacting point to be
18±2mm(See Fig.5).
Cam
캠
2± 0. 5mm
( Fi g.(5) Adj ust캠과

그림5) i ng cam
스위치& swi t ch
조정
③ Disassemble switch cover, 중심선

Mi ddl e l i ne
slowly close door, and adjust 카도어

Car door 카도어
Car door
the dimension of opening in
contacting point to be
18±2mm(See Figure 6). 18± 2mm
((그림6)
Fi g. 6) A카도어
dj ust i ng car door
스위치 조정
4) Adjusting safety shoe
① Projection of shoe: single face shoe: 35mm
both face shoe: 25mm
② With stopper, verify if stroke is normal during door's complete opening and closing
(See Table 1)
Tab.1) Operating distance of safety shoe
Segment Oper at i ng posi t i on Di mensi on
Bot h f ace Di st ance bet ween door / shoe on f ul l openi ng 13±3mm
When door i s opened at t he hal f poi nt 48±2mm
Di st ance bet ween shoes on door ' s compl et e cl ose 6±1mm
Si ngl e f ace Di st ance bet ween door / shoe on f ul l openi ng 35±2mm
When door i s opened at t he hal f poi nt 35±2mm

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
③ Connection of safety shoe Safety shoe should be connected with car upper junction
box and MIC connector. Safety shoe and close command are connected in serial,
so when disconnection of safety shoe, opening is possible, but closing is
impossible (See Figure 7).
P48( 48V DC)
SES
Cl oseCLOSE지령
command
Control panel
제어반 Door PCB
도어PCB
( Fi g.( 7)
그림7)
Connect
세이프트
i on of saf
슈 et결선
y shoe
※ When disconnection of safety shoe, door opening is possible, but closing not.
(This means shoe and CLOSE command input are in serial.)
1.2 Door device control circuit (diagram)

1) Car door system
① Adjusting switches are composed of ones to adjust accelerate/decelerate speed during
reverse and adjusting according to specification and the others(SW1~SW5) to adjust

speed pattern.
② Volume(VR1) for adjusting position in PCB center is for low voltage level setting,
which is factory-operated for delivery(Setting the volume to the middle right turning
lowers low voltage level and left turning raises low voltage level).
③ Indication LED is composed of LED(LD2, LD3) to indicate open and close, normal
indication LED(LD4) of door(PCB), abnormal indication LED(LD5) of IPM, CPU normal

/abnormal indication LED(LD1) of control PCB, and LED(LD7) for DOLS & DLCS
indication.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2) DCD-230 PCB
1. Outlook
PJ3 CONN. PJ1 CONN.
LED
CN1 CONN
(ANN)
J6 CONN
(SAV1 PHOTO)
JN2 CONN.
JN1 CONN
ST CONN PJ2
(PDA connection, DCD-230 ONLY)
< Detail of LED >
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
H/B
OLS/ SBD
TRIP
SAV
SAFEOK
CLOSE
OPEN
2. Connector
Connector comparison
Connector
Description DCD-221 DCD-212 Remark
of DCD230
No.8,17 is power line
PJ1/PJ3 Power, I/O PJ1/PJ3 PJ1/PJ3
in SAV1
PJ2 DOOR MOTOR PJ2 PJ2
JN1 CLS/OLS SWITCH N/A JN1
JN2 ROTARY ENCODER N/A JN2 SBD1
PJ6 PHOTO SENSER PJ6 N/A SAV1
CN1 SVC TOOL N/A N/A
ST PDA N/A N/A DCD-230 ONLY
Note: PJ1) When Door Type setting is SBD1 and in case cable is connected
to PJ6, then system will work as SAV1 mode. Otherwise if it is not connec
ted to PJ6, then Door system will work as SBD1 mode.
LED comparison
LED DCD-221 DCD-212 DCD-23X
ON : OPEN command signal triggered
OPEN LD2 LD2 OFF : OPEN command signal unable
ON : CLOSE command signal triggered
CLOSE LD3 LD3 OFF : CLOSE command signal unable
ON :OLS / CLS signal is detected
OLS/CLS LD7 LD5 OFF :OLS / CLS signal is not detected
ON : Normal working is possible
SAFE-OK LD4 LD4
OFF : An ERROR has occurred
WDT LD1 LD6 N/A
DC-OK LD6 LD7 LED9 ON: DC-LINK power input
OC N/A LD1 N/A
TRIP N/A N/A ON : An ERROR has occurred
SAV N/A N/A ON : SAV1 DOOR TYPE
SBD N/A N/A ON : SBD1 DOOR TYPE
H/B N/A N/A Blinking: CPU work normally
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
3. Speed pattern
Speed pattern according to each fluent data(Close)
Close Direction
Speed Profile(CL)
Speed(Hz)
CL ACC Time CL DEC Time
CL Run Hz S- CL4
S- CL1 S- Curve
S- CL2
CL End Hz S- CL3
CL Start Hz
CL Creep Hz
Time
CL ACC Time * (1+S/ 50) CL DEC Time * (1+S/ 50)
Position OLS CL Start Pos CL Creep Pos SES Pos CLS
Area Start Zone Running Zone SES Zone

Creep Zone
Zone Description & Adjustment Remark

Start Zone 1. Close start zone [S01]
2. Running zone start from OLS, by [S02] Close Start SBD1: Encoder pulse number
frequency, till [S01] Close start zone. SAV1: Detector number
Running Zone 1. Running zone of close acceleration and fixed speed
2. Running zone start from [S01] Close start zone till
[S05]Close deceleration(Creep) start position.
3. When want to increase or decrease Close start speed,
increase or decrease [S02] Close Start frequency 0.1
unit.
4. When want to decrease Close speed,
decrease [S03] Close running frequency 0.1 unit
Creep Zone 1. Close deceleration running zone [S31] SES position:
2. Running zone from [S04]Close deceleration(Creep) When door Close,
start position till [S31]SES position the position that prevent
3. When running time of Close deceleration zone is door reopen
too long, decrease [S04] Close deceleration
(Creep) start position.
4. When Close, Door close with a big noise,
increase [04] Close deceleration Creep) start position.
5. When from both sides Shoe Door can not fully
Close and start Reopen, increase [S31] SES
position.
SES Zone 1. Zone to keep Door Close When frequency to keep
2. Running from [S31] SES to CLS and keep CLS [S06]Close lower than
status. [F29]Start Hz, then can
3. Frequency to keep [S06]Close must bigger than not keep Close.
[F29]Start Hz .(Initial data:0.5Hz)
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Speed pattern according to each fluent data(Open)
Open Direction
Speed Profile(OP)
Speed(Hz)
OP ACC Time OP DEC Time
OP Run Hz S- OP4
S- OP1 S- Curve
S- OP2
S- OP3
OP Start Hz
OP Creep Hz
OP End Hz
Time
OP ACC Time * (1+S/ 50) OP DEC Time * (1+S/ 50)
Position CLS OP Start Pos OP Creep Pos OLS
Area Start Zone Running Zone Creep Zone
Zone Description & Adjustment Remark

Start Zone 1. Open start zone [S07]
2. Running zone start from CLS, by [S08] Open Start SBD1: Encoder pulse
frequency, [S07]Open start zone number
SAV1: Detector number
Running Zone 1. Running Zone of Close acceleration & fixed speed
2. Running Zone from [S07] Open start zone until
[S10]Open deceleration(Creep) start position.
3. When want to increase or decrease Open start
speed, then increase or decrease [S08] Open Start
frequency.
4. When want to decrease Open speed,
then decrease [S09] Open running frequency 0.1
unit.
Creep Zone 1. Running zone of Open deceleration
2. Running zone from [S10] Open deceleration(Creep)
start position till CLS
3. When running time of Open deceleration zone is
too long, then decrease [S10] Open deceleration
Creep) start position.
4. When Door Open with a big noise,
then increase [S10] Open deceleration(Creep) start
position.
1. Zone to keep Door Open When frequency to keep
2. Frequency to keep [S12] Open must bigger than [S12] Open lower than
[F29]Start Hz .(Initial data:2.0Hz) [F29] Start Hz then can
not keep Open.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
4. Adjustment method
Use method of SVC-TOOL
① Connect SVC-TOOL, affirm elevator kinds and whether have Error on initial menu.
② Affirm variable kinds and then input ‘A22E’ on [S00] Menu.
③ Press ‘0’, ‘8’, ‘BBB’ turn to wanted Address.
④ Affirm present data, while want to change, input ‘AAE’, and then input Data ‘01E’.
⑤ When want to input radix point, input ‘2A5E(2.5)’and ‘A’.
⑥ After changed variables, input ‘FFFF’ return to initial menu.
⑦ Input ‘BBB’, ‘39E’ (S39 MENU)
⑧ Input ‘AAE’, and then input ‘1E’ to save changed data.
< Changeable variables when it is SAV1 Side Open >

Door CMD Moving MENU Description Change Default
data
SAV1 2S A22E 0 / 8 / BBB S36 Door Type 0 1
S03 Close Run Hz 11 20
S04 Close Creep Pos 13 14
S06 Close End Hz 0.5 0.5
S09 Open Run Hz 15 20
S14 Close Dec Time 0.8 0.6
S26 Reopen Dec Time 0.1 0.3
S31 SES POS 14 14
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
FAQ
1) Choose DOOR TYPE (SAV1, SBD1)
When the data on S[36] system Type Menu is “1”
Connect ‘J6’ SAV1 POSITION LINE: Automatically set as SAV1 DOOR TYPE
Not connect ‘J6’ SAV1 POSITION LINE: Automatically set as SBD1 DOOR TYPE
As connect PHOTO LINE to ‘J6’, automatically identify.
When the data on S[36] system Type Menu is “0”
Whether or not connect POSITION LINE to ‘J6’ both identify as SAV1.
2) Differences among PCB DCD-230, DCD-231, DCD-232
DCD-230: DOOR PCB of SAV1,SBD1 have ST PORT
(ST PORT: RS-232 PORT to connect PDA)
DCD-231: DOOR PCB of SAV1,SBD1 not have ST PORT
DCD-232: DOOR PCB of ADS (PROGRAM can not exchange with DCD-
230,231)
3) When DOOR CLOSE, there is noise.
Increase S[04] CLOSE CREEP start position data.
After change, input ‘AAE’ Æ1E’ on S[39] and save changed data.
4) When DOOR CLOSE, run too slowly.
Increase S[03] CLOSE running frequency start position data.
Decrease S[04] CLOSE CREEP start position data.
After change, input ‘AAE’Æ 1E’ on S[39] and save changed data.
5) Delete all saved ERROR information
Input ‘AAE’Æ 2E’ on S[39] then will delete saved ERROR information.
6) Affirm PROGRAM VERSION
Press ‘D’KEY on MAIN menu.
‘POSITION DATA’Æ ‘VERSION’ Æ PROGRAM COMPILE display by date
sequence
7) Check-up DOOR position monitor
When DOOR is moving, read ‘POS’ DATA on MAIN menu.
SAV1: Change from 0(OPENED) to 31(CLOSED).
When DATA does not display, we can think round plate or PCB badness.
SBD1: 0 (OPENED) ~ 1700(CLOSED: Maybe little different by DOOR SIZE ,
or by installation jobsite)
ENCODER input data divided by 10 is CLOSED data.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
ANN specification
DCD-230 ANN function KEY input table

MAIN MODE SUB MODE KEY input
Division
that
MAIN MODE KEY input SUB MODE KEY input disable
mode
A23E Address INC 0 FFFF
Display Display inverter
(A21E) Address DEC 8
status running status
Address input BBB
(A31E) Address DEC 8
Setting Door setting group Address input BBB

Disable
AAE
PROTECTION
Data input xxE
Group display error
Detect
status Address DEC 8
error
Address input BBB
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Pr oj ect Fuct i on set t i ng mode of DCD- 23X annuci at or

When i nst al l at i on or mai nt enance, use annunci at or t o af f i r m DOOR' s r unni ng st at us.
Cont ent
00000 = LCD i ni t i al i zat i on

* * Pr epar at i on * *
1. Connect SVC- TOOL t o DCD- 23X( CN1 connect or ) .
Di spl ay i ni t i al menu
* * Af f i r m Menu * *
1. Di spl ay DOOR ki nds by PCB wor k S B D o c n h o c e [ 0 0 ]
" SBD" : Wor k as SBD1 DOOR MODE V : 1 1 V I : 0 . 0 A
" SAV" : Wor k as SAV1 DOOR MODE F : 0 . 0 H z
" SAVs" : Wor k as SAV1 Si de Open DOOR MODE P O S : 0 K :
2. " ocnh" : Af f i r m DOOR i nput command( Bi g l et t er : have command)

' O' / ' o' : OPEN
' C' / ' c' : CLOSE
' N' / ' n' : NUDGE
' H' / ' h' : HCL
3. " oce" : Af f i r m DOOR PCB out put ( Bi g l et t er : out put Act i ve)
' O' / ' o' : OLS
' C' / ' c' : CLS
' E' / ' e' : DOOR ERROR
4. " V: 11V"
Out put vol t age f r om i nver t er t o MOTOR( Ex. : 11V)
5. " I : 0. 0A"
Out put vol t age f r om i nver t er t o MOTOR( Ex. : 0. 0A)
6. " F: 0. 0Hz"
Fr equency of out put vol t age, cur r ent f r om i nver t er t o MOTOR( Ex. : 0. 0Hz)
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Pr oj ect Funct i on set t i ng mode of DCD- 230 annunci at or

When i nst al l at i on or mai nt enance, use annunci at or af f i r m DOOR' s r unni ng st at us.
Cont ent
A23E = Di spl ay i nver t er r unni ng st at us( Menu D) , A41E = Di spl ay er r or st at us( Menu T)
* * Af f i r m Menu * *
1. I nput A23E on i ni t i al menu

S B D o c n h o c e [ 0 0 ]
V : 1 1 V I : 0 . 0 A
F : 0 . 0 H z
P O S : 0 K : A 2 3 E
2. Di spl ay i nver t er st at us( Menu D[ 01] , whi l e i nput A41E t hen wi l l be menu' T[ 01] ' . )
LCD menu st at us
S B D o c n h o c e [ 0 0 ]
D [ 0 1 ] O u t V D i s p
D A T A : I I V
K : 9
Di spl ay DATA i s deci mal i zat i on.
3. ADDRESS I NCREMENT
I nput an ADDRESS, whi l e want t o READ DATA on pr evi ous ADDRESS t hen i nput ' 0' .
4. ADDRESS DECREMENT
I nput an ADDRESS, whi l e want t o READ DATA on next ADDRESS t hen i nput ' 8' .
5. ADDRESS i nput conver si on
When READ DATA, want t o READ anot her ADDRESS t hen i nput ' BBB' .
LCD menu st at us
S B D o c n h o c e [ 0 0 ]
D [ 0 1 ] O u t V D i s p
D A T A : I I V
K : B B B
6. Whi l e want t o di sabl e MODE t hen i nput FFFF.
7. A41E ( Di spl ay er r or st at us) MENU oper at i on met hod same as A23E.

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
SPEC LIST (Ver S1.3)

Initial data
minim maximu
Group No Description
SB unit Remark
SAV um m
D
Group display inverter work status
(A23E or A21E)
D 01 Output voltage - - 1 - V Display inverter output voltage by 1V
unit
D 02 Output current - - 0.01 - A Display inverter output current by 0.1A
unit
D 03 Output frequency - - 0.1 - Hz Display inverter output frequency by 0.1Hz
unit
D 04 S/W Version - - 0 - - Software version
D 05 S/W Version(Date) - - - - - Version date 05/09/28 (September 28,
2005)
D 06 Input Port status - - - - - 0 0 0 0 0 0
Close Open Nudge HCL CLS OLS
If it is ON will display 1
D 07 Output Port status - - - - - 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CLS OLS MON SES-CUT DERR1 DERR2 EERR3
If it is ON will display 1
D 08 Door running status - - 0 7 - 0:Close,
1:Open acceleration,
2:Open by fixed speed
3:Open deceleration,
4:Open, 5:Close acceleration
6:Close by fixed speed,
7:Close deceleration
D 09 Door position - - 0 100% % 0: Fully Open, 100%: Fully Close
D 10 Main Loop Time - - 0 - - 1means 100sec.

D 11 1msec Loop Time - - 0 - - 1means 100sec.
D 12 Open Time - - 0.1 - sec Open time
D 13 Close Time - - 0.1 - sec Close time
D 14 Frequency - - 0.1 - Hz Frequency command before accelerate
command or decelerate
D 15 DC Link voltage - - 1 - V Display voltage of DC Link
D 16 Encoder data - - - - - Encoder pulse input data x 10000
(ten thousand)
D 17 Encoder data - - - - - Encoder pulse input data
D 18 Photo sensor input - - 0 31 - 0: OPEN, 31: CLOSE
data
D 19 Door running times 0 0 0 10000 - X10000 times
(Ten thousand)
D 20 Door running times 0 0 0 9999 - 0~9999 times
D 21 Door reopen times 0 0 0 10000 - x10000 times
(Ten thousand)
D 22 Door reopen times 0 0 0 9999 - 0~9999 times
D 23 Door running mode 0 0 0 2 - 0: Normal running, 1: OP detecting running
2: Test mode running
D 24 Open Lock detection 0 0 0 65535 - 0~65535 times
times After recognize Open command,
during Open Lock of F40
waiting time, and when doesn’t
reach OLS, then add 1 unit
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Initial data
minim maximu
Group No Description
SB unit Remark
SAV um m
D
Group display inverter work status
(A23E or A21E)
When reach CLS check again
D 25 Close Lock detect 0 0 0 65535 - 0~65535 times

times After recognize Close command, during
Close Lock of F41 waiting time, and
doesn’t reach CLS then add 1 unit
When reach OLS check again
D 26 Result of 0 0 0 1 - 0 : Normal
Rom Check 1 : Error (Only represent on ADS)
27 Result of 0 0 0 1 - 0 : Normal
D Ram Check 1 : Error (Only represent on ADS)
Initial
data mini maximu
group No Description unit Remark
mum m
SBD SAV
Group display error
status (A41E)
T 01 Error Info 0 - - - - - Current Error: Error occur time/Error
Code
T 02 Error Info 1 - - - - - Bypass Error: Error occur time/Error Code
T 03 Error Info 2 - - - - -
T 04 Error Info 3 - - - - -
T 05 Error Info 4 - - - - -
T 06 Error Info 5 - - - - -
T 07 Error Info 6 - - - - -
T 08 Error Info 7 - - - - -
T 09 Error Info 8 - - - - -
T 10 Error Info 9 - - - - -
T 11 Error Info 10 - - - - -
T 12 Error Info 11 - - - - -
T 13 Error Info 12 - - - - -
T 14 Error Info 13 - - - - -
T 15 Error Info 14 - - - - -
T 16 Error Info 15 - - - - -
T 17 Error Info 16 - - - - -
T 18 Error Info 17 - - - - -
T 19 Error Info 18 - - - - -
T 20 Error Info 19 - - - - -
T 21 Error count - - - - After initialization error occurred
total times (Automatically saved)
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Initial
mini maximu
Group No Description data unit Remark
mum m
SBD SAV
Door setting group
(A22E or A31E)
S 01 Close start zone 0 3 0 3000 When Close start, initial frequency apply zone
Ex.1) SBD
100: Before the number of encoder input pulse
reach 100, run by initial frequency
Ex.2) SAV
3: Before photo-sensor signal data reach 3
run by initial frequency
S 02 Close start 5.0 5.0 0.0 Max Hz Output frequency during Close start zone
frequency Freq
S 03 Close running 20.0 20.0 0.0 Max Hz Normal running frequency after Close
frequency Freq start zone
S 04 Close Creep start 600 14 0 30000 - During normal Close running, position of
position start deceleration by Creep speed
Ex.)SBD
500: From the position when Maximum of
encoder input data is 500, it start decelerate
* Max data is detected during the initial door
width measurement
S 05 Close Creep 2.5 2.0 0.0 Max Hz After Close deceleration, running frequency
frequency Freq until CLS position
S 06 Keep Close 5.0 0.5 0.0 Max Hz After CLS detection 1.0sec,frequency to keep
frequency Freq Close running
Ex.) SBD
5.0 : After CLS detection 1.0sec, run by 5.0Hz
S 07 Open start zone 100 3 0 3000 - When Open start, initial frequency apply zone
Ex.1) SBD
100: Before the number of encoder input pulse
reach 100, run by initial frequency
Ex.2) SAV
3: Before photo-sensor signal data reach
(31-3), run by initial frequency
S 08 Open start 5.0 5.0 0.0 Max Hz Output frequency during Open start zone
frequency Freq
S 09 Open running 27.0 20.0 0.0 Max Hz Normal running frequency after Open start zone
frequency Freq
S 10 Open Creep 50 14 0 30000 - During normal Open running，the position that
start position start deceleration by Creep speed
Ex.) SBD
500 : From the position when encoder input
data is 500, start decelerate
S 11 Open Creep 2.0 2.0 0.0 Max Hz After Open deceleration, running frequency
frequency Freq until OSL position
S 12 Frequency to 2.0 2.0 0.0 Max Hz After OLS detection 1.0sec, running frequency
keep Open Freq to keep Open
Ex.) SBD
5.0: After OLS detection 1.0sec, run by 5.0Hz
S 13 Close acceleration 0.5 0.7 0.1 30.0 sec When Close running, accelerate time during
time accelerate zone
S 14 Close deceleration 0.6 0.6 0.1 30.0 sec When Close running, decelerate time during
time decelerate zone
S 15 Open acceleration 0.5 0.7 0.1 30.0 sec When Open running, accelerate time during
time accelerate zone
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Initial
mini maximu
mum m
SBD SAV
Door setting group
(A22E or A31E)
S 16 Open deceleration 0.6 1.0 0.1 30.0 sec When Open running, decelerate time during
time decelerate zone
S 17 S-CL1 35.0 35.0 0.0 50.0 % Jerk of acceleration in initial zone when Close
running acceleration
S 18 S-CL2 30.0 35.0 0.0 50.0 % When Close running acceleration, Jerk at the
end of acceleration
S 19 S-CL3 30.0 40.0 0.0 50.0 % Jerk of deceleration in initial zone when Close
running deceleration
S 20 S-CL4 50.0 50.0 0.0 50.0 % When Close running deceleration, Jerk at the
end of deceleration
S 21 S-OP1 35.0 35.0 0.0 50.0 % Jerk of acceleration in initial zone when Open
running acceleration
S 22 S-OP2 30.0 35.0 0.0 50.0 % When Open running acceleration, Jerk at the
end of acceleration
S 23 S-OP3 30.0 40.0 0.0 50.0 % Jerk of deceleration in initial zone when Open
running deceleration
S 24 S-OP4 50.0 50.0 0.0 50.0 % When Open running deceleration, Jerk at the
end of deceleration
S 25 Reopen 1.0 1.0 0.1 30.0 sec When Reopen, acceleration time
acceleration time
S 26 Reopen 0.3 0.3 0.1 30.0 sec When Reopen, deceleration time
deceleration time
S 27 OLS voltage 1 10.0 10.0 0.0 50.0 % Adjustment data of output voltage under OLS
status
S 28 OLS voltage 2 15.0 25.0 0.0 50.0 % Adjustment data of output voltage under OLS
status and when encoder input turn to Close
side
S 29 CLS voltage 1 10.0 10.0 0.0 50.0 % Adjustment data of output voltage under CLS
status
S 30 CLS voltage 2 15.0 25.0 0.0 50.0 % Adjustment data of output voltage
under CLS status and when encoder input turn
to Open side
S 31 SES position 250 14 0 10000 - Position setting that disable SES
Ex.) SBD
200: From CLS position until encoder pulse
reach 200, start output SES-Cut command
Ex.2) SAV
14: Photo-sensor input from position 14,
start output SES-Cut command
S 32 Supplemental Menu
S 33 OP measure mode 0 Use 0 1 - 0: When Power On, measure OP
x After OP measurement, automatically set as 1
1: Status that finish OP measurement
When Power On, and is not CLS/OLS，begin
low speed run
When Power On, and is CLS/OLS, begin
normal run
S 34 Door running mod 0 0 0 99 - 0: Normal run
e 99: Test run mode
If recognize Close or Open command then
disable test running mode
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Initial
mini maximu
mum m
SBD SAV
Door setting group
(A22E or A31E)
S 35 Automatically run 0 0 0 9999 - 9999: Test running mode
mode If recognize Close or Open command then
automatically set as 0 and disable auto
running mode
S 36 System Type 1 0 0 1 - 0 : SAV
1 : SBD(When Photo Sensor detect, SAV)
2 : ADS
S 37 1 1 0 Xx (ADS door set initial data by Type)
S 38 Door width setting 6.5 Use 0.0 Max Hz Running frequency of detecting SBD door width
frequency X Freq
S 39 Init Mode 0 0 0 2 0: No change.
1 : Parameter saved
2 : Error initialization
3 : Running times & Lock initialization
99 : Parameter initialization
S 40 F Modify 0 0 0 0 F Menu Access Code input
S 41 SAV side OP 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 SAV Side Open setting: 1
(It will be informed later)
Initial
New Mnini Maximu
group Description data mum Unit Remark
No m
SBD SAV
Encoder setting group (A32E)
SAV side OP 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 SAV Side Open setting: 1
F 37
(It will be informed later.)
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Error catalog
Code Error name When it is detected, then act Detect condition
1 Arm Short After Err.Info saved, stop Arm Short
LVLVLV of IPM Gate power
3 OV Trip After Err.Info saved, stop DC Link voltage > 200V
4 After Err.Info saved, stop Keep DC Link voltage < 90V
500msec
5 ETH After Err.Info saved, stop 2A, continuous action is possible
When 50%(3A), and continuously act 60sec
then thermal starter trigger
8 MTH After Err.Info saved, stop Detect when Motor Thermal is triggered
9 Position signal abnormal After Err.Info saved, stop Inverter Run speed feedback = 0
0.7A<output current < 2A output
frequency 1.5Hz
Detect when keep above condition 1sec
21 OC U Err.Info save U phase output current > OC level
22 OC V Err.Info save V phase output current > OC level
23 OC W Err.Info save W phase output current > OC level
24 Output Unbalance Err.Info save Inverter Run
Output frequency > OPW detect frequency
When keep Ia + Ib + Ic > 0.5A
over 100msec
25 Ia Offset Err.Info save Offset of la > 10% of rating
26 Ib Offset Err.Info save Offset of lb > 10% of rating
27 Ic Offset Err.Info save Offset of lc > 10% of rating
28 Over Load Err.Info save When keep output current > 2A
over 5sec
29 Over Speed Err.Info save Neither OLS nor CLS
When keep output frequency > 10Hz
feedback speed > 110% of output frequency
over 1sec
30 Velocity Tracking Error Err.Info save Neither OLS nor CLS
When keep output frequency > OPW detect
frequency
output frequency – feedback speed > 5Hz
output current > 0.7A over 1sec
31 CDS On Error Err.Info save After OPW detect is over, and in normal
work mode
Door position > 95%
Close command
When motor stop and CDS input is Off.
Reset OLS to detect error mode
32 CDS Off Error Err.Info save After OPW detect is over, and in normal
work mode
Door position < 50%
Open command
and CDS input is On.
; reset CLS to detect error mode
33 OLS On Error Err.Info save After OPW detect is over, and in normal
work mode
Door position < 5%
Open command and motor stop
When OLS input is Off.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
CodeError name When it is detected, then act Detect condition

34 OLS Off Error Err.Info save After OPW detect is over, and in normal
work mode
Door position > 50%
Close command and not CLS mode
When OLS input is on
35 OPW CDS Error Err.Info save Close command
Output current > 0.7A
Output frequency > 1.5Hz
When keep motor still over 1sec
When keep above condition and encoder no
feedback over 1sec then handle encoder err
or
36 OPW OLS Error Err.Info save Open command
Output current > 0.7A
Output frequency > 1.5Hz
When keep motor still over 1sec
When keep above condition and encoder no
feedback over 1sec then handle encoder
error
38 Encoder is converse After Err.Info is saved then When input over 100 pulses converse with
stop Open, Close command pulse
3) Check points before power ON (DR cable: Refer to System page 9)
① Verify cable to terminal block of PJ1, PJ2 PCB does not interfere with circle plate.
② Verify earth line of door motor is fixed to PCB box cover.
④ While turning door manually before power ON, verify manually open/close force of
door is 10~30Kgf.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
4) Checks for voltage of connector
① Check the voltage of connector with car upper junction box's DMC switch ON.
② With connector plug not inserted to door PCB, if door switch of safety switch of car
upper junction box becomes ON, voltage output must be as Tab.5.

Tab.5) Pin output voltage when power ON
Connector Pin No. Signal Check point Volt.
4 DMC No.4 ~ 14(GND) DC 48V
6 EARTH No.6(F.G Earth)~14(GND Earth) 0V
8 SS100V No.8~9. Pin No.8~17 See ♠
PJ1 9 TS100V No.9~8. Pin No.9~17 See ♠
12 DERR No.12~14(GND) 0V
13 DOLS No.13~14(GND) 0V
14 GND 0V
17 RS100V No.17~8. Pin No.17~9 See ♠
♠ : For SAV1 Type, AC 100V.
For MAV1, DAV1 Type, AC 110V
※ If difference of pin voltage between No.8↔ 9, 8↔ 17, 9↔ 17 is AC 100V±20V
(low voltage) or more, door PCB might not operate properly.

So, check the connection between control panel and car upper junction box, and verify
if power is supplied to control panel.
1.3 Test driving of door machine

1) Check car door(gate) switch and stopper
① Verify stopper if it has light contacts during opening and closing of door's opening and
closing.
② Car door switch should operate with distance shown in Tab.6.
Check car door switch operation with tester while slowly closing the door with power
OFF.(See Fig.6, Tab.11)
Tab.6) Operating position of car door(gate) switch
Segment Operating position
Gate switch Within 9mm before closed

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
③ After DMC switch OFF and connector is inserted, check door driving with DMC
switch ON.
D. M. C swi t ch ON
YES
NO -. Check DMC S/ W i n DOC PCB

DOOR cl osed
-. Check LDS S/ W
R2LD RY "ON" -. Check CDS S/ W
④ Door operation according to low speed mode switch operation
a) MAINT(low mode) : door always opens(on-car and in-car are the same).
b) In-car: For door driving, close button must be ON.
c) On-car: CLOSE button must be ON.
48V
DOLS output
DOLS출력
0V
48V
Gate
게이트 switch
output
스위치 출력
0V
Full Full
( 전개)
opened ( 전폐)
closed
DOLS
DOLS동작 Gate
게이트 switch
스
movement operation
위치 동작
(Fig.11)스위치
( 그림11) SW OPR & output
동작과 출력
2) Check points for door driving
① Check contact resistance of safety shoe switch contact at shoe line end(10Ω or less).
② Check the adjusted state of position detector.
③ Check the operation of door according to on-car operation switch.
※ SAV1: If RESET switch pressed, LD2 flickers for several seconds.
MAV1: If RESET switch pressed, LD3 flickers for several seconds.

DAV1: If RESET switch pressed, LD2 & LD3 flicker at the same time for several sec.
1.4 Adjusting PATTERN

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
1) Functions and setting method of DIP SW
① As shown in Fig.13, speed pattern of door is made by adding increments △ P1,
△ P2 to initial value P0 of mode 0(or 31 CLOSE starting, mode 0, and OPEN starting,
mode 31). Multiplying value restored in ROM on PCB makes these increments
by weighted value given by DIP switch. Weighted value is determined by the state of
DIP switch, which is conversed into Hex in PCB. The more switches (2 of Fig.10)
become ON, the more values conversed become large(See Tab.7). So, in order to
increase door speed of block wanted to increase, the number of switches to be ON of
DIP switches must be increased. Setting DIP SW by operation block is as Tab.8,9.
Frequency
ÁÖÆÄ¼ö
2 Áö·É
order
P4
ON P4
P3
P3
P2
P2
P1
P1
P0
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 0 1 2 3 4 MODE
( 그림12)Setting
(Fig.12) DI P method
스위치 of설정요령
DIP SW (Fig.13)
( 그림13)Creation
패턴의 of pattern
생성
Tab.7) Conversed value by DIP SW setting
ON Switch Conversed number ON Switch Conversed number
Without 0/0 4 8/8
1 1/1 1,4 9/9
2 2/2 2,4 10/A
1,2 3/3 1,2,4 11/B
3 4/4 3,4 12/C
1,3 5/5 1,3,4 13/D
2,3 6/6 2,3,4 14/E
1,2,3 7/7 1,2,3,4 15/F
Caution: After change of DIP switch, definitely press RESET SW(SW6) for 1 sec or
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
more.(See outside view of DCD-20X PCB). When adjusting switch door speed
changes determined by above conversion table.
Thus, the door speed of SW 4 ON is faster than when SW(SPEC.) 1,2,3 is ON.
Tab.8) DIP switch that adjusts during open
Start
½ÃÀÛ
OP-ACC1(1) OP-ACC2(2) OP-DEC(3) End

³¡
Speed OPEN½Ã
pattern when o pening
¼ÓµµÆÐÅÏ OP- DOLS
OP-OLT(4)
DIP switch Meaning Remarks

1-4 OP-ACC1 Adjusting grip speed
2 5-8 OP-ACC2 Adjusting acceleration As number of convert increase,
& maximum speed speed increases.(See note)
1-4 OP-DEC Adjusting deceleration

3 5-8 OP-OLT Adjusting limit point Door moves more in proportion
to conversed number.
(Note) Grip: Operation of car & hall door are connected by clutch.
Tab.9) DIP switch that adjusts during close
CL-FRC(4)
Start
½ÃÀÛ
CL-ACC(1) CL-DEC(2) End
³¡
SpeedCLOSE½Ã
pattern when¼ÓµµÆÐÅÏ
closing CL-TERM(3)

CL-ACC Acceleration & maximum The more conversed number is
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Tab.10) DIP SW that adjusts during reverse
Reverse operation command
RST RAC
RST Adjusting speed on reverse As number of convert increase,
1 stop speed increases.
RAC Adjusting acceleration (Fast stop and fast acceleration)
after reverse stop
2) Open/Close time(on the basis of factory setting) SAVI
4 2S
1 CO
Time
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
1.5 LED & ERROR
※ This explains LED attached to door PCB and method to treat abnormal operations that
can be generated after door installation.
① Meaning of indication and operation state of each LED Explanation of LED attached to
door PCB(See Tab.11) With the exception of these, when abnormalities occur, door
PCB decides type of abnormality and indicates failure with LED that indicates OPEN
command output(LD2) and CLOSE command output(LD3) in normal conditions
(See Tab.12).
Tab.11) LED operation state indication when abnormal operation occur
LED No. Meaning OPR state when failure

LD1 Abnormality of CPU operation of PCB Flickered on abnormality
LD2 Means OPEN command of door PCB is outputted OPEN command inputted
by OPEN command(R2OP) of control panel from control panel when
lightening
LD3 Means CLOSE command of door PCB is CLOSE command inputted
outputted by CLOSE command(R2CL) of control from control panel when
panel lightening
LD4 Indicates abnormality of safety of PCB Light OFF on abnormal
LD5 Indicates whether error occurred in IPM Light ON on IPM abnormal
LD6 Indicates whether DC voltage is charged Indicates if power is
or not supplied to door PCB
LD7 Indicates DOLS and DCLS on circle plate
Tab.12) LED state during failure
Ind. type Failure type Remarks

LD2 flic. Command failure(OPEN/CLOSE simultaneous command)
LD3 flic. Over speed of door, Position detector disconnected
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
1.6 Check points during door abnormal operation

1) When serious noise during door operation
① If serious noise occurs during operation, first check adjusted state of position.
detecting plate.(Factory setting. in full close, check position switch hole and circle
plate hole are coincide)
② Check the operation of DOLS in full opening and the operation of gate switch when full
closing.
③ When above item ② is O.K, check 1-phase from 3-phases for lost.
④ Check door input voltage(connector PJ1-8, 9, 17).
SAV1: If 108V or less, lost.

MAV1: If 118V or less, lost.
2) When IPM error(LD5 lights ON)
① Firstly decide error or no of control power supplied to IPM. As Fig.16, inspect power
voltage(See Tab.11, Fig.16).
② If there is no power voltage error, switch ON again and perform open/close operation.
If IPM error occurs again, replace PCB.
3) Only OPEN operation or only CLOSE operation is possible
① After inserting connector, verify if OPEN command(PJ1-10) or CLOSE
command(PJ1-1) is inputted from CTRL panel.
※ Verify if pin voltage changes from 48V to near to 0V(See Fig.11).
If OPEN or CLOSE command is properly inputted from CTRL panel, for opening, LD2
and for closing, LD3 must light ON.
② If there are no change of voltage, line from CTRL panel could have failure. If voltage
changes, for opening, LD2 and for closing, LD3 must light ON according to command
of CTRL panel. Otherwise, it means input circuit error in PCB. Replace PCB.
Tab.13) Output voltage of IPM control power
Name of control power Measuring position of Fig.16 Output voltage
PU+ ① DC 15V
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
③ Check connection of power section
a) Input power check

FUSE
R S T 48V Control
제어반 panel
Safety
카위접속상자 switch of
car안전 스위치
upper junction
box
PJ1-8 PJ1-9 PJ1-17 PJ1-4
Inverter
인버터 door도어
circuit기판
board
b) IPM volt. check

4
PC2 +
-
1 2 3
PC1 + PC3 + PC5 +
- - -
PJ2
as s embling
IPM Á¶¸³
(Fig.16) Checking
( 그림16) I PM 의 power
전원 voltage
전압 체크 of IPM
4) When LD1 does not light ON
① Press SW6. Still does not operate, replace PCB.
5) When door does not close fully and reverses

① Check operation of safety shoe. Verify if safety shoe operates before door close
completely. Observe changing position of safety shoe voltage connection inside car
upper junction box, while closing(manually press UP/DOWN in ON CAR state of
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
on-car connection box).

6) Loud joint sound during closing or bounce after full open
① First verify DIP switch is fit to exit width(EW). If not fitted, reset it (See Tab.14).
② When correct specification setting, adjust the deceleration of opening/closing.
Tab.14) Specification setting of DIP switch(SAV1)

DIP switch EW (unit : mm) DIP switch setting
ON
SPEC RST RAC
※ This is standard of
700 ~ 750
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
CENTER OPEN, and
SPEC RST RAC for SIDE OPEN,
ON
800 ~ 850 switch ON switch 4 of
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 SPEC DIP SW, and
SPEC RST RAC
t T b 14
ON
SW1 900 ~ 950
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
SPEC RST RAC

ON
1000 ~ 1050
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
SPEC RST RAC
ON
1100
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Tab.15) Specification setting of DIP switch(MAV1, DAV1)

DIP switch EW (unit : mm) DIP switch setting
SPEC RST RAC
ON
700 ~ 750
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
SPEC RST RAC

ON
800 ~ 850
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
SW1 SPEC RST RAC

ON
900 ~ 950
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
SPEC RST RAC

ON
1000 ~ 1050
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
SPEC RST RAC

ON
1100 ~ 1150
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
SPEC RST RAC

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
※ This is standard of CENTER OPEN, and for SIDE OPEN, switch ON switch 4 of SPEC
DIP SW, and set as Tab.15.
③ After setting change for DIP switch press reset SW(SW6) hard for 1 sec. or more.
7) Cautions for replacing PCB

Even with door power OFF before replacing PCB, there still are remained voltage in
chemical condenser of PCB. Be careful of electric shock & damage to PCB
(Check LD6 light).
2. HAV Door system and Eletric adjustment

2.1 Motor control characteristics
1) Motor control type : Closed loop control of vector control method with current sensor and
rotary encoder which makes possible for rapid response with sensitive and reliable
speed control.
2) Door Position Detection : Using rotary encoder, door position is checked per detections,
nearing switches are used with higher resistance against dirt and humidity.0.5[mm], and
sensitive position control is possible. For absolute CLS/OLS position
3) Door Speed Control : With link mechanism installed within the memory, real time speed
control is possible.
Link
Mechanism
Door speed
Motor speed command
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
※ Door drive modes
Low Speed : Mode to detect absolute positions at initial power input.

After CLS/OLS switches are found once for each, transforms into High Speed Mode.
( After power failure, same procedures are followed : Speed of approx. 50mm/sec )
High Speed : Door operations at normal speed.
※ Note : For following situations, transform to low speed mode.
When there is a large difference between position detected by CLS/OLS switch and
position calculated by R/E. e.g.) When metal is placed at nearing switch during operation.
DLD e.g.) When closing is hindered by force.
Handicapped & Nudging Mode : Closing speed is reduced by half during closingfor
Handicapped Mode and during opening and closing for Nudging Mode.
PCB Network and Connector Description
There are 2 PCBs for HAV Doors. DCD-30M is the main PCB, and DCD-30F contains
EMI filter and motor output filter.
2.2 PCB function

DCD-30M PCB
JN1 Power SPEC S/W ( 6 EA)
Circuit LED
JN4 (4 EA)
Instrument Box
Processor
PJ3
Heat JN2
PJ1 detection
(17P)
Currnt IPM
PJ4 SSR
Sensor
(13P)
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
<PCB Connectors and connection diagram>

Connector Contents
JN1 Power from Instrument box to DCD-30M (24V, 12V)
JN2 Connection between Rotary Encoder and DCD-30M PCB
JN4 Connection between CLS/OLS sensor switch and DCD-30M PCB
PJ1,3 Connection between DCD-30M PCB and Instrument box(Signal wires to CP)
PJ2 Output from DCD-30F PCB to Motor
PJ4 Connection between DCD-30M PCB and DCD-30F PCB
※ Note : JH1 and JN3 are not used. (Factory reference only)
Procedure for control part installation and test run

Turn off DMC CUT switches on Instrument box.
Connect and verify JN1,JN2,JN4,PJ2 connectors.
※ Caution : Remove PJ1, PJ3, in order to cut driving command.
2.3 Trial run of door operator

1) Verify connection (poles) between electro-condensor and TCB.
2) Check OP(Entrance Width) related SPEC on DIP switch.
3) Turn on all DMC CUT switches on Instrument box.
4) Verify LED is normal. (For abnormality, check 26 page)
5) Manually open doors to check proper mechanism installations. If required, adjust
CLS/OLS switch positions, and verify operation through LED on DCD-30M PCB.
6) Turn off all DMC CUT switches on Instrument box.
7) Connect and verify PJ1, PJ3 connectors (Drive Commands and various signals)
between Instrument box and CDC-30M PCB.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
8) Turn on all DMC CUT switches on Instrument box.

9) If required, adjust speed pattern while examing door operation.
※ Caution : IPM of DCD-30M including lower left part, DCD-30F PCB, Heater and electro-
condensor are carrying high voltage.
2.4 DIP Switch setting for door SPEC

There are two major DIP switches on PCB for HAV doors. One is for EW assignment
(1 Type), and another is for speed pattern adjustment (10 Types).
- DIP switch operation procedures

- Turn off power switch for door in Instrument box (DMC CUT1, DMC CUT2, DMC CUT3).
- Depending on specifications configure DIP switches.
- Turn on power switches for door.
※ Note : With power on, DIP switch configuration does not effect SPEC.
(Make sure to turn power off and then on)
※ DIP Switch setting method
In case of 2 dip switches(type1)

Setting Variables Setting Variables
0 2
1 3
In case of 4 dip switches(type 2)

Setting Variables Setting Variables
0 1
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11
12
※ Dip switch setting for entrance width (S1 switch pin1~4)
SPEC name Varibale value Meaning

0 EW 800 ± 25mm
1 EW 850 ± 25mm
2 EW 900 ± 25mm
3 EW 950 ± 25mm
4 EW 1000 ± 25mm
5 EW 1050 ± 25mm
6 EW 1100 ± 25mm
SPEC 7 EW 1150 ± 25mm
8 EW 1200 ± 25mm
9 EW 1250 ± 25mm
10 EW 1300 ± 25mm
11 EW 1350 ± 25mm
12 EW 1400 ± 25mm
13 Non Use
14 Non Use
15 Non Use
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
※ Note : Above configurations will be set from the factory, but it must be verified before
power is supplied.
※ Caution : With improper setting, door operation speed may become too fast or slow.
※ Dip switch adjustment for speed pattern
HAV door uses actual speed and position detected by ROTARY ENCODER to control speed
(CLOSED LOOP SPEED CONTROL), and speed pattern is optimally set at the factory. Thus,
speed pattern adjustment is almost not required. Only for required cases, speed pattern
should be adjusted according to below.
Speed Pattern Adjustment DIP Switch Operation
OP-ACC2 OP-DEC
RAC
OP-OLT
OPEN
OP-ACC1
CL-TERM CLOSE
RST
CL-ACC
CL-DEC
CL-SPD
Speed patern and concept.
2.5 Function of dip switches.

Dip SW SPEC Contents Type Pin As it increases
RST Stop Deceleration (SLIP) 1 5,6 Faster deceleration
S1
RAC REOPEN Acceleration 1 7,8 Faster acceleration
OP-ACC1 Advance Acceleration 2 1~4 Speeds Up
S2
OP-ACC2 Opening Acceleration 2 5~8 Faster acceleration
OP-DEC Opening Acceleration 2 1~4 Faster deceleration
S3 OP-OLT Opening Deceleration 2 5~8 Closer to opening
Completion
CL-ACC Closing Deceleration 2 1~4 Faster acceleration
S4
CL-DEC Closing Deceleration 2 5~8 Faster deceleration
CL-TERM Closing Deceleration 2 1~4 Closer to closing
S5
Completion
CL-FRC Unused 5~7
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Right Open Side open (Right open type) 8
Dip SW SPEC Contents Type Pin As it increases

S6 SPEC2 UP, Door SPEC, CO/SO 2 1~4 Refer to below
CL-SPD Closing Peak speed 2 5~8 Speed up
※ SPEC2 detail of S6
Dip Switch SPEC name Detail Variable Description

0 Standard
Door M/C base 1 +200mm up
position 2 +300mm up
3 +400mm up
S6 SPEC2
0 Ordinary door
Door Spec
1 Fire door
0 Center open
CO/SO
1 Side open
♣ Standard : 800mm from bottom of M/C base to top of entrance height.
2.6 Each SPEC adjustment method

SPEC Name Adjustment method
RST If noise occurs when it stops before reopen, lower the values Reopen
RAC Set Maximum if no other problems
OP-ACC1 Set Maximum if no other problems. If noise occurs, lower the values.
OP-ACC2 Set Maximum if no other problems.
OP-DEC Set Maximum if no other problems.
OP-OLT Raise the values if speed operates like a 2-speed mode. Lower the values if
interference to collide or vibration occurs.
CL-ACC Set Maximum if no other problems.
CL-DEC Set Maximum if no other problems.
CL-TERM Raise the values as long as interference with the landing door to collide like
effect is not apparent.
CL-SPD Do not change factory setting value (complying with BS Code). Raise value to
increase speed when user requests it.
2.7 LED function

LED LED Name Meaning
No.
LD1 ALM Turns on when following door errors occur:
IPM Error (Over-current, Over-heated)
CLS/OLS Error
Motor over-heated
LD2 CL/OL Acting CLS, OLS switches if detected by the sensor
LD3 CPU Flickers during normal processor operation
Flickers rapidly when Open/Close command occurs
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
LD4 UT Turns on due to Low Temp.( below 0 ℃ ) Error
※ Corrective method for LED error
1) When power input, LD1 turned on

Turn on and off the power.(Use DMC CUT switch on the Instrument box)
Check PJ2 connection
If problem persists, IPM in PCB may be in fault
2) LD1 turns on during low speed operation

Verify wiring and operation of CLS/OLS switch.
3) If LD3 does not flicker rapidly with Open/Close command.

Check PJ1 connection.
4) LD4 turned on.
If actual surrounding temperature is low(below 0℃ ), close control panel cover,and check
heater operation with power on. (By touching control box exterior.)
After 10 ~ 20 minutes, returns to normal operation as interior temperature increases.
If actual surrounding temperature is not low and LD4 remains on, temperature sensor in PCB
is in fault.
★ Note1 : After installation with low machine room temperature, door error may occur at
initial power input, but, after 10-20 minutes, error will be cleaned.
★ Note2: If door speed is not normal even though dip-switch adjustment, Check the CLS
and OLS signal or in cage of rear door, replace the rotary encoder phase.
★ Note3 : If photo sensor does not work, check that the used contact is normally close or
open. Most of case, photosensor contact is normal close from factory. So it needs to modify
its contact to normal open in jobsite.
★ Note4 : Jumper the safety shoe(Left,Right) with P48V in DCD-30M. And connect the
safety shoe signal line to communication board on car top. And it needs to set I/O for this
signal. If there line was not jumpered, car door will not close.
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
2.8 Car door electrical circuit diagram

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
Trouble Shooting
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
FOD Page 0/103
Field Industrial Engineering Trouble Shooting Date July. 2006
Index
1. TCD management of Si210 Control Panel………………...………..…………...1
TCD (Trouble Code) Design standards ………………………..……………...1

Word definition…………………………………………………….……………...1
Classification of TCD Number...…………………………………..…………….1
Bit definition of Error Operation Flag…………………………………………...2
Trouble-shooting according to the grade ……………………….…………….2
2. TCD Table for Si210 Control Panel ………….……………………….…........3
3. Detail description of TCD (Trouble Code) ...……………………...................8

Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
FOD Page 1/103
1. TCD Management of SI210 Control Panel
1.1. TCD (Trouble Code) Design standards

1) TCD (Trouble Code), which are mentioned on this document, have been made for
SI210 control panel.
2) The number of TCD is 1~239 and they are classified by function.
1.2. Word definition

1) Operation CPU: It designates Main CPU (i186/i960)
2) Speed CPU: It designates INV DSP CPU
3) Error Operation Flag: It decides a elevator operation condition according to this number
that is Control Flag.
1.3. Classification of TCD Number
Number
Functional Classification Operation condition in case of Trouble
Classification
1 ~ 15 System Error
16 ~ 29 Inverter Interface Error
30 ~ 69 Inverter / Converter Error It is defined by Error Operation Flag of
70 ~ 149 Device Error each TCD
150 ~ 199 Control Error
200 ~ 239 Network Error
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
FOD Page 2/103
1.4. Bit definition of Error Operation Flag
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Flag definition Description

● R5SC Cut Operation unable
Inspection operation unable or operation
Qualified
● unable in case Car stops within door
R5SC Cut
zone.
● C1ST Cut Starting unable
Inspection operation unable or operation
Qualified
● unable in case Car stops within door
C1ST Cut
zone.
● FAST Run Cut High speed operation unable
Operation unable in case of emergency
return switch off
● REST Mode Returning escape floor and operation
unable in case of emergency return
switch on
● Hall Call Cut Hall call service unable
● Hold Type Holding trouble condition
1.5. Trouble-shooting according to the grade
Grade Operation flag Description

R1 91 R5SC Off right after trouble
R2 94 C1ST Off right after trouble
R3 90 Slow speed able. Call service unable. immediate stop in case of
the trouble during high-speed operation
R4 82 Stop at the nearest floor in case of the trouble during high-speed
operation. R5SC off at the door zone
R5 88 Stop at the nearest floor in case of the trouble during high-speed
operation. C1ST off at the door zone
R6 C0 Call service unable
R7 80 Hall call service unable
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
FOD Page 3/103
2. TCD Table for Si210 Control Panel
Detection
TCD Definition Description Hold Grade
OPER. SPD.
1
2
3
4
Operation CPU S/W WDT trouble
5 ERR_SW_WDT ● R1
occurred
6 ERR_MEM_ALLOC Memory allocation failed ● R1
7 ERR_TASK_CREATE Task making failed ● R1
8 ERR_SEM_CREATE Semaphore making failed ● R1
9 ERR_WDT_CREATE Operation CPU WDT Timer making failed ● R1
10 ERR_INT Non definitional vector Interrupt occurred ● XX
11
12
13
14
15
16 ERR_INV Speed CPU H/W WDT trouble occurred ● R1
17 ERR_INV_RETRY Speed CPU Retry failure ● ● R1
18
19
20
21 ERR_INV_DPRAM Speed CPU DPRAM WRITE trouble ● ● R1
22
23
24
25
26~
29
30 ERR_INV_OC INV over current (H/W detection) ● ● R1
31 ERR_DC_OV DC Link over voltage ● ● R1
32 ERR_INV_U_SHORT INV phase U IGBT trouble ● ● R1
33 ERR_INV_V_SHORT INV phase V IGBT trouble ● ● R1
34 ERR_INV_W_SHORT INV phase W IGBT trouble ● ● R1
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
FOD Page 4/103
Detection
OPER. SPD.
35 ERR_INV_TR Regenerative IGBT trouble ● ● R1
36 ERR_INV_H_CT INV Hall CT trouble ● ● R1
ERR_INV_U_STACK_TH
37 INV over heat ● R4
ERMAL
38
39
40
41 ERR_INV_C_CNTL INV current control trouble ● R1
42
43
44
45
46
47
48 ERR_INV_DC_LINK_UV DC link under voltage ● R2
49
50
51
ERR_INV_REVERSE_RU
52 INV reverse rotation detection ● R1
N
53 ERR_INV_CHARGE INV charging trouble ● C R1
54 ERR_INV_OVER_LOAD INV over load detection ● R1
55 ERR_INV_LOW_SPEED INV under speed detection ● R2
56 ERR_INV_HIGH_SPEED INV over speed detection ● R3
57 ERR_INV_BRAKE_OC BRAKE over current trouble ● ● R2
58 ER_INV_BRAKE_CNTL BRAKE control trouble ● R2
59 ERR_INV_ANTISTALL INV. No operable for 24 sec. ● R2
60 ERR_INV_SPEC INV Spec Data trouble ● ● R1
61 ERR_INV_SPEC_COM INV Spec write trouble ● R1
62 ERR_INV_V48 INV momentary power failure detection ● R1
63
64
65
66
67
68
69 ERR_V100 Missed phase detection (100V) ● R3
70 ERR_POWER 48V power trouble (missing phase) ● R1
71 ERR_V48 Voltage drop detection (85% below) ● R4
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
FOD Page 5/103
Detection
OPER. SPD.
73
74 ERR_SPEC_OVER Operation SPEC DATA trouble ● RO
75
76 ERR_EEPROM_WRITE EEPROM Write trouble ● R3
77 ERR_EEPROM_READ EEPROM Read trouble ● ● R1
ERR_EEPROM_FHT_SU EEPROM floor height measuring Table
78 ● R3
M Sum trouble
NVRAM floor height measuring Table
79 ERR_NVRAM_FHT_SUM ● R3
Sum trouble
80
81
82
83
84 ERR_R5SC_ON R5SC RELAY ON trouble ● ● R1
85 ERR_R5SC_OFF R5SC RELAY OFF trouble ● R1
86 ERR_C1BR_ON C1BR CTT. ON error ● ● R1
87 ERR_C1BR_OFF C1BR CTT. OFF trouble ● ● R1
88 ERR_C1ST_ON C1ST CTT. ON trouble ● ● R1
89 ERR_C1ST_OFF C1ST CTT. OFF trouble ● ● R1
90 ERR_SUPPRESS_ON SUPPRESS ON trouble ● ● R1
91 ERR_SUPPRESS_OFF SUPPRESS OFF trouble ● ● R1
92 ERR_ENCO R.E disconnected ● ● R1
93 ERR_ENCO_READ R.E pulse counter read trouble ● ● R1
94 ERR_ENCO_COUNTER R.E pulse counter trouble ● ● R1
ERR_MECHANICAL_
95 R5SX OFF trouble (Safety line) ● R1
SAFETY
96 ERR_ABNORMAL_MODE Operation mode input trouble ● R4
97 ERR_CDS, CDS trouble ● R2
98 ERR_LDS LDS trouble ● R2
99 ERR_DUP_IN Dual input signal trouble ● ● R1
100 ERR_SDS1D_ON SD1D ON trouble ● R3
101 ERR_SDS2D_ON SD2D ON trouble ● R3
102
103
104
105
106
107 ERR_SDS1U_ON SD1U ON trouble ● R3
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
FOD Page 6/103
Detection
OPER. SPD.
108 ERR_SDS2U_ON SD2U ON trouble ● R3
109
110
111
112
113
114 ERR_POSI POSI ON trouble (LDC) ● ● R2
115
116 ERR_LDU POSI ON trouble (LDU) ● XX
117 ERR_LDD POSI ON trouble (LDD) ● XX
118
119 ERR_SDS SLOW DOWN S/W trouble ● R6
120
121
122
123
124
125 ERR_BRAKE_OFF BRAKE open trouble ● ● R3
126 ERR_MAIN_INV_SPEED Speed different between operation / speed ● ● R3
127
128
129
130 ERR_WEIGHT_SENSOR Load detector input trouble ● R3
131
132 ERR_OPEN_LOCK Door Open Lock detection ● XX
133 ERR_OPEN_LOCK_3 OPEN_LOCK repeated trouble ● R2
134 ERR_CLOSE_LOCK Door Close Lock detection ● XX
ERR_CLOSE_LOCK_
135 Door Close Lock repeated trouble ● R3
REPEAT
136 ERR_ALP ALP trouble ● ● R1
137
138
139 ERR_NUDGING Nudging trouble ● R7
Discharging voltage of Backup Battery
140 ERR_NVRAM_BATTERY ● XX
under reference
141 ERR_RTC Clock Chip trouble ● XX
142
143
144
145 ERR_INV_DM INV. Door CPU WDT trouble ● R6
146 ERR_COOLER_FLAOT_S Air-conditioner Float S/W trouble ● XX
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
FOD Page 7/103
Detection
OPER. SPD.
W
147 ERR_OBS OBS detection ● ● R1
148
149
150 ERR_SDS1D_OS SD1D Over Speed detection ● R3
151 ERR_SDS2D_OS SD2D Over Speed detection ● R3
152
153
154
155
156
157 ERR_SDS1U_OS SD1U Over Speed detection ● R3
158 ERR_SDS2U_OS SD2U Over Speed detection ● R3
159
160
161
162
163
164 ERR_E_STOP Emergency stop detection ● R3
165
166
167
ERR_SPEED_DEVIATIO
168 Speed difference (real speed detection) ● ● R3
N
169
170 ERR_DIRECTION Operation direction trouble ● ● R1
171 ERR_DIGI_FLOOR Synchronous position trouble ● R3
172
173
174
175
176
177 ERR_REPEAT Emergency stop occurred frequently ● ● R4
178 ERR_S_DRIVE_REPEAT Safety drive occurred frequently ● ● R5
179
180
181
182 ERR_OVER_DUTY Operation duty trouble ● XX
183
SDS forced deceleration occurred
184 ERR_SDS_FORCE_DEC ● ● R3
frequently
185
186
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
FOD Page 8/103
Detection
OPER. SPD.
187
188 ERR_OLS OLS trouble ● R3
189
190 ERR_DECEL_ZONE POSI trouble for 2 deceleration ● XX
191 ERR_DOOR_COMMAND Open/Close simultaneous command ● XX
192 ERR_DOOR_POSI Door position trouble ● R6
193 ERR_DOOR_VOLTAGE Door voltage trouble ● R6
ERR_DOOR_MOTOR_TH
194 Door motor over heat ● R6
ERMAL
195 ERR_DOOR_OC Door current trouble ● R6
196 ERR_PHOTO_SHOE Photo-Shoe input error ● XX
197
198
ERR_PCB_PROTECTION
199 PCB protection failed ● XX
_FAIL
200 ERR_CNET_SYNC CNET LON communication trouble ● R4
201
202 ERR_CNET_COM Car communication trouble ● R4
203 ERR_CNET_COM Car communication trouble ● R4
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211 ERR_OTHER_MAIN_1 Other elevator trouble ● XX
212
213
214
215
216
217 ERR_HALL_BT_JAM Hall button jam detection ● XX
218
219
220
221
222
223 ERR_1_HALL Hall nod trouble ( More than 1) ● XX
224 ERR_ALL_HALL Hall nod trouble (All) ● XX
225
Rev. No. 0
DL
EL) 06-008
FOD Page 9/103
Detection
OPER. SPD.
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233 ER_ESMI ESMI communication trouble ● XX
~
236
237 ERR_CRT CRT communication trouble ● XX
238
239 ERR_RUSSIA_OPZX Landing Door Open (Russia only) ● ● R1
3. Detail description of TCD(Trouble Code)
- See next pages

Revision: 0
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting Page: 9/103
○ Operation CPU
TCD 5 Detection Application Si210
Operation CPU S/W WDT trouble occurred ○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] [Condition]
Checks errors.
1. SYS1 LED(green) on DOC-1XX lights up or off
(Normal if it flickers)
2. When a Watchdog error occurs
- it is transferred to 74HC4538 chip and recognized by speed
[Explanation]
control section
Tasks are monitored within the software(S/W) regularly. - running control program registers a S/W watchdog error in the
If a task has errors three successive times, S/W Watchdog error occurs. table and reset running control program automatically.
DI-1 elevator operation control program is composed of 12 tasks. These tasks are
inspected for their any possible errors as shown below.(Initial Error_Counter value
is set to 0(Zero)).
[Countermeasures]
- This error has no relation to the outside connection.
- Check the voltage(5V) on output of SMPS,
If no, replace SMPS.
Task에 error in
Error occurs 발생 ?
task - If the same error continues to happen, replace DOC-1XX.
Yes
No
Error_Counter를
Increase 1
1 증가시킨다.
Error_Counter
Error_Counter == 3
Yes
Software watchdog error

발생
generated
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
Memory allocation failed ○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] An error occurs while assigning system memory. [Countermeasures]

[Explanation] - If the same error continues to happen, replace DOC-1XX.
An error occurs while assigning the memory which will be used in
creating of each task within S/W and registering of interrupt or queue.
시스템에서
Create memory사용할pool
메모리for 풀(pool)
system 생성
메모리 풀(pool)
Memory pool생성
실패
creating ?
failed ?
No
Yes
메모리 풀(pool)에서
Memory assigning타스크(Task)나
for task &
인터럽트 핸들러(Interrupt
interrupt handler &handler),
큐(Queue)queue
등에서 in사용할
pool. 메모리 할당
No
Memory assigning
메모리 할당 실패 ?
failed ?
프로그램
Perform다음
Next단계 Yes
stage수행
of P/G
Memory assigning
메모리 할당 Error 발생
error generated?
(Note) P/G: Program

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
Task creation failed ○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] An error occurs while creating each task. [Countermeasures]

[Explanation] An error occurs while creating each task in S/W - If the same error continues to happen, replace DOC-1XX.
시스템에서
Create memory사용할pool
메모리for 풀(pool)
system 생성
메모리 풀(pool)에서 타스크(Task)나

Assign memory
인터럽트 for task &handler)에서
핸들러(Interrupt interrupt
handler
사용할 in pool
메모리 할당
Task
타스크 creating
생성 혹은 or
No interrupt
인터럽트registering
등록 실패 ?
failed?
Yes
프로그램
Perform다음next단계
stage수행
of P/G
Task creating error
타스크 생성 Error 발생
generated
(Note) P/G: Program

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
Semaphore creation failed ○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] An error occurs when each semaphore is created. [Countermeasures]

An error occurs while creating a semaphore that synchronizes the tasks
in S/W.
As several tasks are carried out concurrently, sometimes the same

tasks or processes are need to access. At this tine, use a semaphore in
order not to access the same data at a time.
엘리베이터 운전 제어
Initialize elevator 프로그램
operation
시스템
control P/G초기화
system
Semaphore
Create 생성
semaphore
Semaphore creating
No Semaphore 생성 실패 ?
failed?
Yes
Perform next stage of
프로그램 다음 단계 수행
P/G
Semaphore생성
Semaphore creating
Error
error
(Note) P/G: Program

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 9 Operation CPU WDT Timer creation failed Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] An error occurs while creating S/W Watchdog Timer. [Countermeasures]

An error occurs when a Watchdog which supervises errors of each task
in S/W fails to be created.
Watchdog Timer not only carries out tasks periodically just as several
other tasks do, but also supervises all other tasks. So its period is the
shortest(30m sec) and it has top priority.
시스템에서
Create memory사용할
pool
메모리 풀(pool) 생성
for system
Create watchdog
Watchdog Timer 생성
timer
Watchdog Timer
Watchdog timer
Yes
생성 실패
creating ?
failed?
Watchdog
Watchdog Timer 생성
timer No
creatingError
error발생
generated
Assign
메모리 memory 타스크(Task)나
풀(pool)에서 for task &
인터럽트 핸들러(Interrupt
interrupt handlerhandler)에서
in
사용할 메모리
memory pool할당
Task
타스크 creating
생성 혹은 or
No interrupt
인터럽트 등록 실패 ?
registering
Yes
프로그램
Perform다음 단계
next
수행
stage of P/G
Task creating
타스크 생성 Error 발생
error generated
(Note) P/G: Program

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 10 Non definitional vector interrupt occurred Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] An error occurs while creating interrupt. [Countermeasures]

[Explanation] - Check if ground condition is correct.
Record vector value about the interrupt that is created in creating
non definitional vector interrupt.
This error has no effect on the operation of elevator.
[Reference]
The number of interrupt vector can be checked by ‘A42E’.
(Trace information)
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 16 Speed CPU H/W WDT trouble occurred Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] DSP H/W Watchdog detection [Countermeasures]

- Check if the communication connector(64P) between
DOC-1XX and DPC-11X is connected well, If connector is
abnormal, replace.
[Explanation] If DSP(INV CPU) H/W Watchdog is occurred, operation CPU resets - Check the voltage(5V) on output of SMPS,
DSP automatically. If no, replace SMPS.
- Twist the cables of the communication connector(64P)
- Check if ground condition is correct.
- Replace DPC-11X.
[Detection] In case that H/W Watchdog error of DSP maintain over 3 cycle of
detection(Min. 60~ Max. 90ms), detect the trouble and output
the signal of DSP reset.
This trouble can not be detective in case of over 48 volts.
(Voltage drop/ failure)
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 17 Speed CPU Retry failure Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] DSP H/W Watchdog has been detective and DSP can not be operable [Countermeasures]
even if operation CPU perform retry of DSP more than 4 times.
abnormal, replace.
[Explanation] If retry signal of operation CPU keeps up more than 4 times, - Check the voltage(5V) on output of SMPS,
the error is detected and make the elevator being inoperable. If no, replace SMPS.
- Twist the cables of the communication connector(64P)
- Replace DPC-11X.
[Reference] Required retry time for 4 times: 8.6 seconds

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 21 Speed CPU DPRAM WRITE trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When communicating DPRAM between operation side & speed side, [Countermeasures]
a error detected if transmitted data is different with feed back data for
4 cycles(120ms) in series.
abnormal, replace.
[Explanation] 1. When transmitting data by DPRAM, feed back data - Check the voltage(5V) on output of SMPS,
Transmitted data Feed back data - Twist the cables of the communication connector(64P)
Coil[RS_SUPPRESS_ON]: 0x91C3 Coil[SV_INV_SUPPRESS_FB]: 0x9208 - Replace DOC-1XX
- Replace DPC-11X.
SWD_O[VO_C1ST]: 0x8081 Coil[SV_INV_C1ST_FB]: 0x920A
SWD_O[VO_C1BR]: 0x8080 Coil[SV_INV_C1BR_FB]: 0x9209
SWD_O[VO_R5SC]: 0x8082 Coil[SV_INV_R5SC_FB]: 0x920B
2. If above data is different for 4 cycles(120ms) in series a error detected.

Revision: 0
Detection ○ Operation CPU Application

TCD 30 Inverter Over current ○ Speed CPU Si210
[Meaning] When current in the electric motor exceeds limit value(If over current [Countermeasures]
occurs,stop switching in order to prevent damages on motor and 1. Check VB connector on DPC-1XX PCB.
inverter devices).
2. Verify that HCT cable is properly connected to U and V of HCT.
3. Check a proper connection HCT direction (Normal if HCT ‘arrow’
[Explanation] points
downwards).
INV U-V-W stack
4. Verify that voltage of HCT connectors are +15V and -15V.
5. Check J5H jumper on DPC-1XX and number of HCT turns, on the
HCT basis of the below table.
U
V +15V
W HCT J5H
J5Hjumper
SHORT pin Motor max. Capa.
MOTORÃÖ´ë¿ë·®
R10 R9 R11 R12 IGBT, IPM
IGBT ¿ë·® HCT turns
J5H TURN¼ö position
PIN »ðÀÔÀ§Ä¡ (check(¸íÆÇÈ®ÀÎ)
the nameplate)
1 2
3 4 R78 75A 2 1-2 4.5kW ~ 7.5kW
+5V
100A 2 3-4 9.5kW ~ 11kW
R18
10 OCT
VB - 03
- 13 150A 1 1-2 13kW ~ 15kW
11 + U6HD U4GA
VB - 07
R44 C88 200A 1 3-4 18.5kW ~ 22kW
DPC-1XX 6. Check if ground conditions of building & control panel are good.
7. Check followings:
- Resistance R9, 10, 11, 12 and 78 (marked on the left diagram) are properly
To DPC-1XX VB connector
fitted.(R9: 10K, R10: 1.5K, R11: 5K, R12: 12K, R78: 1M)
HCT - When a short pin is inserted into 1-2 on J5H, the potential of pin 10 on U6H
HCT 커넥터 1 2 3 4 5 6
connector
+15V -15V IAS GND IBS GND is 6.26 ±0.31V
1 6
HCT - When a short pin is inserted into 3-4 on J5H, the potential of pin 10 on U6H
A B
is 8.89 ±0.44V.
HCT
HCT의 방향이
‘arrow’ 아래로
should 8. Replace HCT.
U-phase point 향해야 정상임
downwards 9. Replace DPC-1XX PCB.
U상 V상
V-phase
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 31 DC Link Over voltage Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] [Countermeasures]
When DC link voltage is 770V or more is detected (Stop switching to prevent condenser, IPM
and IGBT from damages). 1. Turn the power OFF and examine the followings:
- VG connector on DPC-1XX PCB
- GA connector on DPP-1XX PCB
[Diagram]
- GW, GP and GX connectors on DPP-1XX PCB
과전압
Over voltage 검출회로
detection circuit 2. Check if the voltage of DC link is 770V±60V.
3. Check if reference voltage is within 7.9 ±0.5V.
VDC(+)
GW - 03 DPP-1XX Check point (DPC-111: R31, DPC-131: TE40, TE100)
15V (GDC) 정상시 LOW(0V)
Normal if Low(0V)
이상시 HIGH(15V)
VDC(-)
D23
Abnormal if High(15V) 4. If item 2, 3 are OK, check the connection between INV STACK
GP - 09 OV
R101 R36
R31
& DPP-1XX, replace DPP-1XX.
15V
R102 R37 C10D29 PC7 D30
VG - 13
5. Check if regenerative IGBT operates normally. (Refer to TCD35:
-9V R47
R103 R38
R30 DPC-1XX In case of regenerative IGBT trouble, this error may be occurred.
4
R39
- 2 R21 C5 (INV)
R104
5
+
VG - 14 6. Check if input power of control panel is correct.
LED1 R98 C4 IC1
7. If TCD 31 is detected while the car is not running, check followings:
-9V - VG connector on DPC-1XX.
- VA, GA connector on DPP-1XX. (Check if #13,14 pin of VA, GA is
connected - short check is normal)
8. After power off, check regenerative resistors is OK.
VDC(+) VDC(-) (Before this job, the voltage of DC link is 0V)
Motor PCB
connector connector
11kW below DPP-13X GP-01 GP-02 *Caution : To prevent the hazard of electric shock on DC link end,
even though the power is OFF, make sure that LED1(CHG)
13~15kW DPP-12X GP-01 GP-03
on DPP-10X PCB lights OFF.
18~22kW DPP-101 GW-03 GP-09

Revision: 0

TCD 32 Inverter phase U IGBT trouble ○ Speed CPU Si210
[Countermeasures]
[Meaning] Motor capacity 11kW below : In case that one of upper IGBT & one of
1. Turn the power off and check if the condition of VG connector of DPC-
lower IGBT in IPM are switching on together or regenerative IGBT in IPM
is short failure, the trouble occurs. 1XX PCB and GA & VA connector of DPP-1XX PCB are OK.
Motor capacity 13kW~15kW: In case that one of upper IGBT & one of 2. In case of DPP-111, check if the condition of GXU, GXL, GU connector
lower IGBT in IPM are switching on together, the trouble occurs. and GW-03 pin are OK, and the connection between GU, GW & IGBT
Motor capacity 18kW~22kW: In case that +IGBT & -IGBT of U phase on INV. Stack.
are switching on together, the trouble occurs. 3. In case of DPP-131, check if the condition of GU, GV, GW & GX pin
And incase that the connection of INV STACK is incorrect or drive
connector are OK, and the connection between IPM and INV. Stack.
power of IGBT is incorrect or inverter output(U,V,W) are shortened
together. 4. After removing cables from DPP-1XX and IPM, check output of gate
SMPS
[Explanation] (GU-01,02: 15V, GV-01,02: 15V, GW-01,02: 15V, GX-01,02: 15V,
Motor 11kW below: Motor 13kW~15kW:
R.IGBT inside IPM R.IGBT outside IPM
Motor 18kW~22kW: GX-03,02: -9V)
IGBT
5. Check if the condition of HCT cable and HCT is OK.
6. Check the direction of HCT
CONVERTER
DIODE IPM
Reactor is applied
in case of 13kW
- Normal if HCT ‘arrow’ points to the bottom of CP
and above
- Check wiring directions and refer to INV. over current.
3Φ 380V 7. Check for proper connections of the followings:
HCT - VB connector to DPC-100 PCB
U
V
W
IM - U-phase HCT signal wire to VB-03
- V-phase HCT signal wire to VB-07.
8. Turn the power ON and check the followings:
- Power supply to TP3 and TP6 on DPP-1XX PCB
- Voltage of GATE terminal
9. If TDC 32 is detected while the car is not running, check followings:
- VG connector on DPC-1XX.
GP - 01
GP - 03
GU - 01
1Φ 110V GU - 02
VB - 07
VB - 03
GV - 01 - VA connector on DPP-1XX.
GATE GV - 02
SMPS
GW - 01
GW - 02 DPP-1XX DPC-1XX 10. If the voltage of pin 6 of RA1(coordinates: 81) on DPC-1XX is +15V,
GX - 01 (GDC) VA VG (INV) examine the connection between pin 21 on DPC-1XX VG connector,
GX - 02
GX - 03
and pin 21 on DPP-1XX VA connector.
It is normal if they are connected.
In case of IGBT,
Use GATE TRANS 11. Examine and replace IGBT, IPM.
12. Replace DPP-1XX PCB.
13. Replace DPC-1XX PCB.
Revision: 0

TCD 33 Inverter phase V IGBT trouble ○ Speed CPU Si210
[Countermeasures]
[Meaning] Motor capacity 13kW~15kW: In case that one of upper IGBT & one of
lower IGBT in IPM are switching on together, the trouble occurs.
Motor capacity 18kW~22kW: In case that +IGBT & -IGBT of V phase 1XX PCB and GA & VA connector of DPP-1XX PCB are OK.
are switching on together, the trouble occurs. 2. In case of DPP-111, check if the condition of GXV, GXL, GV connector
And incase that the connection of INV STACK is incorrect or drive and GW-03 pin are OK, and the connection between GV, GW & IGBT
power of IGBT is incorrect or inverter output(U,V,W) are shortened on INV. Stack.
together. 3. In case of DPP-131, check if the condition of GU, GV, GW & GX pin
4. After removing cables from DPP-1XX and IPM, check output of gate
[Explanation]
SMPS
(GU-01,02: 15V, GV-01,02: 15V, GW-01,02: 15V, GX-01,02: 15V,
DIODE GX-03,02: -9V)
CONVERTER Reactor 리액터는
applied for
V-phase IGBT
V상 IGBT 모터용량 5. Check if the condition of HCT cable and HCT is OK.
Reactormotor for15kW
appliedcapa.
motor cap.
13KW
15kW or이상에만
or only
more more 채용only 6. Check the direction of HCT
3-phase 380V
3상 380V - Normal if HCT ‘arrow’ points to the bottom of CP
HCT
U
V
IM
W
7. Check for proper connections of the followings:
- VB connector to DPC-1XX PCB.
- U-phase HCT signal wire to VB-03.
- Power supply to TP2 and TP5 on DPP-1XX PCB.
GW - 03
VB - 03
GV - 04
GV - 01
GV - 05
GV - 07
VB - 07
GXV - 02 - Voltage of GATE terminal (-8V±1V in stop)

단상110V
GXV - 05
AC 110V GXL - 04 9. If TDC 33 is detected while the car is not running, check followings:
GXL - 13
GATE DPC-1XX
DPP-1XX VA VG - VG connector on DPC-1XX.
TRANS
(GDC) (INV)
- VA connector on DPP-1XX.
10. If the voltage of D21 (coordinate 4E) is 0 and the voltage of pin 2
of RA1(Coordinates 81) on DPC-1XX is +15V, then, examine the
connection between pin 23, on DPC-1XX VG connector, and pin 23
on DPP-1XX B/D VA connector. It is normal if they are connected.
11. Examine and replace IGBT, IPM.
Revision: 0

TCD 34 Inverter phase W IGBT trouble ○ Speed CPU Si210
[Countermeasures]
[Meaning] Motor capacity 13kW~15kW: In case that one of upper IGBT & one of
lower IGBT in IPM are switching on together, the trouble occurs.
Motor capacity 18kW~22kW: In case that +IGBT & -IGBT of W phase 1XX PCB and GA & VA connector of DPP-1XX PCB are OK.
are switching on together, the trouble occurs. 2. In case of DPP-111, check if condition of GXW, GXL, GW connector
And incase that the connection of INV STACK is incorrect or drive and GW-03 pin are OK, and the connection between GW & IGBT
power of IGBT is incorrect or inverter output(U,V,W) are shortened on INV. Stack.
together. 3. In case of DPP-131, check if the condition of GU, GV, GW & GX pin
4. After removing cables from DPP-1XX and IPM, check output of gate
[Explanation]
SMPS.
DIODE
CONVERTER (GU-01,02: 15V, GV-01,02: 15V, GW-01,02: 15V, GX-01,02: 15V,
W-phase IGBT
W상 IGBT Reactor
*리액터는applied on GX-03,02: -9V)
모터용량
motors
Reactor 13KW
15kW
applied and
for motor cap.
이상에만
15kW 채용
above
or more only 5. Check if the condition of HCT cable and HCT is OK.
3상
AC 380V
380V
HCT 6. Check the direction of HCT
U
V
W
IM - Normal if HCT ‘arrow’ points to the bottom of CP
7. Check for proper connections of the followings:
- VB connector to DPC-1XX PCB
- U-phase HCT signal wire to VB-03
GW - 05
GW - 01
GW - 06
GW - 09
GW - 03
VB - 03
VB - 07
GXW - 02
단상110V
AC 110V
GXW - 05 - Power supply to TP1 and TP4 on DPP-1XX PCB
GXL - 06
GATE
GXL - 07
DPC-1XX
- Voltage of GATE terminal (-8V±1V in stop)
DPP-1XX VA VG
TRANS
(GDC) (INV) 9. If TDC 34 is detected while the car is not running, check followings:
- VG connector on DPC-1XX.
- VA connector on DPP-1XX.
10. If the voltage of D20 (coordinates 5C) is 0 and the voltage of pin 8
of RA1(Coordinates 81) on DPC-1XX is +15V, then, examine the
connection between pin 25, on DPC-1XX VG connector, and pin 25
on DPP-1XX VA connector. It is normal if they are connected.
11. Examine and replace IGBT, IPM.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 35 Regenerative IGBT trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] DPP-111: In case that On failure of regenerative IGBT occurs or driving [Countermeasures]
power of regeneration is failure or the connection of INV STACK is bad,
the trouble occurs. 1. Turn the power OFF and examine the followings:
- VG connector on DPC-1XX
[Diagram] - VA connector on DPP-111
- GP and GXL connectors on DPP-1XX
- Connection between GP on DPP-111 and IGBT on INV STACK
Regenerative - Check that variable resistor(BR) on DPP-111 PCB is set to a black
회생resistor
저항
DIODE mark.
CONVERTER 리액터는
Reactor applied for
Regenerative
회생 IGBT IGBT 모터용량
motors 15kW
capa. 13KW
2. If TCD 35 is detected while the car is not running, check followings:
or more 채용
이상에만 only - VG connector on DPC-1XX
AC 380V
3상 380V - VA connector on DPP-111
HCT
U If the voltage of pin 5 of RA1(Coordinate 81) on DPC-1XX is +15V,
V IM
W then, examine the connection between pin 19 on DPC-1XX VG
connector and pin 19 on DPP-111 VA connector.
3. Examine IGBT.
4. Replace DPP-111 PCB.
GP - 03
GP - 05
GP - 09
VB - 07
VB - 03
단상
AC 110V
110V
GATE DPC-1XX
DPP-111 VA VG
TRANS
(GDC) (INV)
GXL - 09
GXL - 17
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 36 Inverter Hall CT trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When current controlling HCT and VB connector on DPC-1XX PCB [Countermeasures]
are not connected.
1. Examine VB connector and cable on DPC-1XX PCB
(Connector checking jumper should be connected as in the left diagram)
[Diagram] 2. Examine connector and cable of HCT.
2. If TCD 36 is detected, while the connector is tightly inserted,
replace VB connector cable.
VB DPC-1XX 3. Replace DPC-1XX PCB.

01 01
02 02
03 03
04 04
To HCT로
HCT 05 05 15V
06 06
07 07 R107
08 08
09 09 CTCHK
10 10
C79
Jumper
커넥터 for 용
CHECK
connector
JUMPERcheck
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 37 Inverter Over heat Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When the thermal switch on radiating plate activates in order to prevent [Countermeasures]
IGBT from being damaged by overheating. ( 85 ℃ or more, b contact)
1. Examine the followings:
- GP and GXL connectors on DPP-1XX
[Diagram] - VA, GA connector on DPP-1XX and VG connector on DPC-1XX
- Check for a proper connection between GP Pin 6, Pin 7 and terminal
INV. STACK
Detect circuit for Overheating Normal LOW(0V)
ends of thermal guard.
THERMAL GUARD DIODE Abnormal HIGH(15V)
CONV.
THERMAL1
2. Check the fan on the stack
THERMAL2
- Running status of the fan
15V
PC
VG - 17 - Power supply to the fan
R. IGBT DPC-1XX - Status of relay.
VG - 18
(INV)
IPM -9V
3. If the ambient temperature in the machine room is over 40°C, check
U IGBT
V IGBT the air-conditioning runs.
W IGBT DPP-1XX
( GDC) 4. Turn the power ON and check the stack overheats after sufficiently
cooling down the radiating plate and properly connecting GP connector
FAN
to DPP-1XX.
5. If TCD 37 is detected, check the followings:
PCB THERMAL1 THERMAL2
DPP-121
- VG connector on DPC-1XX
GB-04 GB-05
TH-01
- VA connector on DPP-111, GA connector on DPP-131
DPP-131 TH-02
DPP-111 GP-06 GP-07

6. If the voltage of pin 4 of RA1(Coordinate 81) is +15V
Then, examine the connection between pin 17, on DPC-1XX VG
connector, and pin 17, on DPP-1XX VA connector.
8. Replace thermal guard.
9. Clean dust on Stack and radiating plate.
10. Replace Stack Fan.

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 41 Inverter current control trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When a current command, which is over 150% of the rated motor [Countermeasures]
current, is detected due to failure in the motor, unstable input power
supply & drop of voltage.
1. Examine the number of turns of HCT
[Diagram] (Refer to the INV over current table).

2. Check that the spec(motor and CP capacity, etc)
(Annunciator and carry out “DSP spec write(A52E)”)
3. Check the followings:
- Proper connection of VB connector to DPC-1XX PCB and HCT cable
DPC-1XX
- Voltage of power supply to CP is normal
(INV) - Gears of traction machine
Speed Current - Function of brake

속도지령 토크분
command command
전류지령
for 기동후
Detects in a
Current CTRL
전류제어
Detects current
속도 torque ( Curr. com’d for tor. )2 - Connection of Rotary Encoder
Speed 연산 소정시간이후
predetermined + 이상 검출
err. detectedfailure
controlling
Actual 제어기
controller + ( Curr. co. for excit. ) 2 time부터
after 검출
starting
실제속도 -
speed 4. Check a jam on the car and CWT rails.
5. Replace E2PROM on DPC-1XX PCB.
여자분
Current 전동기of정격전류
150% rated
의 current
motor 150% 6. Replace DPC-1XX PCB.
전류지령 for
command
excitation
7. Replace HCT.
This is detected when the current command value is over 150% of the rated motor current,
while the motor are running at the rated speed, going through starting and acceleration zone.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 48 DC Link Under Voltage Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When the voltage of DC link is 330V or less. [Countermeasures]
1. Turn the power OFF and examine the followings:

- VG connector on DPC-1XX, VA & GA connector on DPP-1XX
[Diagram] - GW, GP and GXL connectors on DPP-1XX
- Connection between GW, GP on DPP-1XX and STACK.
2. On detecting TCD 48, check the followings:
- Voltage of DC Link terminal is below 330V
- If the voltage is not obtained, it is unstable the connection between
저전압
Voltage 검출회로
drop detecting circuit
INV STACK and DPP-1XX, STACK ON failure or DPP-1XX PCB failure
VDC(+) 3. Turn the power ON and check the followings:
GW - 03 DPP-1XX
15V (GDC) 정상시
Normal LOW(0V)
if Low (0V) - Voltage of TP7 (Coordinates 9N on DPP-1XX) is normal
이상시if HIGH(15V)
Abnormal High (15V)
GP - 09
VDC(-)
D23
(1: +15V, 2: -9, 4: GND)
R62
R101 R36
4. If the voltage of pin 3 of RA1(Coordinates 81) on DPC-1XX is +15V,
R63
R102 R37
15V
C13 D36 PC9 D37
then, examine the connection between pin 15 on DPC-1XX VG
VG - 15
-9V R49
connector and pin 15 or DPP-1XX VA connector.
R103 R38
R35 DPC-1XX
9 (Normal if they are connected)
R104 R39 + 14 R23 C9 (INV)
8 VG - 16
- 5. This indicates that the voltage has not charged.
LED1 R98 C4 IC1
Check regenerative IGBT ON failure and MAIN IGBT ON failure.
-9V 6. Check the condenser and replace it, if necessary.
7. Replace DPP-1XX PCB and DPC-1XX PCB.
8. Check RCR resistor and wiring.
9. Check input power.
VDC(+) VDC(-)
PCB
Connector Connector 10. In case that the trouble occurs in the beginning of acceleration,
DPP-12X GP-01 GP-03 check if the door switches is off.
DPP-13X GP-01 GP-02
DPP-111 GW-03 GP-09

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 52 Inverter Reverse Rotation Detection Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When the actual direction of the motor is opposite to the command. [Countermeasures]
1. Check the connection between the encoder fitted to the motor shaft
and the control panel.
[Explanation]
2. Examine that U and V-phase on the STACK pass through those of the
This TCD is to be detected when the actual running direction of the motor is opposite to the HCT in order.
command at a speed of 16 m/min. or more after starting. The detection is carried out at the 3. Check the number of turns of HCT(Refer to the INV over current table).
interval of 10m SEC only on the running of the motor. 4. Check for proper connections of the followings:
- U, V and W-phase INV STACK wires to motor terminals in order
- VG connector on DPC-1XX and VA, GA connector on DPP-1XX
- GU, GV, GW & GX connectors on DPP-131 PCB and IPM
- GXU, GXV & GXW connectors on DPP-111 PCB and IGBT
5. Check the following
- IGBT and IPM on INV STACK turns ON/OFF normally
(U-phase+, U-phase-, V-phase+, V-phase-, W-phase+ and W-phase-)
and U, V and W-phase currents are sine waves with 120 degree
phase difference. (When measuring check pin 3, 4 and 5 with a
oscilloscope, examine that U, V and W-phase currents are sine
waves without any distortion) If abnormal, STACK needs replacing.
6. Replace DPC-1XX PCB
7. Replace DPP-1XX PCB
8. Check if the positioning of traction machine is reverse or normal
9. Check if the cable of Rotary Encoder is disconnected
10. Check the condition of Rotary Encoder wiring
11. Replace HCT.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 53 Inverter Charging Trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When a failure occurs in the charging circuit which protects the [Countermeasures]
condensers and power devices by damping surge current on a initial
charging of DC link end. 1. Refer to DC LINK under voltage trouble.
2. Check for the connection status of the followings:
[Diagram] - VC connector on DPC-1XX and GW and GP connector on DPP-1XX
C1VD
Option
- Wiring of VC connector on DPC-1XX PCB (C1VD)
DIODE
RCRR CONVERTER
MCCB
- Wiring of RCRR, RCRS and RCRT resistor
3Φ380V 3. Turn the power OFF and check short-circuited DC-link ends.
RCRS
NOISE (The examination should be carried out after the voltage at DC link has
FILTER RCRT
been completely discharged and LED1 on DPP-1XX PCB extinguishes.)
C1ST If DC link end is short-circuited, it is a trouble on STACK.

(Inspect power devices)
C1VD COIL
GW - 03
GP - 09
VC - 01
4. Replace DPP-1XX PCB
DPC-1XX DPP-1XX
VG VA
VC - 02 (INV) (GDC) 5. Replace DPC-1XX PCB
In case C1VD is applied: DC link voltage is charged through charging resistor RCRR, RCRS
and RCRT when C1VD is picked up in 3 seconds after the power turns on. If DC link voltage is
inspected to be low(below 330V) in 8 seconds after the C1VD contactor is picked up, drop out
C1VD contactor and then pick it up again. If DC link voltage is not charged in 8 seconds, it will
be dropped out and be in unable condition. This time, refer to DC link low voltage failure.
In case C1VD is not applied: DC link voltage will be charged through RCRR, RCRS within 3
seconds after power on, and 8 seconds later, DC link voltage will be inspected whether the
voltage is under 330V or not.
And TCD53 will be appeared even if the voltage is still under 330V after inspecting DC link
voltage 8 seconds later.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 54 Inverter Overload Detection Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When the current detected on motor exceeds general motor capacity [Countermeasures]
continuously.
1. Check the No. of HCT TURN (Refer to INV over current table)
2. Verify that SPEC such as motor capacity, control panel capacity, etc..
[Diagram] are correct.
3. Check VB connector on DPC-1XX PCB and HCT connection
4. Check the condition of traction M/C gear and brake.
5. Verify that there’s no jam in car and CWT rail
2
6. Replace E PROM in DPC-1XX
DPC-1XX
(INV) 7. Replace DPC-1XX
U - Phase Currency
U상전류
8. Replace HCT
A/D -
LOW Overload 9. Check if the positioning of traction machine is reverse or normal
V - Phase Currency
V상전류 A/D변환 PASS + 과부하 검출
Detected
CONVERSION
FILTER -
10. Check if the cable of Rotary Encoder is disconnected
W - Phase Currency
W상전류 (Refer to TCD 92)
150% of Rated
전동기 정격전류
Motor Current
의 150%
This error is detected when the motor’s U, V, and W-phase values that have been radio-
rectified, converted into A/D values, and then gone through LOW PASS FILTER exceed
150% of rated
motor current. Error is detected when the rated value is exceeded for over 1 second.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 55 Inverter Under Speed Detection Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When actual motor speed does not reach the value commanded. [Countermeasures]
1. Check the connection between control panel and the Rotary Encoder
fitted to motor shaft.
2. Verify that U and V-phase on inverter stack side are passing through U
[Explanation] Detection starts 100msec after motor start-up. An error is detected and V-phase of HALL-CT respectively.
when motor speed is detected to be below 4m/min for 100 m/sec while 3. Check the No. of HALL-CT turn (Refer to INV over current table)
speed command value is 6 m/min or more.
4. Check the connection sequence of U, V, and W-phase from inverter
stack to motor terminal.
5. Check the connection between VG connector in DPC-1XX PCB and
VA & GA connector of DPP-1XX.
6. Check the connection between IGBT and GU, GV, and GW connector
in DPP-111.
7. Verify that inverter stack IGBT(U-phase+, U-phase-, V-phase+, V-
phase-, W-phase+, W-phase-) turn ON and OFF normally and U, V,
and W-phase currents are sine waves with 120 phase difference.
(Verify that U, V, and W-phase currency are sine waves without
deformation by measuring check pin(CHK) 3, 4, and 5 on DPC-1XX
with scope)
If any error is found, replace the stack.
8. Replace DOC-1XX PCB.
11. Replace HCT
12. Check if the positioning of traction machine is reverse or normal.
13. Check if the cable of Rotary Encoder is disconnected.
(Refer to TCD 92)
14. Check if the electric power goes to motor terminal.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 56 Inverter Over speed Detection Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When the actual number of rotations of motor is higher than the normal [Countermeasures]
abnormally.
1. Check the connection between the encoder fitted to the motor shaft
and the control panel.
2. Examine that U and V-phase on the STACK pass through those of the
[Explanation]
HCT in order.
This error is detected when the motor’s turn number detected exceeds 16 m/min 3. Check the number of turns of HCT(Refer to the INV over current table).
and, in case of high speed operation, is over 110% of the rated speed. In case of 4. Check for proper connections of the followings:
slow speed, the error is detected when the number is over 120% of the commanded - U, V and W-phase INV STACK wires to motor terminals in order
value for speed.
- VG connector on DPC-1XX and VA, GA connector on DPP-1XX
- GU, GV, GW & GX connectors on DPP-131 PCB and IPM
- GXU, GXV & GXW connectors on DPP-111 PCB and IGBT
5. Check the following
- IGBT on INV STACK turns ON/OFF normally. (U-phase+, U-phase-,
V-phase+, V-phase-, W-phase+ and W-phase-) and U, V and W-
phase currents are sine waves with 120 degree phase difference.
(When measuring check pin 3, 4 and 5 with a oscilloscope, examine
that U, V and W-phase currents are sine waves without any distortion)
If abnormal, STACK needs replacing.
6. Replace DOC-1XX PCB.
9. Replace Rotary Encoder and check the line.
10. Replace Hall CT.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 57 Brake Over Current Trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When the current of Brake coil exceeds the normal, the trouble occurs [Countermeasures]
1. Check the connection of VJ connector between DPC-1XX & DPB-1XX.

2. Check the red LED. If it is off, check the power supply line(DC 110V).
3. Check if #4, 6 pin of the connector on DPB-1XX is DC 100V.
[Explanation] In case that the current exceeds the reference of Brake Control PCB,
the trouble occurs. 4. Check if #3, 5 pin of the connector UB on DOP-1XX is DC 100V.
5. Check if the line of Brake is shortage fault between each other.
6. Replace DPB-1XX PCB.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 58 Brake Current Trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When the input power of Brake coil is unstable or low, and the power is [Countermeasures]
cut at Fuse or somewhere, the trouble occurs.
1. Check the connection of VJ connector between DPC-1XX & DPB-1XX.
2. Check the red LED. If it is off, check the power supply line(DC 110V).
3. Check if #4, 6 pin of the connector on DPB-1XX is DC 100V.
[Explanation] In case that the current is broken or applied abnormally,
the trouble occurs. 4. Check if #3, 5 pin of the connector UB on DOP-1XX is DC 100V.
5. Check the condition of Fuse FS1, FS2.
6. Check if C1ST, C1BR operate well.
7. When C1BR, C1ST are activated, check if #2, 6 of VK connector on
DPB-1XX have DC110V.
5. Check if the line of Brake is broken.
6. Replace DPB-1XX PCB.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 59 Inverter Inoperable for 24 seconds Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When the motor does not rotate normally. [Countermeasures]
1. Check that the PI gain value of DPC-1XX is set to a lower value.

2. Check that the number of turns of HCT is appropriate.
3. Examine that the capacity of the motor is appropriate for that of the
[Explanation] This TCD is detected when the motor rotates at a speed of 16 m/min
for 24 seconds after the motor starts in normal operation. elevator.
4. Check for IGBT failure on STACK.
5. Check a jam on the car and CWT rails.
6. Check Encoder wiring and Encoder itself.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 60 Inverter Spec Data trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
< INV SPEC. APPLICATION MAP >

[Meaning] There is a trouble of Inverter SPEC DATA
Motor(Kw) IPM, IGBT(A) CT-Turns
5.5 50 2
7.5 75 2
[Explanation] 9.5, 11 100 2
13, 15 150 1
1. INV SPEC data was not written on the side of speed.
2. SPEC on the side of Operation and that on the side of Speed are different. 18, 22 200 1
3. Settings of IGBT, motor, speed and TR M/C are not fit to applicable map.
Speed Worm Helical
[Symptom] (m/min) Type RGR Type RGR
TKXS 38 1/2
• Unable to start 45 TKM 38 1/2
• Alarm LED on DOC-1XX lights ON. TKL 47
• R5SC relay or contactor OFF TKXS 38 1/2 H438B 38.35
TKM 38 1/2
TKL 47
60
TKXL 47
[Countermeasures]
WMC 38.1/2
<Step 1> WLC 32 2/3
position the NORMAL/STOP switch in DOR-131 on STOP, TKXS 22 2/3 H422B 21.92
locate JP2 jumper to WE in DPC-12X, TKM 22 2/3 H317 17.371
and input A52E in DOA-100. TKL 26 2/3
90
When the SUCCESS is displayed following WAIT message after a while, TKXL 26 2/3
return JP2 jumper in DPC-12X to NC, WMC 25 2/3
position the NORMAL/STOP switch in DOR-131 on NORMAL, WLC 28
and reset by pressing the RESET button in DOC-1XX. TKXS 22 2/3 H422B 21.92
<Step 2> TKM 22 2/3 H317 17.371
If TCD 60 appears still after the actions taken at step 1, verify that IGBT(or IPM), TKL 26 2/3
motor, speed and TR M/C are fit to the applicable map in the right. If any errors 105
TKXL 26 2/3
are found, input a correct data in the corresponding SPEC address. WMC 22
If SPEC is not corrected, start again after verifying that SW2 in DOC-120 is WLC 24
positioned on WE.
* RGR : Reduction gear ratio
* The capacity of motor should be set to its max.
Example) 13/15 -> Set to 15
15/18 -> Set to 18
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 61 Inverter Spec Write trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When inverter SPEC write is unable, the trouble occurs.

[Countermeasures]
1. Check if JP2 jumper in DPC-12X is at WE.

[Explanation] 2. Check if the contact of short pin is broken.
3. Replace inverter ROM.
In case that SPEC data can not be written on DSP even performing SEC write 4. Replace DPC-1XX
mode(A52E), the trouble occurs.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 62 Inverter Momentary Power Failure Detection Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When a momentary power failure is detected in DSP on DPC-1XX PCB. [Countermeasures]
1. Check that the connection of VE connector between DPC-1XX and

DOC-1XX.
2. Refer to countermeasures of TCD70.
[Explanation] DSP on DPC-1XX PCB reads a signal of inverter momentary power failure
via VE connector. TCD 62 occurs if a value (signal) is abnormal. 3. Replace DOC-1XX.
4. Replace DPC-1XX.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 69 Missed Phase Detection (100V) Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When the failure of DC110V or the under voltage of Brake PCB is detected. [Countermeasures]
1. Check if LED1, 2 on DOP-1XX are turned on.

2. If LED1,2 are turned off, check the condition of FS1, FS2 fuse.
If one of them is cut, replace the fuse(250V/6A).
[Explanation] 3. Check if LED3 on DOP-1XX are turned on.
4. If red LED(LD1) on DPB-1XX is turned on.
When the breaking or the under voltage of DC 110V, which is for contactor and Brake, 5. If LED3 are turned off, check the condition of FS3 fuse.
continues 180 msec, the trouble may occurs. If it is cut, replace the fuse(250V/6A).
6. If above items are OK, the voltage of PS connector 12-16,
14-16 on DOP-1XX is within AC85V±10%.
Coil[SW_SS_ Coil[SW_SS_48V_
100V_DOWN] DOWN_HOLD] v100_err_count >=1
If no, replace transformer.
TCD 69 7. Check if the voltage between AC-07 on DOC-1XX and ground
0x923C 0x9240 is within DC110V±10%.
8. Check if the voltage between UB-03 and UB-05 on DOP-1XX
is within DC110V±10%.
+1 v100_err_cout 9. Check the cables (VJ & VK) between DPB-100 and DPC-1XX.
ERD_Inv_Brake_UV
10. If countermeasure 9 is OK, replace DPB-100.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 70 48V Power Trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] This is the method that detects any possible lost phase of E/L three-phase [Countermeasures]
input power. The decision is carried out by checking the DC rectifying
voltage(DC 48V) in the controlling power three-phase AC37V.
1) Verify that D48 FUSE LED(LED3.LED4) in DOP-100 PCB
lights on.
[Explanation] If IALM(red) LED and P.F(red) LED flashes within DOC-1XX, 2) Check the fuse(FS3, FS4) when the above LED lights off. If it
operation will be unable.
is
disconnected, replace it with a rated fuse(250V/3A).
V48_Down_10sec_Count >= 0x0A TCD 70
3) If any error are not found at the above items, verify that the
0x48106
voltage
AC 37V± 10% among pin 1, 9 and 12 of PB connector in
Left picture below show DC 48V at a normal power and the right picture shows DOP-100P PCB BOARD.
wave form when a phase was lost.
4) Verify that the voltage between AB-10 pin in DOC-100 PCB
Lost phase detecting circuit in DOC-1XX lights ARM LED when it detects a wave
form which falls down 35V or less. If it detects such wave for 300msec, it makes and F.G
Error 70. is DC48V± 10% .
Voltage : DC48V±10% Voltage : DC32V±10%
[ Wave form & voltage on normal ] [ Wave form & voltage on abnormal ]
Note) The above voltage is DC value measured by digital volt. meter.

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 71 Voltage Drop Detection Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When input power(3 phases) drops to its 85% or below, [Countermeasures]
the trouble occurs.
1. There is a special countermeasure.
Check the power source from the building.
2. Refer to countermeasures of TCD70.
[Explanation] In case 85% of voltage drop continues for 90 msec, the trouble is
detected.
It is detected by the voltage(DC48V) rectified from AC37V that is
3 phases power for control.
Coil[SW_SS_48V_UNDER_85P] under_85p_count > 2

TCD 71
0x923F
+1 under_85p_count
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 74 Operation SPEC DATA Trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] SPEC DATA trouble is detected in Operation CPU, [Countermeasures]

when EEPROM SPEC DATA is not within controllable range. Inspect and correct the data of SPEC ROM(EEPROM- 28C64).
Search corresponding address from the SPEC list, and then

[Explanation] This trouble occurs when the value of SPEC DATA in EEPROM enter the address by pressing “A31E” on the Annunciator(ANN).
violates the setting. Correct the data value of corresponding address of EEPROM
and reset.
1. When the data is not warm gear type and helical gear type but
designated data. 1. Gear type (Address: 0106 H)
2. Concerning gear type, the data of TR M/C is out of range. 2. TR M/C Type (Address: 0108H)
3. When the value of encoder is not 72, 512, 1024. 3. Rotary Encoder pulse (Address: 010EH)
4. When the data of the speed is out of range. 4. Speed (Address: 0104H)
5. When the data of IGBT capacity is out of range. 5. IGBT capacity (Address: 010AH)
6. When the data of H.CT TURN is out of range. 6. H.CT TURN (Address: 010CH)
7. When the data of motor capacity is out of range. 7. Motor capacity (Address: 0102H)
8. When the number of service floor is different with SPEC. 8. Service floor (Address: 038CH~04CAH)
9. When the number of shelter plate is different with SPEC. 9. Number of shelter plate (Address: 0300H)
[Reference] The data troubled can be checked by A42E(trace data).
If data of each BIT is 1, the SPEC DATA of set BIT is the reason of the trouble.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Service Shelter
- - - - - -
floor plate
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
H.CT Rotary
IGBT Motor - Speed TM Gear
TURN Encoder
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 76 EEPROM Write Trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
When different values are found over 100 times while writing data on
EEPROM and reading data from the same address.
1. Verify if SW2 switch in DOC-1XX is switched to “WE” side.
2. Verify if EEPROM is properly inserted into DOC-1XX.
[Explanation] This error means that the SPEC DATA is not written properly when
3. Check EEPROM.
letting SPEC DATA written in EEPROM.
( 28C64-xxPC: xx should be below 15 )
4. Replace SPEC ROM.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 77 EEPROM Read Trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Different data are found over 4 consecutive times while reading data [Countermeasures]
from the same address on EEPROM. 1. Check EEPROM.
( 28C64-xxPC: xx should be below 15)
2. Verify that EEPROM is properly inserted into DOC-1XX
[Explanation] While reading the SPEC DATA of EEPROM,
when different data is found over 4 times consecutively though BOARD.
reading SPEC DATA on the same address. 3. Replace SPEC ROM.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 78 Floor Height measuring Table SUM trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] EEPROM floor height measurement table error [Countermeasures]
1. EEPROM Address (After pressing ANN ‘A31E’)

Address of where floor height starts: 1A00H
Floor height table sum : Check the value of 1B10H.
[Explanation]
2. Re-measure the floor height
3. After measuring the floor height verify if the floor indicating
Addresses starting from 1A00H of EEPROM, floor height value of each floor is saved
value of LCE are conforming to spec. If the values are contrary,
after measuring the floor height. In 1B10H of EEPROM, the sum of floor height of each
floor is saved. If even one of three cases below occurs, this error will occur. adjust the plate and check the installation.
4. Consecutive failure of floor height measurement, press ‘A31E’
on ANN, enter the address below and confirm the value.
1. When the sum obtained by adding each floor height table value saved in
EEPROM(1A00H) and the floor height sum data saved in EEPROM
Address ;
does not match.
2. When the floor height sum data in EEPROM is 0(Zero). -Total number of floors : 0300H (Elevator1)
3. When the floor height of the lowest floor of floor height table in EEPROM is not the 0302H (Elevator2)
lowest floor height(150000). -Top floor : 041CH
-Bottom floor : 0420H
-Service floor :
[Symptom] 038CH ~ 038CH(Elevator 1)
03CEH ~ 040CH(Elevator 2)
5. Replace
1. Low speed return operation to the lowest level with buzzer ringing and display
ACD = 09.
* How to measure floor height
2. In case there is no Non-Stop floor, operate the nearest floor.
3. Stop and standby with ACD = 09. 1) Press ‘A12E’ on ANN, and press 3.
2) If the floor height is measured successfully, press ‘FFFF’.
3) If the measuring fails, measure the floor height again.
4) If the measuring fails repeatedly, verify if the total floor number
and the highest floor in EEPROM(28C64) are identical with
those in the field.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 79 NVRAM Floor Height measuring Table SUM trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
NVRAM floor height table error
1. In case only TCD 79 is displayed, the system returns

automatically to normal operation condition.
[Explanation] 2. In case TCD 79 occurs with TCD 78, perform the
countermeasures of TCD 78.
After measuring of floor height, the floor height value of each floor and the sum of
them are designed to be saved in EEPROM and NVRAM(Backup Ram).
In addresses starting from 0022H of NVRAM; floor height value of each floor is saved,
and in 1B10H of EEPROM, the sum of floor height of each floor is saved. If even one
of three cases below occurs, this error will occur.
1. When the sum obtained by adding each floor height table value saved in
NVRAM(Backup RAM) and the floor height sum data saved in
RAM(Backup RAM) does not match.
2. When the floor height sum data in NVRAM is 0(Zero).
3. When the floor height of the lowest floor of floor height table in NVRAM is
not the lowest floor height(150000).
[Symptom]
1. Low speed return operation to the lowest level with buzzer ringing and display
ACD = 0B.
2. When DL turns on, alerts by with ACD = 27.

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 84 R5SC Relay on trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] R5SC ON condition lasts for over 500ms after R5SC OFF was commanded. [Countermeasures]
1. Verify if the voltage of AB-01 is 48V .

2. Verify if the voltage of AA-01 is 48V when NORMAL/STOP
switch is positioned to NORMAL.
[Explanation]
3. Verify if R5SC relay is properly inserted.
SWD_I[VI_R5SC]
4. The LED(red) of R5SC relay will light on while driving.
SWD_O[VO_R5SC] check_out
Verify if contacts are connected during LED lights on and
0x8001 0x8082
disconnected during LED lights off.
SWD_I[VI_R5SC] SWD_O[VO_R5SC] Coil[SV_INV_SW_FAIL] 0x923D 5. Check contacts when relay turns on.
6. Replace R5SC relay(contactor type).
0x8001 0x8082 0x9210 Coil[SW_SS_DSP_WD]
check_out
TMC_Start(R5SC_
ERROR_DETECT_T)
TMC_Check(R5SC_ERROR_
DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE) SWD_I[VI_R5SC]
TCD 84
0x8001
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 85 R5SC Relay off trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] R5SC OFF condition lasts for over 500ms after R5SC ON was commanded [Countermeasures]
1. Verify if the voltage of AB-01 is 48V .
2. Verify if the voltage of AA-01 is 48V when NORMAL/STOP
switch is positioned to NORMAL.
[Explanation]
3. Verify if R5SC relay is properly inserted.
SWD_I[VI_R5SC] 4. The LED(red) of R5SC relay will light on while driving.
SWD_O[VO_R5SC] check_out
Verify if contacts are connected during LED lights on and
0x8001 0x8082
disconnected during LED lights off.
SWD_I[VI_R5SC] SWD_O[VO_R5SC] Coil[SV_INV_SW_FAIL] 0x923D 5. Replace R5SC relay(contactor type).
check_out
TMC_Start(R5SC_
ERROR_DETECT_T)
TMC_Check(R5SC_ERROR_
TCD 85
0x8001
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 86 C1BR CTT. on trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Even after 500ms away from C1BR off command, C1BR on is maintained. [Countermeasures]
P48
MC1ST-01 C1BR MC1BR-04 AA-08 AA-08

[Explanation]
13 14
SWD_I[VI_R5SC] SWD_O[VO_R5SC] check_out
3 4 DOC-1XX
0x8001 0x8082
SWD_I[VI_R5SC] SWD_O[VO_R5SC] Coil[SV_INV_SW_FAIL] 0x923D
0x8082 0x9210
1. Check voltage of AA-08 of DOC-1XX from above circuit.
0x8001 Coil[SW_SS_DSP_WD]
• When C1BR driving section is ON : DC 48 V
check_out • When C1BR driving section is OFF : 0 V
TMC_Start(R5SC_
ERROR_DETECT_T) 2. Check the state of input state indicating row(row 3)
TMC_Check(R5SC_ERROR_ column 10 on LCD of DOA-100.
TCD 85
• When C1BR driving section is ON : 1
0x8001 • When C1BR driving section is OFF : 0
3. Check C1BR contact point of contactor.
• Even after 500ms away from OFF command of C1BR output, C1BR contact
does not turns OFF, and C1BR contact point input is ON is detected(driving
section ON failure).
• Even with C1BR contact off, C1BR contact point input on is detected, because
of contact point not being off(contact point melted and adhered).
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 87 C1BR CTT. off trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Even after 500ms away from C1BR on command, [Countermeasures]

C1BR off is maintained.
P48
MC1ST-01 C1BR MC1BR-04 AA-08 AA-08

[Explanation]
13 14
SWD_I[VI_C1BR] SWD_O[VO_C1BR] check_out 3 4 DOC-1XX
0x8029 0x8080
SWD_I[VI_C1BR] SWD_O[VO_C1BR] Coil[SV_INV_SW_FAIL] 0x923D

• When C1BR driving section is ON : DC 48 V
check_out • When C1BR driving section is OFF : 0 V
TMC_Start(C1BR_
TMC_Check(C1BR_ERROR_ column 10 on LCD of DOA-100.
DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE) SWD_I[VI_C1BR]
TCD 87 • When C1BR driving section is ON : 1
0x8029 • When C1BR driving section is OFF : 0
3. Check C1BR contact point of contactor.
• Even after 500ms away from ON command of C1BR output, C1BR contact
does not become ON, and C1BR contact point input is OFF is detected(driving
section OFF failure).
• Even with C1BR contact on, C1BR contact point input off is detected, because
of contact point not being on(failure of contact point off).
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 88 C1ST CTT. on trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
Even after 500ms away from C1ST off command, C1ST on is maintained.
P48
MC1ST-01 C1ST MC1ST-02 AA-07 AA-07

[Explanation]
21 22
Coil[SW_SS_48V_
SWD_I[VI_C1ST] SWD_O[VO_C1ST] DOWN_HOLD]
check_out 31 32 DOC-1XX
0x802A 0x8081 0x923C
SWD_I[VI_C1ST] SWD_O[VO_C1ST] Coil[SV_INV_SW_FAIL] 0x923D

0x802A 0x8081 0x9210 Coil[SW_SS_DSP_WD]
• When C1ST driving section is ON : 0 V
check_out • When C1ST driving section is OFF : DC 48 V
TMC_Start(C1ST_
ERROR_DETECT_T) 2. Check the state of input state indicating row (row 3)
TMC_Check(C1ST_ERROR_ column 9 on LCD of DOA-100.
DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE) SWD_I[VI_C1ST]
TCD 88 • When C1ST driving section is ON : 1
0x802A • When C1ST driving section is OFF : 0
3. Check C1ST contact point of contactor.
• Even after 540ms away from OFF command of C1ST output, C1ST contact
does not become OFF, and C1ST contact point input is ON is detected.
• Even with C1ST contact off, C1ST contact point input on is detected, because
of contact point not being off.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 89 C1ST CTT. off trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Even after 500ms away from C1ST on command, C1ST off is maintained. [Countermeasures]
P48
MC1ST-01 C1ST MC1ST-02 AA-07 AA-07

[Explanation]
21 22
Coil[SW_SS_48V_
SWD_I[VI_C1ST] SWD_O[VO_C1ST] DOWN_HOLD]
check_out 31 32 DOC-1XX
0x802A 0x8081 0x923C
SWD_I[VI_C1ST] SWD_O[VO_C1ST] Coil[SV_INV_SW_FAIL] 0x923D

0x802A 0x8081 0x9210 Coil[SW_SS_DSP_WD]
• When C1ST driving section is ON : 0 V
check_out • When C1ST driving section is OFF : DC 48 V
TMC_Start(C1ST_
TMC_Check(C1ST_ERROR_ column 9 on LCD of DOA-100.
DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE) SWD_I[VI_C1ST]
TCD 89 • When C1ST driving section is ON : 1
0x802A • When C1ST driving section is OFF : 0
3. Check C1ST contact point of contactor.
4. Check if rope compensation function is applied.
• Even after 500ms away from ON command of C1ST output, C1ST contact - Data in address 0016 is ‘01’ or ‘FF’, even If the function is
does not become ON, and C1ST contact point input is OFF is detected. not applied. Change the data to ‘00’.
• Even with C1ST contact on, C1st contact point input off is detected, because of 5. If rope compensation function is applied, check R1ML Relay.
contact point not being on.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 90 SUPRESS ON trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Even after 360ms away from driving OFF command from operation side [Countermeasures]
to speed side,ON feedback is maintained.
•1. Check flickering condition of WDT LED(green) of DPC-1XX.
•2. Check connection condition of communication cable(64P)
[Explanation] between operation and speed.
Coil[SV_INV_
Coil[RS_SUPPRESS_ON] RUN_STOP_FB] SWD_I[VI_C1ST]
• Check flickering condition of SYS2 LED(green) of DOC-1XX.
0x91C3 0x9207
0x802A
Coil[SV_INV_
Coil[RS_SUPPRESS_ON] RUN_STOP_FB]
0x9207
0x91C3
SWD_O[VO_C1ST] SWD_I[VI_R5SC] Coil[SV_INV_SW_FAIL] check_out
0x8081 0x8001 0x9210
check_out
TMC_Start(SUPRS_
ON_OFF_DETECT_T)
TMC_Check(SUPRS_ON_OFF_
DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE) Coil[RS_SUPPRESS_ON]
TCD 90
0x91C3
Even suppress OFF command of operation control side is maintained for 360ms,
the suppress command which is a feedback from speed control side does not
become OFF, and maintain continuously ON.
[Symptom]
Sudden stop during running.

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 91 SUPRESS OFF trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Even after 360ms away from driving ON command from operation side [Countermeasures]
to speed side,OFF feedback is maintained.
•1. Check flickering condition of WDT LED(green) of DPC-1XX.
•2. Check connection condition of communication cable(64P)
[Explanation] between operation and speed.
Coil[SV_INV_ • Check flickering condition of SYS2 LED(green) of DOC-1XX.
Coil[RS_SUPPRESS_ON] RUN_STOP_FB] SWD_I[VI_C1ST]
0x91C3 0x9207
0x48082
Coil[SV_INV_
Coil[RS_SUPPRESS_ON] RUN_STOP_FB]
0x91C3 0x9207
SWD_O[VO_C1ST] SWD_I[VI_R5SC] Coil[SV_INV_SW_FAIL] check_out
0x8081 0x8001 0x9210
check_out
TMC_Start(SUPRS_
ON_OFF_DETECT_T)
TMC_Check(SUPRS_ON_OFF_
DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE) Coil[RS_SUPPRESS_ON]
TCD 91
0x91C3
Even suppress ON command of run control side is maintained for 300ms,

the suppress command which is a feedback from speed control side does
not become ON, and maintain continuously OFF.
[Symptom]

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 92 R.E disconnected Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Disconnection of Rotary Encoder both phases (A, B) is detected [Symptom]
[Explanation]
ALM LED (Red color) on DOC-1XX is turned on: Operation unable condition
With speed command is more than 1m/min and C1ST & C1BR is on [Countermeasures]
1. In rope compensation operation, if the pulse of R/E doesn’t change for 4.86 seconds,
the trouble occurs.
1. Voltage check of AD connector in DOC-1XX in stop.
2. In other operation (not rope compensation), if the pulse of R/E doesn’t change for
• PIN 1 : 15 V ± 5% (power supply of R/E)
1.62 seconds, the trouble occurs.
• PIN 2 : 0 V ± 0.5 V (GND)
• PIN 3 : 0 V ± 0.5 V or 15 V ± 5%
Coil[RS_RUNNING] SWD_O[VO_C1BR] SWD_I[VI_C1BR] SWD_I[VI_C1ST] • PIN 4 : 0 V ± 0.5 V or 15 V ± 5%
0x91C3 0x9207 0x9207 0x48082 2. Check voltage of AD connector in DOC-1XX during running.
SWD_O[VO_C1ST] Coil[IS_CMD_V_1] • PIN 1 : 15 V ± 5%

check_out
• PIN 2 : 0 V ± 0.5 V
0x91C3 0x91C3 • PIN 3 : 7.5 V ± 5% (measuring DC by DMM)
check_out enco_diff == 0
• PIN 4 : 7.5 V ± 5% (measuring DC by DMM)
TMC_Start(ENCODER_
DISCON_DETECT_T
TMC_Check(ENCODER_DISCON_ Coil[RS_ROPE_
DETECT_T,FINISH_STATE) COMPEN_REQUEST]
enco_input_er_cnt++
0x8081
enco_input_er_cnt > 2 TCD 92
TCD 92
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 93 R.E pulse counter read trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] The difference is more than 1mm in reading the value of R.E twice. [Symptom]
[Explanation]
In case the difference that is more than 1mm in reading the value of R.E twice, occurs
more than 10 times, TCD 92 is detected.
[Countermeasures]
See the countermeasures of TCD 92.

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 94 R.E pulse counter trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] In case that the case of changed value between R.E counter value read [Countermeasures]
in current cycle and in the previous cycle exceeds 3 times, and
1. Check SPEC data from address 0100H ~ 0112H of control
this exceeded value is continued for 150ms, the trouble is detected.
SPEC. (Refer to map of TCD 60)
2. Check if R.E is out of function. (Refer to TCD 92)
[Explanation]
• This can be generated when SPEC input is abnormal.

• This will be detected, if specs, such as T/M, gear, and speed does not match.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 95 R5SX OFF trouble (Safety line) Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
Off detected from hoist way and safety circuit.
1. Enter A21E in KEYPAD of DOA-100, to check address 8011
and verify the data if it is x01.
[Explanation] 2. Check voltage of each connector.

• CA-15(DC 48V)
SWD_O[VO_ • GRS-01~02(GRS) , GRS-04~05(GSS) , GRS-07,08(OBS)
SWD_I[VI_V48] ROPE_GRIPPER] SWD_I[VI_R5SX]
check_out
• LSU-01~02(FLU) , LSD-01~02(FLD)
0x8094 0x8011
0x8010 TMC_Check(POWER_ Coil[SW_SS_48V_
READY_T, FINISH_STATE) • Check voltage in sequence of Y1-02 ~ Y1-01 (SCS) AB-16, to
DOWN_HOLD]
verify if voltage is DC 48V ± 5%, and if there are no voltage
check_out r5sx_err_count > 3
detected, check the state of each switch.
TCD 95
3. In step 2, if 48V is detected in AB-16, but the data of address
8011 is x00, input circuit is abnormal.
+1 r5sx_err_count
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 96 Operation mode input trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
In case of high speed signal and ON_CAR signal having input concurrent
time, or no signal of operation being inputted at the same time. DCL-241
P48V
NORMAL CIN-02 RHIGH
[Explanation] $82AD
TMC_Check(POWER_ MAINT(INSPECTION) ONC-02 RONCAR

READY_T,FINISH_STATE) TCD 200 TCD 202
check_out
$82AF
CIN-03 RINCAR
check_out CND_F_Op[CN_HIGH] CND_F_Op[CN_IN_CAR] $82AE
input_err T.O.C.I BOX
0x82AE
0x82AD P48V [ In case of applying IN CAR Switch ] DCL-241
CND_F_Op[CN_ON_CAR]
0x82AF 2 1 OFF 2 3 NORMAL CIN-02 RHIGH

CND_F_Op[CN_IN_CAR] CND_F_Op[CN_ON_CAR] $82AD
3 1 MAINT CIN-03 RINCAR
0x82AE 0x82AF
$82AE
CND_F_Op[CN_HIGH] 0x82AE CND_F_Op[CN_ON_CAR] 5 6 ON 5 4 MAINT ONC-02 RONCAR
empty_err
$82AF
0x82AD 0x82AF
CND_F_Op[CN_IN_CAR]
4 6
input_err
990 msec ON CAR SW IN CAR
TMC_Start(OP_MODE_
MAINT SW
ERROR_DETECT_T)
1. Enter A21E in DOA-100 KEYPAD, and check data of
empty_err address 82AD,82AE and 82AF for each electric diagram.
3060 msec
TMC_Start(MODE_INPUT_
ERROR_DETECT_T) 2. Only one from above 3 input ports should be recognized as
“H”.
TMC_Check(OP_MODE_ERROR_
DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE) TCD 96 3. 3. If there is no “H”, verify if ON CAR switch is positioned on
ONCAR position and INCAR MAINT switch is not positioned on
TMC_Check(MODE_INPUT_ERROR_ MAINT.
DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE)
4. If there are two or more “H”, check the connection and
voltage of each phase.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 97 CDS trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When CDS is inputted after DOLS operation, the trouble is detected. [Countermeasures]
1. If 0V±0.5V is detected when measuring voltage of

Y2-03, CA-07 with DOLS, external condition is normal.
2. In case of 1, if LCD row 3 column 15 of DOA-100 is displayed
[Explanation] 1, input section of DOC-1XX is normal.
3. After checking of 2, if LCD row 3 column 13 of DOA-100 is
Coil[SW_ Coil[SW_FS_ CND_F_Op[CN_ CND_F_Op[CN_ displayed 0, it is normal. If row 3 column 13 is 1, check
GS_IS_STOP] MAINT] IN_CAR] ON_CAR] SWD_I[VI_RDMC]
voltage of CA-08(CDS). After DOLS, CDS switch is opened, so
0x925D 0x929A 0x82AE 0x82AF 0x8060
0V must be displayed to be normal.
4. Check CDS switch of car if voltage of CA-08 level is 48V.
Coil[SW_SV_ Coil[SW_GS_ Coil[DC_
1ST_FIRE] DOOR_ZONE] CLOSE_CMD] TCD 188 TCD 171
0x9274 0x9250 0x908E
SWD_O
[VO_R2OP] SWD_I[VI_LDS]
check_out
0x8083 0x802C
SWD_I[VI_DOLS] SWD_I[VI_CDS]
0x802D
TMC_Check(R2CD_R2LD_ 0x802B
ERROR_DETECT_T,RUN_STATE)
check_out
990 msec TMC_Start(R2CD_R2LD_
ERROR_DETECT_T)
TMC_Check(R2CD_R2LD_
ERROR_DETECT_T,
FINISH_STATE) Coil[DC_DOLS] SWD_I[VI_CDS] TCD 97
0x90A6 0x802B
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 98 LDS trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When LDS is inputted after DOLS operation, the trouble is detected. [Countermeasures]
1. If 0V±0.5V is detected when measuring voltage of

Y2-03, CA-07 with DOLS, external condition is normal.
2. In case of 1, if LCD row 3 column 15 of DOA-100 is displayed
[Explanation] 1, input section of DOC-1XX is normal.
3. After checking of 2, if LCD row 3 column 5 of DOA-100 is
Coil[SW_ Coil[SW_FS_ CND_F_Op[CN_ CND_F_Op[CN_ displayed into 0, it is normal. If row 3 column 5 is 1, check
GS_IS_STOP] MAINT] IN_CAR] ON_CAR] SWD_I[VI_RDMC] voltage of AB-15(LDS). After DOLS, LDS switch is
opened, so 0V must be displayed to be normal.
0x925D 0x929A 0x82AE 0x82AF 0x8060
4. Check LDS switch of hall if voltage of AB-15 level is 48V.
Coil[SW_SV_ Coil[SW_GS_ Coil[DC_
1ST_FIRE] DOOR_ZONE] CLOSE_CMD] TCD 188 TCD 171
0x9274 0x9250 0x908E
SWD_O
[VO_R2OP] SWD_I[VI_LDS]
check_out
0x8083 0x802C
SWD_I[VI_DOLS] SWD_I[VI_CDS]
0x802D
TMC_Check(R2CD_R2LD_ 0x802B
ERROR_DETECT_T,RUN_STATE)
check_out
990 msec TMC_Start(R2CD_R2LD_
ERROR_DETECT_T)
TMC_Check(R2CD_R2LD_
ERROR_DETECT_T,
FINISH_STATE) Coil[DC_DOLS] SWD_I[VI_LDS] TCD 98
0x90A6 0x802C
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 99 Dual input signal trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Different contact states of the same inputs between operation CPU and [Countermeasures]
speed CPU exceeds for 300ms. 1. Check trace data of TCD 99 by means of ‘A42E’ trace mode.
2. The meaning of each bit is as left table, in case that ‘1’ is set
at one of bit, meaning of the bit is the reason of trouble.
[Explanation]
Bit of operation CPU input main_in
Bit of speed CPU input inv_in
main_in inv_in ICD_Dual_Input_Error

0x8106
ICD_Dual_Input_Error err_count >= 7

TCD 99
0x8106
err_count ++
Trace Data Format

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
HIGH M/R
Maint
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
SD1D SD1U LDC DOLS R2LD C1BR C1ST R5SC

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 100 SD1D ON trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
SD1D does not operate from bottom floor.
1. Check the value of address 8023 from MEMORY READ
MODE, when car is not in bottom floor. If it is x00, it is normal. If
it is x01, check voltage of LSD-05, LSD-06 and HA-02. They
[Explanation] must have DC 48V.
DC48V is normal, if not, check wiring and connection.
It is detected when SD1D input does not enter when car is in bottom floor.
TCD 77 TCD 78 TCD 114 ERD_Digi_Fl_Err MODE when car is in bottom floor. If it is x01, it is normal. If it is
x01, check voltage of LSD-06 and HA-02, and They must have
DC 0V.
Coil[SV_ Coil[SW_SS_48V_ Coil[AC_OP_ Coil[AC_OP_FHM_
FORCE_DECEL] DOWN_HOLD] FHM_MODE] START_MODE] 3. Check if SD switches works normally.
0x921D 0x923C 0x9031 0x9032
4. Check assembly condition of SD
Coil[SW_GS_
OPEN_ZONE] Coil[AC_OP_MAINT_MODE] SWD_I[VI_LDC]
check_out
0x9256 0x9030 0x8025
Coil[IS_ZERO_V]
0x91F2
FTD_Current_Fl ==
check_out SPD_Floor_Spec.Bottom SWD_I[VI_SD1D]
TCD 100
0x8023
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 101 SD2D ON trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
SD2D does not operate from bottom floor.
it is x01, check voltage of LSD-07, LSD-08 and HA-03. They
Detected only when the rated speed is 90m/min or more.
Detected when SD2D input does not enter when car is on the bottom floor. 2. Check the value of address 8024 from MEMORY READ
MODE when car is in bottom floor. If it is x01, it is normal. If it is
x01, check voltage of LSD-08 and HA-03, and They must have
DC 0V.
TCD 77 TCD 78 TCD 114 ERD_Digi_Fl_Err
3. Check if SD switches works normally.

FORCE_DECEL] DOWN_HOLD] FHM_MODE] START_MODE] 4. Check assembly condition of SD
0x921D 0x923C 0x9031 0x9032
Coil[SW_GS_
check_out
0x9256 0x9030 0x8025
Coil[IS_ZERO_V]
0x91F2
FTD_Current_Fl ==
check_out SPD_Floor_Spec.Bottom SWD_I[VI_SD2D] TCD 101
SPD_Control_Spec. 0x8024
Contract_Velocity >= 90
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 107 SD1U ON trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
SD1U does not operate from bottom floor.
1. Check the value of address 8021 from MEMORY READ MODE,
when car is not in top floor. If it is x00, it is normal. If it is x01,
check voltage of LSU-05, LSU-06 and HA-06. They must have DC
[Explanation] 48V.
It is detected when SD1U input does not enter when car is in top floor.
2. Check the value of address 8023 from MEMORY READ MODE
when car is in top floor. If it is x01, it is normal. If it is x01, check
TCD 77 TCD 78 TCD 114 ERD_Digi_Fl_Err
voltage of LSU-06 and HA-06, and They must have DC 0V.

3. Check if SD switch works normally.
FORCE_DECEL] DOWN_HOLD] FHM_MODE] START_MODE]
4. Check assembly condition of SD.
0x921D 0x923C 0x9031 0x9032
Coil[SW_GS_
check_out
0x9256 0x9030 0x8025
Coil[IS_ZERO_V]
0x91F2
FTD_Current_Fl ==
check_out SPD_Floor_Spec.Top SWD_I[VI_SD1U]
TCD 107
0x8021
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 108 SD2U ON trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
SD2U does not operate from bottom floor.
it is x01, check voltage of LSU-07, LSU-08 and HA-07. They
Detected only when the rated speed is 90m/min or more.
Detected when SD2U input does not enter when car is on the top floor. 2. Check the value of address 8022 from MEMORY READ
MODE when car is in bottom floor. If it is x01, it is normal. If it is
x01, check voltage of LSU-08 and HA-07, and They must have
TCD 77 TCD 78 TCD 114 ERD_Digi_Fl_Err DC 0V.
3. Check if SD switch works normally.

FORCE_DECEL] DOWN_HOLD] FHM_MODE] START_MODE] 4. Check assembly condition of SD.
0x921D 0x923C 0x9031 0x9032
Coil[SW_GS_
check_out
0x9256 0x9030 0x8025
Coil[IS_ZERO_V]
0x91F2
FTD_Current_Fl ==
check_out SPD_Floor_Spec.Top SWD_I[VI_SD2U]
TCD 108
SPD_Control_Spec. 0x8022
Contract_Velocity >= 90
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 114 POSI ON trouble (LDC) Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Detected POSI(LDC) ON/OFF trouble. [Countermeasures]
1. Inspect if NORMAL/ABNORMAL jumper is in correct position.

In case of normal, #1-2, #4-5 pin to be connected.
[Explanation] 2. Check at door zone, if the value of 3rd row and 5th column of
Coil[RS_RUNNING] Coil[SW_FS_MAINT] SWD_I[VI_LDC] DOA-100 is ‘1’.
0x91B0 0x929A 0x8025
3. Check at no door zone, if the value of 3rd row and 5th column
Coil[SW_GS_LDC]
of DOA-100 is ‘0’.
0x9251
4. Check the voltage between Y1-05 of DOM-100 and CA-10 of
Coil[SW_GS_OPEN_ZONE] Coil[IS_CUR_V_10]
check_out DOC-1XX. (with door zone, 0V is normal and without door zone,
0x9256 0x91EB 48V is normal)
check_out 2070 msec
TMC_Start(POSI_
5. Check if POSI is defective.
OFF_ERR_T)
TMC_Check(POSI_OFF_
ERR_T,FINISH_STATE)
TCD 114
POSI off error
TCD 78 Coil[RS_RUNNING] SWD_I[VI_C1ST] SWD_I[VI_C1BR]
0x91B0 0x802A 0x8029
Coil[SV_FAST_MODE] Coil[IS_CUR_V_10] Coil[AC_OP_ALP_MODE]

check_out
0x9202 0x91EB 0x9041
check_out SWD_I[VI_LDC] == old_LDC_state

TMC_Reset(POSI_ON_
0x8025 OFF_DETECT_T)
TMC_Start(POSI_ON_
OFF_DETECT_T)
TMC_Check(POSI_ON_OFF_
DETECT_T,FINISH_STATE) TCD 114
POSI on error
SWD_I[VI_LDC]
old_LDC_state
0x8025
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 116 POSI ON trouble (LDU) Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Detected POSI(LDU) ON/OFF trouble. [Symptom]
No problem for operation, but rope compensation function is

unable.
[Explanation]
[Countermeasures]
When LDU trouble is detected, rope compensation function would be cut.
1. The trouble will be detected, when SPEC data in address 0016
SPD_Function. TMC_Check(POWER_ Coil{AC_OP_ SPD_I[SP_ is set, even if rope compensation is not applied.
Rope_Compen READY_T,FINISH_STATE) MAINT_MODE] FAC_INSPECT]
0x9030
2. Check if the input signal of LDU is activated normally.
TCD 78 TCD 79
(Check by Memory Read Mode A21E, Address: 8027)
TCD 114
tmp
3. Check the voltage between Y3-14 of DOM-100 and CB-03 of

tmp Coil[IS_ZERO_V] Coil[IS_ZONE_250] SWD_I[VI_LDC] DOC-1XX. (B contact)
check_out
0x91F2 0x9191 0x8025 48V: LDU off, 0V: LDU on.
check_out SWD_I[VI_LDU] SWD_I[VI_LDD]
TCD 116 4. Replace LDU, if LDU POSI is defective.
0x8027 0x8028
tmp Coil[IS_ZONE_250] SWD_I[VI_LDC]
check_out
0x9191 0x8025
TCD 116
0x8027 0x8028
SWD_I[VI_LDU] ^ old_ldc SWD_I[VI_LDC]
ldc_on_event
Coil[IS_ Coil[IS_ Coil[RS_

tmp ZONE_250] CUR_V_30] ldc_on_event UP_RUN] SWD_I[VI_LDU]
TCD 116
0x91AE 0x8027
0x9191 0x91EE
ldc_off_event Coil[RS_UP_RUN] SWD_I[VI_LDU]
TCD 116
0x8027
SWD_I[VI_LDC]
old_ldc
0x8025
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 117 POSI ON trouble (LDD) Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Detected POSI(LDD) ON/OFF trouble. [Symptom]
No problem for operation, but rope compensation function is

unable.
[Explanation]
[Countermeasures]
When LDD trouble is detected, rope compensation function would be cut.
1. The trouble will be detected, when SPEC data in address 0016
SPD_Function. TMC_Check(POWER_ Coil{AC_OP_ SPD_I[SP_
Rope_Compen READY_T,FINISH_STATE) MAINT_MODE] FAC_INSPECT]
is set, even if rope compensation is not applied.
0x9030 2. Check if the input signal of LDD is activated normally.

TCD 78 TCD 79 TCD 114 (Check by Memory Read Mode A21E, Address: 8028)
tmp
3. Check the voltage between Y3-15 of DOM-100 and CB-04 of

tmp Coil[IS_ZERO_V] Coil[IS_ZONE_250] SWD_I[VI_LDC]
check_out DOC-1XX. (B contact)
0x91F2 0x9191 0x8025 48V: LDD off, 0V: LDD on.
TCD 117
4. Replace LDD, if LDD POSI is defective.
0x8027 0x8028
tmp Coil[IS_ZONE_250] SWD_I[VI_LDC]
check_out
0x9191 0x8025
TCD 117
0x8027 0x8028
SWD_I[VI_LDU] ^ old_ldc SWD_I[VI_LDC]
ldc_on_event
ldc_off_event
Coil[IS_ Coil[IS_ Coil[RS_

tmp ZONE_250] CUR_V_30] ldc_on_event DOWN_RUN] SWD_I[VI_LDD]
TCD 117
0x8028
0x9191 0x91EE
ldc_off_event Coil[RS_DOWN_RUN] SWD_I[VI_LDD]
TCD 117
0x91AF
SWD_I[VI_LDC]
old_ldc
0x8025
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 119 SLOW DOWN S/W trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Detect Slow Down Switch OFF trouble [Countermeasures]
1. Check the connection of SDS.

If normal (SDS closed), check below.
LSD-06 (SD1D) is to be 48V
[Explanation]
LSD-08 (SD2D) is to be 48V
LSU-06 (SD1U) is to be 48V
Coil[SW_GS_IS_STOP]
LSU-08 (SD2U) is to be 48V
ERD_SDS_Off_Error
TCD 119
2. Check if SDS switch works normally.
3. Check assembly condition of SDS.

TCD 119 will occur when car is in stop.
Condition of detecting ERD_SDS_Off_Error

1. In case forced slow down occurs
2. Excluding top and bottom floor, SD1U, SD2U are activated during operation
for 540msec and more.
3. Excluding top and bottom floor, SD1D, SD2D are activated during operation
for 540msec and more.
4. Excluding top floor, SD1U is activated at door zone for 540msec and more.
5. Excluding bottom floor, SD1D is activated at door zone for 540msec and
more.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 125 Brake open trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
When speed command is more than 10m/min but real speed is 8m/min
or less, and this continues more than 3 sec. The trouble will be detected.
1. Refer to TCD 86.
2. Check assembly condition of Brake if it works normally.
3. Check the disconnection of Rotary Encoder.
[Explanation]
See TCD 92.
SWD_I[VI_C1BR] Coil[IS_CMD_V_10] Coil[IS_CUR_V_8] Coil[AC_OP_ALP_MODE]
0x8029 0x91E3 0x91EA 0x9041
Coil[RS_ROPE_
Coil[RS_DECELERATION] COMPEN_REQUEST]
0x91BE 0x91A8
Coil[RS_ROPE_COMPEN_RUN]
0x91B5 0x92A8
Coil[IS_CMD_V_8] Coil[IS_CUR_V_1] Coil[AC_OP_ALP_MODE]
0x91E2 0x91E9 0x9041
Coil[A_ALP_RUN_PERMIT] Coil[SW_ALP_DIR_DECISION]
check_out
0x9062 0x92BC
check_out
3060 msec TMC_Start(BREAK_
OFF_DETECT_T)
TMC_Check(BREAK_OFF_
DETECT_T,FINISH_STATE)
TCD125
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 130 Load detector input trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
It will be detected in Input trouble of Load detector
Potential meter (PTM)
1. Perform ‘No Load Point Setting’ (A61E) and ‘Full Load Point
Setting’ (A62E).
- ‘No Load Point Setting’ is priority.
[Explanation]
Detected load by load detector exceeds 135% or is under -25%, and either 2. Check if channel value of each PTM shows on 3rd row normally.
condition continues for 2 sec. and more. - Car load mode (A86E)
[Condition]
Make high speed operation unable with door opening.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 132 Door open lock detection Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] DOLS signal does not go in within 10 sec. after open command
Door open lock detected
and if this condition repeats 3 times, the trouble will be detected.
[Countermeasures]
1. Check door operating. In case that door can’t operate due to a
[Explanation]
Coil[SW_SS_48V_
foreign substance on sill, remove it.
Coil[RS_
RUNNING] Coil[DC_DOLS] Coil[DC_DCO] DOWN_HOLD] 2. Check if DMC CUT of DOR-131 & apparatus box is placed on
NORMAL.
0x91B0 0x90A6 0x9082 0x923C 3. Check open command signal.
If data of 2nd row & 13th column of annunciator is ‘1’, open
Coil[A_AUTO_ Coil[SW_GS_ command is energizing.
DOOR_CLOSE] OPEN_ZONE] SWD_O[VO_R2OP] Check if the volt of CA-01 is 0.7V±0.1V.
check_out
Check the connection & wiring, if the data is ‘0’ and the volt of
0x9256 0x8083
ERD_Door_Err 0x9050 CA-07 is 0V±0.1V.
4. If LED of R2LD relay isn’t off. Check the volt of AB-15 (LDS) &
TMC_Check(OPEN_LOCK_DETECT_T,FINISH_STATE) CA-08 (CDS).
check_out
When door is opened, the volt of AB-15 & CA-08 should be 0V
(OPEN_LOCK_DETECT
_T).Spec = 4000 level.
0x8083
5. When door is opened completely, check if data of 3rd row &
15th column of annunciator is ‘1’. ‘1’ is normal.
6. If the volt of CA-07 is 48V±10%, check the condition of DOLS
(OPEN_LOCK_DETECT
_T).Spec = 10000 contactor. When door is opened, check LD5 (OLS/CLS) of DCD
PCB is turned on. (LED is on in normal)
TMC_Start(OPEN_ 7. Check if RDZ relay operates normally.
LOCK_DETECT_T)
TMC_Check(OPEN_LOCK_ LED of the relay should be turned on with door zone and off
Open_Trouble_Count < 3
DETECT_T,FINISH_STATE) without door zone.
TMC_Start(OPEN_
LOCK_DETECT_T)
Open_Trouble_Count++
TMC_Reset(OPEN_
LOCK_DETECT_T)
Open_Trouble_Count >= 3
TCD 132
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 133 Open_Lock repeated trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
TCD132 occurs 3 times in series
Refer to TCD132.
[Explanation]
If TCD132 occurs, it tries to open door of another floor after moving to another
floor. But if TCD132 occurs 3 times in series, ‘Open Lock repeated trouble’ will
occurs.
The elevator keeps hall/car call unable and stops operation.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 134 Door close lock detection Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Door does not close within 10 sec. after close command,
Door close lock detected
the trouble will be detected.
[Countermeasures]
1. Check door operating. In case that door can’t operate due to a
[Explanation]
foreign substance on sill, remove it.
Coil[A_AUTO_ Coil[SW_GS_
DOOR_CLOSE] DOOR_ZONE] Coil[IS_ZERO_V] Coil[DC_DCO] ERD_Door_Err
2. Check if DMC CUT switch of DOR-131 & apparatus box is
placed on NORMAL.
0x9050 0x9250 0x91F2 0x9082 3. Check close command signal.
If data of 2nd row & 14th column of annunciator is ‘1’, close
SWD_I[VI_CDS] command is energizing.
SWD_O[VO_R2CL] check_out Check if the volt of CA-02 is 0.7V±0.1V.
0x8684 0x802B 4. If LED of R2LD relay isn’t off. Check the volt of AB-15 (LDS) &
Coil[DC_F_CLS] Coil[SW_SV_2ND_FIRE] CA-08 (CDS).
When door is closed, the volt of AB-15 & CA-08 should be 48V
0x90B5 0x9275 level.
SWD_I[VI_LDS] 5. When door is closed, check if data of 3rd row & 12th (LDS) &
13th (CDS) column of annunciator is ‘1’. ‘1’ is normal.
0x802C
TMC_Check(CLOSE_LOCK_ 6. If 12th (LDS) is ‘0’, check the volt of AB-15 and condition of
DETECT_T,FINISH_STATE) TCD 135 landing door.
If 13th (CDS) is ‘0’, check the volt of CA-08 and condition of
Coil[SW_GS_ car door.
Coil[DC_DOLS] OPEN_ZONE]
7. Check if data of 3rd row & 14th column of annunciator is ‘1’.
TMC_Check(FORCE_ 0x90A6 0x9256 ‘1’ is normal.
OPEN_T,FINISH_STATE) 8. Check the condition of DCLS contactor. When door is closed,
check_out
With NUGING : 20 sec check LD5 (OLS/CLS) of DCD PCB is turned on.
Without NUGING : 10 sec TMC_Start (CLOSE_ (LED is on in normal)
LOCK_DETECT_T)
9. Check if RDZ relay operates normally.
TMC_Check(CLOSE_LOCK_
DETECT_T,FINISH_STATE) LED of the relay should be turned on with door zone and off
close_lock_count ++
without door zone.
close_lock_count >= 2
TCD 134
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 135 Close_Lock repeated trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
TCD134 occurs 12 times (can be changed by SPEC) in series
Refer to TCD134.
[Explanation]
1. TCD134 occurs 12 times in series.

2. Detecting number can be changed by SPEC DATA.
Address 0x0714 is for detecting number.
(If the value is 12 or less, minimum 12 will be considered for the detecting
number)
3. Detecting number of TCD134 is 2.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 136 ALP trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
When ALP control panel is out of order.
1. Check if the condition of ALP is normal by annunciator of ALP.
2. Refer to ALP manual.

[Explanation]
In case of power failure, elevator must go to door zone by the power of ALP,
but elevator isn’t operable due to abnormal condition.
Abnormal condition
1. Operation unable due to R5SC off.
2. Operation unable due to floor error.
3. Operation unable due to abnormal signal from DSP.
4. In case that the speed exceeds designated speed.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 140 Discharging voltage of Backup Battery under reference Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
NVRAM is abnormal
1. Check if Backup Battery is normal.
2. Check the voltage of the battery.

[Explanation] If it is under 3.0V, replace the battery.
This trouble is caused by abnormal & disconnection of Backup Battery.
This trouble doesn’t hinder elevator operating. It will be returned to normal after
rescue operation to bottom floor.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 141 Clock chip trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
When RTC chip doesn’t operate well, the trouble occurs.
1. Perform ‘RTC set’ by ‘A69E’.
2. Check the voltage of the battery.

[Explanation] If it is under 3.0V, replace the battery.
In case that RTC chip is abnormal, the trouble occurs. 3. Replace DOC-1XX.
This trouble doesn’t hinder elevator operating.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 145 INV. Door CPU WDT trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
In case that the connection between apparatus box & DCL-24X is
abnormal.
1. Check if the connection between TERM-01 and DRIN-01 is
disconnected.
[Explanation]
The connection between TERM-01 and DRIN-01 is disconnected.

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 146 Air-conditioner Float S/W trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
Float switch is still activated even after drain operation for 1 min.
1. Check the float switch.
[Explanation]
1. This trouble doesn’t hinder elevator operating even if the trouble occurs.
2. Air-conditioner will not operate by this trouble.

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 147 OBS detection Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] [Condition]
The signal of LDC keep off for 20~45 sec. at on position during high
speed operation. (Detecting time is depend on floor height)
This is hold type, so cut safety line and keep elevator inoperable.
[Explanation]
SPD_Function Coil[RS_ Coil[AC_OP_

.OBS_Operation RUNNING] SWD_I[VI_C1ST] SWD_I[VI_C1BR] SAFETY_DRIVE_MODE]
0x91B0 0x802A 0x8029 0x9033 [Countermeasures]

Coil[AC_OP_FHM_ Coil[SW_ALP_ Coil[SW_FS_
START_MODE] DIR_DECISION] Coil[SW_FS_HIGH] HIGH_DETECT] 1. Reset the system by means of reset button on DOC-1XX, and
move the elevator by slow speed.
0x9032 0x92BC 0x9296 0x9297
2. Check the condition of RDZ relay of DOC-1XX.
Coil[IS_ Coil[AC_OP_ Coil[AC_OP_ Coil[AC_OP_LOWEST_ - If elevator is with door zone, LED of relay is to be off.
CUR_V_0] FHM_MODE] ALP_MODE] FLOOR_SLOW] - If elevator is without door zone, LED of relay is to be on.
check_out
0x9E8 0x9031 0x9041 0x9040
3. Check if RDZ relay is mounted on the socket correctly.
check_out SWD_I[VI_LDC] == old_LDC_state 4. Check if POSi is correct.
TMC_Resett(OBS_
LDC_ON_DETECT_T) If it is incorrect, replace it.
0x8025
TMC_Start(OBS_
LDC_ON_DETECT_T)
TMC_Check(OBS_LDC_ON_
DETECT_T,FINISH_STATE)
TCD147
SWD_I[VI_LDC] old_LDC_state
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 150 SD1D Over Speed detection Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Over speed is detected at SD1D zone and emergency stop. [Countermeasures]
1. When SD1D is activated, check the volt of HA-02.
Normal: 48V → 0V.
2. When SD1D is activated, check address 0x8023 by MEMORY
[Explanation] READ MODE (A21E)
1. In case that the condition of forced deceleration is detected. Normal: ‘00’ → ‘01’.
(Coil[SV_FORCE_DECEL] = ON) 3. Check the assembly condition of SD1D.
>> The speed is 15m/min higher than the command at where SD1D is If necessary, adjust it.
activated. And if this condition keeps for 150 msec. and more, the trouble
is detected.
But, if the speed is less than 30 m/min, No trouble is detected.
2. In case that the condition of forced deceleration is not detected.
Speed 60 m/min 90 m/min 105 m/min
( Coil[SV_FORCE_DECEL] = OFF )
1) 60m/min Distance 1000 mm 1400 mm 1800 mm
>> If the speed is higher than limit speed below according to regular speed at
where SD1D is activated, the trouble will be detected. * Above distance is from ‘0’ level of bottom floor to the center of
switch roller.
2) 90m/min and higher
where SD1D is activated and this condition keeps for 150 msec. and more,
Regular speed 60 m/min 90 m/min 105 m/min
Limit speed 57.6 m/min 87.0 m/min 102.0 m/min

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 151 SD2D Over Speed detection Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
1. When SD2D is activated, check the volt of HA-03.
Normal: 48V → 0V.
2. When SD2D is activated, check address 0x8024 by MEMORY
(Coil[SV_FORCE_DECEL] = ON) 3. Check the assembly condition of SD2D.
>> The speed is 15m/min higher than the command at where SD2D is If necessary, adjust it.
is detected.
But, if the speed is less than 30 m/min, No trouble is detected. Speed 90 m/min 105 m/min
( Coil[SV_FORCE_DECEL] = OFF ) Distance 2000 mm 2700 mm
where SD2D is activated and this condition keeps for 150 msec. and more, * Above distance is from ‘0’ level of bottom floor to the center of
the trouble will be detected. switch roller.
Regular speed 90 m/min 105 m/min
Limit speed 87.6 m/min 102.6 m/min

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 157 SD1U Over Speed detection Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
1. When SD1U is activated, check the volt of HA-06.
Normal: 48V → 0V.
2. When SD1U is activated, check address 0x8021 by MEMORY
(Coil[SV_FORCE_DECEL] = ON) 3. Check the assembly condition of SD1U.
>> The speed is 15m/min higher than the command at where SD1U is If necessary, adjust it.
is detected.
But, if the speed is less than 30 m/min, No trouble is detected.
Speed 60 m/min 90 m/min 105 m/min
( Coil[SV_FORCE_DECEL] = OFF ) Distance 1000 mm 1400 mm 1800 mm
1) 60m/min
>> If the speed is higher than limit speed below according to regular speed at * Above distance is from ‘0’ level of top floor to the center of
where SD1U is activated, the trouble will be detected. switch roller.
2) 90m/min and higher
where SD1U is activated and this condition keeps for 150 msec. and more,
Regular speed 60 m/min 90 m/min 105 m/min
Limit speed 57.6 m/min 87.0 m/min 102.0 m/min

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 158 SD2U Over Speed detection Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Over speed is detected at SD2U zone and emergency stop. [Countermeasures]
1. When SD2U is activated, check the volt of HA-07.
Normal: 48V → 0V.
2. When SD2U is activated, check address 0x8022 by MEMORY
(Coil[SV_FORCE_DECEL] = ON) 3. Check the assembly condition of SD2U.
>> The speed is 15m/min higher than the command at where SD2U is If necessary, adjust it.
is detected.
But, if the speed is less than 30 m/min, No trouble is detected. Speed 90 m/min 105 m/min
( Coil[SV_FORCE_DECEL] = OFF ) Distance 2000 mm 2700 mm
where SD2U is activated and this condition keeps for 150 msec. and more, * Above distance is from ‘0’ level of top floor to the center of
the trouble will be detected. switch roller.
Regular speed 90 m/min 105 m/min
Limit speed 87.6 m/min 102.6 m/min

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 164 Emergency stop detection Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Emergency stop detected, elevator is suddenly stopped during run with [Countermeasures]
more than 10m/min speed by the trouble in relation to R/E.
1. Check whether MAINT(Inspection) switch has been operated
during driving.
2. Verify whether switch and connectors in PCB have had
[Explanation] bad contacts.
3. Check if R/E is disconnected.
run_stop Coil[RS_RUNNING] Coil[IS_CUR_V_10] 4. Check if LDS &CDS operate normally.
TCD 164
5. Check the state of R5SC relay.
0x91EE
0x91B0 6. Check the state of ALARM LED.
TCD 92 7. Check the flickering state of SYS1 LED inside DOC-1XX.
8. Check the flickering state of SYS2 LED inside DOC-1XX.
9. Check if safety switches are activated. (Man-hole, pit, SCS)
TCD 93
* In case of emergency stop with 10m/min speed and more
The reason can be analyzed by ERROR LOG Table (A42E)
TCD 94 - Trace monitor
* In case of emergency stop with 5m/min ~ 10m/min speed

Coil[RS_RUNNING] run_stop The reason can be analyzed by A28E.
0x91B0
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 168 Speed difference (real speed detection) Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When the speed difference between command & real is more than [Countermeasures]
30m/min, the trouble is detected.
1. Refer to TCD 60 and check if SPEC is correct in accordance
with the field.
2. Check if brake open & close as its function.
[Explanation] 3. Check disconnection of Rotary Encoder (AD Connect).
Refer to TCD 92.
Coil[IS_CUR_V_15] Coil[IS_CMD_V_15] SWD_O[VO_C1BR] Coil[SV_DDLP_CMD] 4. Check balancing rate between car & C.WT.
(It must be within 0.45 ~ 0.55)
0x91EC 0x91E4 0x8080 0x9206
SWD_I[VI_C1ST] SWD_I[VI_R5SC] TCD 164 Coil[SV_INV_SW_FAIL]
0x802A 0x8001 0x9210
Coil[RS_FAST_
SWD_I[VI_C1BR] SWD_I[VI_LDS] SWD_I[VI_CDS] RUN_COMMAND] check_out
0x8029 0x802C 0x802B 0x91B1
abs(SVD_Cmd_V - SVD_Cur_V)
check_out >= 30 speed_err_count ++ speed_err_count
SVD_Cmd_V <
speed_err_count > 3
SVD_Cur_V TCD 168
speed_err_count > 12
TCD 168
check_out
=0 speed_err_count
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 170 Operation direction trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When abnormal operating direction is detected. [Condition]

DIR LED(Red) would be lighting.
[Explanation]
[Countermeasures]
Coil[IS_CUR_V_8] Coil[RS_RUNNING] 1. Check if DIR LED is on.

check_out
2. If DIR LED is on, change the position of DIR jumper in
0x91EA 0x91B0 DOC-1XX.
3. Switch to MAINT(Inspection) operation, and perform
UP/DOWN operation for a little while, to check right/reverse
540 msec matter in operating direction.
check_out Coil[RS_UP_RUN] enco_diff < 0 In reverse, change DIR jumper in DOC-1XX.
TMC_Start(DIR_ 4. When rerunning, make sure to reset.
0x91AE ERROR_DETECT_T) 5. Verify if BIT 8 of SPEC1 is OFF.
6. Still no effect, change 2-phases of MOTOR output line.
Coil[RS_DOWN_RUN] enco_diff > 0
0x91AF
TMC_Reset(DIR_
ERROR_DETECT_T)
TMC_Check((DIR_ERROR_
SWD_Emergency_Call DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE)
TCD170
ICC_Set_Sys_Output_Port
(RE_DIR_ERROR, ON)
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 171 Synchronous position trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Synchronous position trouble detected [Countermeasures]
1. If CP is normal and elevator stops due to power failure,

the elevator goes down to bottom floor with ACD=0B and then
[Explanation] transfer to ACD=27.
2. If TCD171 occurs after power off/on and 7, 5, 4 Bit is set
When floor information is lost, the trouble is detected. 1) Check backup battery on DOC-1XX is normal.
2) If the volt of backup battery is less than 3.0V, replace it.
4. In case that 6 Bit is set, Check the trouble concerning SDS
Refer to TCD150, 151, 157, 158.
5. In case that 0 Bit is set,
1) Refer to POSI OFF(TCD 114).
[Countermeasures] 2) Check if elevator is moved by brake opening in power off.
*Trouble shooting procedure
Use ERROR LOG TABLE(A42E) on annuciator.
Check information of TCD171 on Trace Data display
Change 4 Byte to Bit (3rd row, 13th~16th column) to check.
Each Bit shows the reason of the trouble(7~0 Bit is available)
15 .. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Backup SDS Direction Speed - - - Level

- RAM Over error in error in 500mm
error Speed power power
failure failure
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 177 Emergency stop occurred frequently Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] It is detected that the failures of high speed running prohibited have [Countermeasures]
occurred 12 times within 10 min
1. Check Error Log Table by A42E, find out the trouble occurred
frequently and perform trouble shooting.
[Explanation]
It is hold type, prohibit operation by R5SCafter opening door at door zone
Coil[EM_EO_ Coil[AC_OP_
old_fast_run_cut FAST_RUN_CUT] MAINT_MODE] +1 E_Stop_Count[9]
0x90F4 0x9030
+1 E_Stop_10M_Count
E_Stop_10M_Count >= 12
TCD 177
Coil[EM_EO_FAST_RUN_CUT] old_fast_run_cut
0x90F4
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 178 Safety drive occurred frequently Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Detected that rescue running have occurred more than 6 times [Countermeasures]
within 10 min.
1. Door Zone 외에 정지하는 원인을 찾는다.
2. 주행 중에 비상 정지하는 경우는 Error Log Table 참조한다.
3. 착상 시 Door Zone에 못 미치거나 지나쳐서 정지하는 경우는
[Explanation]
SPEC의 착상 제어용 파라메터 설정이 바르게 되어 있는지
It is hold type, prohibit operation by R5SCafter opening door at door zone 확인 한다. ( Pgc_Gain → ADDR:0x0212 )
1. Search the reason for stopping out of door zone.
2. If stopping during running, refer to the error log table,
Coil[SW_FS_SAFETY_DRIVE_DETECT] tmp 3. When below-stopping or over-stopping during leveling occurs
verify whether parameter setting for the control of leveling is
0x92A8 light. (Pgc_Gain → ADDR:0x0212)
old_safety_drive tmp Coil[AC_OP_MAINT_MODE]

+1 S_Drv_Count[9]
0x9030
+1 S_Drv_10M_Count
tmp old_safety_drive
Coil[SW_GS_IS_STOP] SWD_I[VI_LDC]
TCD 178
S_Drv_10M_Count >= 6 0x925D 0x8025

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 182 Operation over duty trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Count number of brake opening, if it is 180 times in 1 hour. [Countermeasures]
Stop at door zone with door opened for 10 min., and return
normal operation automatically.
[Explanation]
Stop elevator in order to protect brake coil for 10 min..
[Condition]
Stand by 10 min. after door open at door zone.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 184 SDS forced deceleration occurred frequently Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Forced deceleration occurs 3 times in series. [Countermeasures]
1. Check if Slow Down S/W works normally.

2. Check if assembly condition of Slow Down S/W is correct.
[Explanation]
Installation
Elevator lands at top or bottom floor by forced deceleration in case that the distance 60 m/ min 90 m/ min 105 m/ min
distance
between landing level & SDS roller is farther than installation distance when SDS is
activated. SD1U(D) 1000 mm 1400 mm 1800 mm
If above condition occurs 3 times, high speed operation is cut with door opened at SD2U(D) x 2000 mm 2700 mm
door zone, TCD184 is appeared and system holds the trouble.
3. If the allowance is 50mm higher, adjust Slow Down S/W again.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 188 OLS trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] OLS is abnormal [Countermeasures]

In case that OLS is activated for 1080 msec. When CLS & CDS is
1. Check if door PCB is normal.
activated, the trouble is detected.
2. Check CDS(13th column), CLS(14th), & OLS(15th) of 3rd row
on annunciator. (If Bit is 1, switch is activated)
[Explanation] 3. Check the volt CA-07 on DOC-1XX, Y2-03 on DOM-100, &
PJ1-13 on door PCB.
SWD_I[VI_CDS] Coil[DC_F_CLS] SWD_I[VI_DOLS] SWD_I[VI_RDMC] ERD_Door_Err If OLS is activated : 0V
If OLS is not activated: 48V
0x802B 0x90B5 0x802D 0x8060
4. Check if wiring & connecting is correct.
Coil[AC_OP_ Coil[SW_SS_48V_ Coil[SW_GS_
MAINT_MODE] DOWN_HOLD] POWER_READY] Coil[DC_DCPU] TCD97
Coil[AC_OP_FIRE_ Coil[AC_OP_ Coil[SW_SV_

FIGHTING_MODE] FIRE_MODE] 1ST_FIRE] check_out
Coil[AC_OP_ Coil[SW_SV_
FIREMAN_MODE] 2ND_FIRE]
check_out 1080 msec

TMC_Start(OLS_
ERROR_DETECT_T)
TMC_Check(OLS_ERROR_
DETECT_T,FINISH_STATE) Coil[SW_GS_DOOR_ZONE]
TCD 188
0x9250
SWD_I[VI_CDS] SWD_I[VI_DOLS] TCD97

R TCD 188
0x802B 0x802D
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 192 Door position trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Door trouble [Countermeasures]

1. Check if thermal, voltage, & current are normal.
2. Replace DCD-21X.
[Explanation]
In case of the trouble of door thermal, under voltage, over voltage & current,
TCD192 occurs.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 200 CNET LON communication trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] DPRAM communication between Main LON and i186 does not operate [Countermeasures]
1. If the trouble isn’t disappeared after system reset is done on
DOC-1XX, Check if ROM(OS ROM) of DOC-1XX & ROM Main
LON are mounted correctly.
[Explanation] 2. If the trouble isn’t disappeared after performing 1 item above,
Replace ROM(OS ROM) of DOC-1XX & ROM Main LON.
3. Replace DOC-1XX even if nothing is improved after performing
I186EC_Port3_Input & 0x20
Coil[VALID_186_TOKEN] item 2 above.
*SYS_INPUT_PORT & 0x10 Coil[VALID_186_TOKEN]

+1 err_count
0x9300
err_count > 5
TCD 200
*SYS_INPUT_PORT & 0x04
[Condition]
LON LED on DOC-1XX will light off.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 202 Car communication trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Car LON communication trouble on main OPB( OPB ID = 1 ) [Countermeasures]

1. Check the ON/OFF state of LON LED in DOC-1XX
(0.06 sec. cycle when normal).
2. Check the ON/OFF state of DCL-24X LED
[Explanation] (0.2 sec. cycle when normal).
3. Verify if the connector(SC) for LON communication is
CND_OPB_Node_State & 0x01 normally connected.
TCD 202
4. Verify if OPB ID is 1 (DIP 1 ‘ON’).
5. Verify if DCS-24X has a terminal resistor(DIP 8) set.
6. Measure the resistance between pins No. 1, 2 of SC connector.
If it is approximately 10 OHM, normal.
If there is no resistance, check for disconnection.
* TCD 202 is detected on MAIN LON and write in DPRAM.
7. Replace ROM(OS ROM) of DOC-1XX & ROM Main LON.
variable of appropriate data is read and saved is CND_OPB_Node_State.
8. Replace DCL-24X.
9. Replace DOC-1XX.
[Condition]
LON LED of DOC-1XX or LED of DCL-24X is flickering with 1.2 sec. cycle
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 211 Other elevator trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Communication error with other car is detected in duplex operation. [Countermeasures]
1. In case of duplex, No.1 of the SPEC1(DIP S/W) must be on.

In case of simplex, it must be off.
2. Check the condition of communication line between 2 elevators.
[Explanation] The communication line must be a shield wire.
3. Check if terminal resistor(HJP-SH Jumper) is connected.
1. In duplex, In case there is no transmission data for 1 sec. from other elevator,
In case of figure below, don’t connect terminal resistor of No. 1
the trouble occurs.
but No. 2.
2. When G/A transmission from other is failed 4 times in series, the trouble occurs.
No. 1 No. 2
HJP SH
HJP SH
SH SL SL SH
DHG-16X
DHG-16X
DHG-16X
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 217 Hall button jam detection Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When hall button is being pushed continuously, the trouble is detected. [Countermeasures]
1. Check the floor where button jam is detected.

The floor can be checked by ‘A21E’.
[Explanation]
2. If abnormal, replace the button.
When hall button is being pushed for the time(Default :180 sec.) that is designated
by SPEC, TCD 217 will occur.
Button_Jam_Detect[0][UP_INDX]
TCD 217
Button_Jam_Detect[0][DN_INDX]
The floor button Jam detected
Address Floor
0x9954 1st floor ~ 8th floor UP Button
0x9955 9th floor ~ 16th floor UP Button
0x9956 17th floor ~ 24th floor UP Button
0x9957 25th floor ~ 32nd floor UP Button
0x9958 1st floor ~ 8th floor DOWN Button
0x9959 9th floor ~ 16th floor DOWN Button
0x995A 17th floor ~ 24th floor DOWN Button
0x995B 25th floor ~ 32nd floor DOWN Button
Each floor is matched with each Bit.

Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 223 Hall nod trouble (More than 1) Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] 1 or more communication trouble on DHG-16X, detected. [Countermeasures]

1. Check the floor of communication not activated by
ANN - A21E and the type of button to check DHG-16X of the
failed floor for failure.
[Explanation]
[Checking of hall button trouble]
Enter as below on annunciator
HND_Fail_Node[ 0 ]
TCD 223 K: A21E
ADDR:DAT K : 8762E
0x8762
If 8762=x02(0000 0010)
DFG-16X of 2nd floor is failure.
If 8762 =x30(0011 0000)
* HND_Fail_Node : 4Byte( 32bit ) DFG-16X of 5th, 6th floors are failure.
If transmission failures to the appropriate floor of the appropriate type of button
occur 3 times or more, set it to ‘1’. To see floor 8th or higher is required to enter KEY-PAD ‘0’ of
annunciator.
2. Verify if the control panel XHA MIC is connected, and see if

Address Floor
voltage between HA plug pin 3-4 of DHG-16X at failed floor
0x8762 1st floor ~ 8th floor is DC24V.
3. Verify if the ID of DHG-16X at failed floor is set correctly.
0x8763 9th floor ~ 16th floor 4. Resistance between HA connector pin1-2 in DHG-16X at the
0x8764 17th floor ~ 24th floor failed floor must be 2±0.5Ω.
If not so, the pulse transformer(PT1, position in DHG-16X)
0x8765 25th floor ~ 32nd floor in DHG-16X is a failure.
5. Check between pin 3-4 of HA connector in DHG-16X at the
Each floor is matched with each Bit. failed floor. if it is open circuit, replace DHG-16X.
Ex) ADDR:0x8762 - DATA:0x04 means 3rd floor is out of order.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 224 Hall nod trouble (All) Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] Communication error with all floor in hall line is detected [Countermeasures]
1. Check if the jumper(HJP-SH) of DOC-1XX is set correctly.

2. Check if XHA MIC of DOP-1XX is connected.
3. Check if SH connector of DOC-1XX is connected.
[Explanation] 4. Check if terminal resistor(120 Ω) in diverging box at bottom floor
is connected.
5. Check if the volt of XHA MIC of DOP-1XX is DC24V after
Normal_Floor[ 0 ] NCD_P_SVC_Fl[ 0 ]
check_floor removing XHA MIC .
1) 1th ~ 8th floor: XHA 3-4 is to be DC24V.
check_floor
TCD 224 4) 25th ~ 32th floor: TB2(Terminal Block) 5-6 is to be DC24V.
H_Data_Receive_Wait_Counter == 0
[Condition]
When TCD224 occurs, operation mode would be ACD26 and perform backup
operation.
Revision: 0
○ Operation CPU
TCD 237 CRT communication trouble Detection Application Si210
○ Speed CPU
[Meaning] When communication error between CRT & CP occurs [Countermeasures]
1. Check if CRT option is applied.

(When SPEC has CRT option even if a project does not apply
for CRT, the trouble will occur)
[Explanation]
Crt_Id ADDR:0x0002
In case that there is no receive data from CRT for 8 sec., TCD237 would be occurs.
Crt_Operation ADDR:0x0020
2. Check if the connection between CRT & CP is correct.

CRT_Comm_Error_Counter == 0 (SM connector)
TCD 237
Communication cable should be twisted & shielded.
3. Check if HJP-SL jumper is connected.
Spec Table
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary, No-mark:Decimal 00H:Without,01H:With)

PART Address LABEL DEFAULT
DATA DESCRIPTION
1. 0000H
FUNC 0002H Crt_id *H CRT Supervisory panel ID ( E/L No .ID) 01H
-TION 0004H Housing_Corp 00 / 01 Special Option (Korea) 00H
SPEC 0006H Observation 00 / 01 Observation E/L : 01 00H
0008H Car_Door_Lock 00 / 01 Car Door Locking Option : 01 00H
AH - EH Unused 00H
0010H Earthquake_Slow 00 / 01 Earthquake Low speed operation 00H
0012H Earthquake 00 / 01 Earthquake Control operation 00H
0014H Voice_to_RS232 00 / 01 SAV,MAV,DAV DOOR, DOV-200 applied 00H
0016H Rope_Compen 00 / 01 Slack rope compen. 00H
0018H Weight Sensor *H Load Sensor Type + Number of sensor
Strain-Gauge:20H, Pontio-Meter:40H
DFTR:80H , Weighing Device : 00H 21H
ex) Two P-Meter installed: 42,43H
One S-Gauge installed: 21H
001AH ESMI_ID *H ESMI ID Setting 00H
001CH ESMI_Operation 00 / 01 ESMI Operation 00H
001EH ALP_Operation 00 / 01 ALP Operation 00H
0020H CRT_Operation 00 / 01 Supervisory panel 00H
0022H Running_Open 00 / 01 RUNNING OPEN function 00H
0024H 00 / 01 Anti-nuisance control
Mis_Call_Cancel 00H
(Control spec: 015A setting)
0026H *H Car call cancel function
Call_Cancel (00:No func., 01:One touch, 02:Two Touch, 01H
04:One Touch Holding)
0028H Hall_Chime_Gong 00 / 01 Chime attached to hall 00H
002AH Hall call cancel function
Hall_Call_Cancel *H 00H
( 00:No func., 01:One Touch, 02:Two Touch)
002CH Fireman_Drive 00 / 01 Fireman operation function 00H
002EH Door close standby when fireman operation
Fireman_Open_Cut 00 / 01 arriving(When Door open B/T pressed 01H
OPEN :01H)
0030H Call_Cancel_Non_Stop_
00 / 01 Call deletion function by Non Stop switch On 01H
SW
0032H Auto_Private_Power 00 / 01 Standby power operation 00H
0034H Voice_Guide_Spec1 1 Announ. 1 bit : DOWN 0 bit : UP
Assigned per 3 bit : Getting off 2 bit : Door closing
FFH
1 bit 5 bit : Overload 4 bit : Full(80%)
7 bit : VIP 6 bit : Service floor
0036H Voice_Guide_Spec2 1 Announ. 1 bit : Power fail 0 bit : Fire detec.
Assigned per 3 bit : Failure 2 bit : Auto rescue
1 bit 5 bit : Standby power 4 bit : Parking FFH
operation
6 bit : Earthquake
0038H Chime_RTC_Spec Night chime prohibition function (When

00/01 applied:<DCV-PCB> Volume, Chime Cut) 00H
(Time control function spec setting)
003AH Ref_FL_RTC_Spec Function of changing reference floor 1stor
2nd
00 / 01 00H
According to the traffic.
(Time control function spec setting)
003CH Force_Stop_Operation Compulsion stop FL function(01H)
00 / 01 00H
(Compulsion stop floor spec setting)
1

DATA DESCRIPTION
003EH OBS_Operation 00 / 01 OBS switch function(01H) 01H
0040H Heavy_Wind_Oper 00 / 01 Heavy wind control operation(01H) 00H
0042H Russia_Code 00 / 01 RUSSIA CODE 00H
0044H Rope_Gripper 00 / 01 Rope Gripper 00H
0046H Load_Auto_Adjust 00 / 01 Load auto compensation function(01H) 00H
0048H Fire detection sensor attached to escape 00H
Exit Floor Fire Detect 00 / 01 floor
nd
(Exist 2 escape floor) (UAE)
004AH Fireman operation without F4FS signal 00H
M’sia Fireman 00 / 01
(M’sia)
004CH Oversea_Field 00 / 01 Emergency E/L 00H
004EH Cut the priority service for operation
Dir_Reverse 00 / 01 01H
direction by car call
0050H Photo_Shoe 00 / 01 Photo Shoe (01H) 01H
0052H Housing Corp.Local Local CRT (Korea) 01H
00 / 01
CRT
0054H Hall_Lantern 00 / 01 Hall Lantern (01H) 00H
0056H Annunc. Starting time for arrival(Unit:sec)
Voice_Output_Time *H 02H
* Available range(2~5sec)
0058H Chime Starting time for arrival(Unit:sec)
Chime_Output_Time *H * In case that the annunc. Is applied 4sec, 04H
is not applied 2sec
005AH Multi-step deceleration function
Multi_Step_Decel 00 / 01 00H
* Address 011AH, 0422H, 0424H
005CH Housing_Corp_Fire_
00 / 01 Special fire option (Korea) 00H
Option
005EH Operation for draining water from Air-
Cooler operation 00 / 01 00H
conditioner
*Time 0060H Chime_Removal_Time 23 hour is Chime/Gong prohibition starting time(Hour) 22H
control registered
spec 0062H as 23H Chime/Gong prohibition starting time 00H
Chime_Removal_Time
(RTC) (ex) (Minute)
0064H To prohibit Chime/Gong prohibition finishing time
Chime_Removal_Time 06H
noise for ( Hour)
0066H Chime_Removal_Time 23:30~06:30 Chime/Gong prohibition finishing time
(Minute)
0060H : 23H
0062H : 30H 00H
0064H : 06H
0066H : 30H
(Address :
Time)
0068H Ref1_Select_Time Same as Start time for using 1st reference floor(Hour) 18H
st
006AH Ref1_Select_Time Above Start time for using 1 reference floor 00H
(Minute)
006CH Ref1_Select_Time Finish time for using 1st reference floor 19H
(Hour)
006EH Ref1_Select_Time Finish time for using 1st reference floor 00H
(Minute)
0070H Ref2_Select_Time Same as Start time for using 2nd reference floor (Hour) 07H
Above
0072H Ref2_Select_Time Start time for using 2nd reference floor 00H
(Minute)
0074H Ref2_Select_Time Finish time for using 2nd reference floor 08H
(Hour)
2

DATA DESCRIPTION
nd
0076H Ref2_Select_Time Finish time for using 2 reference floor 00H
(Minute)
2. 0100H Capacity *H Capacity CODE
Cont-
rol *(16=17 Person
spec persons) 6 8 9 10 11
s
Code 06H 08H 09H 0AH 0BH
Person
13 15 17 20 24
s
Code 0DH 0FH 11H 14H 18H
0102H Motor *H MOTOR CODE
(310V, 50Hz, 4P, INV MOTOR)
*Speed kW 4.5 5.5 7.5 9.5
90m/min, Motor Data 01H 02H 03H 04H
15kw => “08” kW 11 15 18 22
Data 05H 06H 07H 08H
(MOTOR for LOCAL modernization)
kW 7.5 11 15 22
Data 0AH 0BH 0CH 0DH
(MOTOR for modernization)
kW 7.5 11 15 22
(Sigma MOTOR)
kW 4.5 5.5 7.5 9.5 11
Data 21H 22H 23H 24H 25H
kW 13 15 18 22
(Si-MMR MOTOR)
Kw 5.5 6.7 11.1 8.8 10.7
Data 60H 61H 62H 63H 64H
Kw 17.7 9.7 9.9 11.7S 11.7Y
Data 65H 66H 67H 68H 69H
Kw 19.4
Data 6AH
0104H Rated speed CODE (m/min)
Speed 15 30 45 60
Contract_Velocity *H Code 01H 02H 03H 04H
Speed 75 90 105
Code 05H 06H 07H
0106H TR M/C CODE
Worm Gear Type:01H
*H 01H
Helical Gear Type:02H
GEARLESS Type: 04H
0108H Traction_Machine_code T/M M/C CODE(Worm Gear Type)
TKXS TKXS TKM TKM TKL
38.5 22.67 38.5 22.67 47
01H 02H 03H 04H 05H
TKL TKXL TKXL TYS TYM
26.67 47 26.67 31.33 38
06H 07H 08H 09H 0AH
TYS TYS TYS TYM TKXL
56 56 28.33 67 26.67
0BH 0CH 0DH 0EH 0FH
3

DATA DESCRIPTION
*H ex) TM M/C CODE(Worm Gear Type)

TKXS(X)38.5
TKL TKM TKM TKM EM
M/C TYPE : TKXS
25.33 30.33 45.5 62 65
(X) :
38.5 : Gear ratio 10H 11H 12H 13H 14H
OBH:TYS 56/710 TKL TKL TKL TKL TYS
OCH:TYS 56/600 31.33 37.5 55 75 31.33
08H:TKXL 26.67/600
15H 16H 17H 18H 19H
0FH:TKXL 26.67/520
TYS TYS EM TYS TKM
37 37.5 56 42 67
1AH 1BH 1CH 1DH 1EH
TKM EM WLC-2 WLC-2 WLC-2
**Caution** 17.25 24.5 24 28 32.67
DL 49 1FH 20H 21H 22H 23H
: Dalian Local TR WLC-2 WLC-2 WLC-2 EM EM
M/C 22 25.67 38.5 27.67 53
(49/620) 24H 25H 26H 27H 28H
TYS TYS DL DL
DL 27.5 21.75 33.33 49 27.5
: Dalian Local TR 29H 2AH 2BH 2CH
M/C TYS TYS TKL
(27.5/620) 37 42 23.25
30H 31H 32H
TR M/C CODE (Helical Gear Type)
H438B H422B
H437C H439C
(-S) (-S)
36.41 38.68
37.85 21.92
01H 02H 03H 04H
H322C H421C H317C H309B
21.69 20.98 17.371 9.0
05H 06H 07H 08H
H438B H422B H438B
HYS
(-2) (-2) (-D)
8.98
37.85 21.92 37.85
09H 0AH 0BH 0CH
H422B
(-D)
21.92
0DH
TR M/C CODE(Gearless Code)
GL_103 GL_212 GL_YASKAWA
01H 02H 03H
GL_MMR GL_MMR
GL_MMR_480
_400 _410
04H 05H 06H
010AH IGBT Capacity (A)
IGBT *H 50,75 100 150 200 03H
01H 02H 03H 04H
4

DATA DESCRIPTION
010CH 1 Turn(13kW or more) 01H
2 Turn(11kW or less) 02H
01H
CT_Turn *H
3 Turn 03H
4 Turn 04H
010EH Encoder pulse count
Encoder *H 72 512 1024 03H
01H 02H 03H
0110H ROPING CODE
Roping *H 1:1 2:1 4:1 01H
01H 02H 04H
0112H Maintenance and floor height measurement
Maint_Velocity *H operation speed CODE 01H
15m/min ⇒ 01H, 30 m/min ⇒ 02H
0114H Brake_C_Cntl 00 / 01 Brake current control function 01H
0116H Brake_Current *H Brake maintain current (00H ~ 32H) 00H
0118H Unused
011AH 2nd uniform velocity data (When applied Multi-
Second_Ref_V *H step deceleration function) 00H
* Refer to the Rated speed code
011CH High FHM speed code
* Refer to the Rated speed code
High_FHM-V *H 00H
Caution: Set the data smaller than permitted
speed that lift crash into buffer
011EH Permitting normal operation after 2nd
Two_Speed_Err_Run 00 / 01 00H
deceleration error occurrence (01H)
0120H Acceleration *H Acceleration 06H
0122H Jerk *H Jerk 06H
0124H PMSM_ENC_DIR *H MAIN ENCORDER Direction decision
0126H 0x01；immediately stop 0x02; after 02H
Motor_Thermal *H
leveling stop
0128H 0x01; immediately stop 0x02; after leveling 02H
Slack Rope Switch *H
stop
012AH C1SW *H 00H
0142H- Compensation chain/T-cable load compen. 00H
Compen_Rope_Adjust *H
0144H (For Strain Gauge) – Field setting 00H
0146H- No load Offset point 00H
0148H No_Load_Point *H
- Field setting 00H
014AH- 00H
Full load Offset point
014CH Full_Load_Point *H
- Field setting 00H
014EH – Half load Offset point 00H
0150 H Half_Load_Point *H
- Field setting 00H
0152H Inv_Noload_Cur No load current compensation data 00H
0154H Inv_Slip_C Motor 2nd time constant compensation data 00H

0156H Unused
0158H Full_Load_Detect_
*H Bypass point of load 50H
Percent
5

DATA DESCRIPTION
015AH Nuisance call detection count :HEX
No_Of_Mis_Call *H 00H
ex)Total 10 floors B/D Æ 10*0.8=8
015CH-
LDC_Point.On *H LDC ON – DELAY PULSE COUNT 00H
0162H
0164H -
LDC_Point.Off *H LCD OFF – DELAY PULSE COUNT 00H
016AH
016CH –
LDU_Point.On *H LDU ON – DELAY PULSE COUNT 00H
0172H
0174H –
LDU_Point.Off *H LDU OFF – DELAY PULSE COUNT 00H
017AH
017CH –
LDD_Point.On *H LDD ON – DELAY PULSE COUNT 00H
0182H
0184H –
LDD_Point.Off *H LDD OFF – DELAY PULSE COUNT 00H
018AH
018CH –
Unused
019AH
019CH-
Unused
01A2H
6
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary,No-mark:Decimal 00H:without,01H:with)
PART Address LABEL
DATA DESCRIPTION DEFALT
3. 0200H INV_V_PI_Gain *H Input data within 46H ~ 82H(70~130) 64H
Invert 0202H Inv_Linear_10 *H Speed command when level before 10mm 07H
er 0204H Inv_Comp_Dist *H Advanced distance adjusting value for 06H
spec leveling control
0206H Inv_Adj_125 *H Compen. value of distance 125mm 0FH
0208H Load_Compen_Gain 30H
* Reverse shock Adj. Load compen. value gain OR
1. Opposite side:↑ *H (E/L speed; 60m/min -> 30H 50H
E/L speed ; 90~105m/min->50H)
2. Straight side: ↓
020AH Gain value during regener. 07H
Load_Regen_Factor *H (E/L speed; 60m/min -> 07H OR
E/L speed ; 90~105m/min->1EH) 1EH
020CH Load_Compen_Offset[0] *H Higher floor rope compen. 00H
(Not applied compen. Chain)
020EH Load_Compen_Offset[1] *H Intermediate floor rope compen. 00H
0210H Load_Compen_Offset[2] *H Lower floor rope compen. 00H
Profile deceleration specification
0212H Pgc_Gain *H 10H
position gain (Long distance traveling)
Profile deceleration specification
0214H Short_Pgc_Gain *H 00H
position gain (Shot distance traveling)
7
PART Address LABEL
DATA DESCRIPTION DEFAUT
4. 0300H Total *H Total floor (Number of shelter plate installed) 8
Floor 0306H Display_Char[0][0] 20H Unused 20H
spec 0308H Display_Char[0][1] 20H Unused 20H
030AH Display_Char[1][0] *H 1FL 2-figures indicating character ‘B’
(Nothing:20H)
030CH Display_Char[1][1] *H 1FL 1-figure indicating character ‘1’
030EH Display_Char[2][0] *H 2FL 2-figures ASCII CODE ‘’
0310H Display_Char[2][1] *H 2FL 1-figure "0" 30H "A" 41H ‘1‘
0312H Display_Char[3][0] *H 3FL 2-figures "1" 31H "B" 42H ‘‘
0314H Display_Char[3][1] *H 3FL 1-figure "2" 32H "C" 43H ‘2’
0316H Display_Char[4][0] *H 4FL 2-figures "3" 33H "D" 44H ‘‘
0318H Display_Char[4][1] *H 4FL 1-figure "4" 34H "E" 45H ‘3‘
031AH Display_Char[5][0] *H 5FL 2-figures "5" 35H "F" 46H ‘’
031CH Display_Char[5][1] *H 5FL 1-figure "6" 36H "G" 47H ‘5‘
031EH Display_Char[6][0] *H 6FL 2-figures "7" 37H "H" 48H ‘’
0320H Display_Char[6][1] *H 6FL 1-figure "8" 38H "L" 4CH ‘6‘
0322H Display_Char[7][0] *H 7FL 2-figures "9" 39H "M" 4DH ‘’
0324H Display_Char[7][1] *H 7FL 1-figure "U" 55H "P" 50H ‘7‘
0326H Display_Char[8][0] *H 8FL 2-figures Nothi ‘’
20H “-“ 2DH
ng
0328H Display_Char[8][1] *H 8FL 1-figure ‘8‘
032AH Display_Char[9][0] *H 9FL 2-figures ‘’
032CH Display_Char[9][1] *H 9FL 1-figure ‘9’
032EH Display_Char[10][0] *H 10FL ‘’
2-figures
0332H Display_Char[11][0] *H 11FL ‘’
2-figures
0336H Display_Char[12][0] *H 12FL ‘1’
2-figures
0338H Display_Char[12][1] *H 12FL 1-figure ‘0’
033AH Display_Char[13][0] *H 13FL ‘1’
2-figures
033EH Display_Char[14][0] *H 14FL ‘1’
2-figures
2-figures
2-figures
2-figures
2-figures
2-figures
2-figures
8
PART Address LABEL
2-figures
2-figures
2-figures
2-figures
2-figures

2-figures
03CEH Display_Char[3][1] *H 1FL 3-figures 3-DIGIT applied ‘’
03D0H Display_Char[3][2] *H 2FL 3-figures ‘’
03D2H Display_Char[3][3] *H 3FL 3-figures ‘’
03D4H *H 4FL 3-figures ‘’
03DAH *H 7FL 3-figures ‘’
03DCH *H 8FL 3-figures ‘’
03DEH *H 9FL 3-figures ‘’
03E0H *H 10FL ‘’
3-figures
03E2H *H 11FL ‘’
3-figures
03E4H *H 12FL ‘’
3-figures
03E6H *H 13FL ‘’
3-figures
03E8H *H 14FL ‘’
3-figures
03EAH *H 15FL ‘’
3-figures
03ECH *H 16FL ‘’
3-figures
03EEH *H 17FL ‘’
3-figures
03F0H *H 18FL ‘’
3-figures
9
PART Address LABEL
040AH *H 31FL ‘’
3-figures
04ACH *H 32FL ‘’
3-figures
038AH
Service_Inform[0][0] Unused
038CH Service information on 1st FL
Service_Inform
*H LDC-installed stop floor and LDC-installed non- C1H
[0][1]
stop floor to be classified
038EH With shelter plate
C2H
B7 B6 B5 B0 C3H
Non-stop FL-> 1 0 C8H
*H Floor Data 00H
Stop FL -> 1 1
03C8H Ex) 2 FL non-stop : 82H = 10000010B
3 FL stop : C3H = 11000011B
03CAH Service_Inform Service information on 32nd FL
*H 00H
[0][32] (Non-stop floor does not need marking)
03CCH-
Unused
040CH
040EH Parking *H If use PARKING floor (01H) 01H
0410H Reference1 *H Reference FL(If '0', no return to reference FL) 01H
0412H Reference2 *H 2nd reference FL 00H
0414H Exit1 *H Escape floor 01H
0416H Exit2 *H 2nd escape floor 00H
0418H Dispersion FL during DUPLEX (If ‘0’, no
Dispersion1 *H dispersion) 00H
* Dispersion FL =( reference FL +top FL)/2
041AH Dispersion2 *H Unused
041CH Top *H Top floor 08H
041EH Middle *H Intermediate FL 04H
0420H Bottom *H Bottom floor 01H
0422H *H Multi-step deceleration start floor in up direction
Up_Decel_Zone 00H
(Two rows shelter plate installed floor)
0424H *H Multi-step deceleration start floor in down
Down_Decel_Zone direction 00H
(Two rows shelter plate installed floor)
042CH Hall_Lantern_Dir 00 / 01 Lantern with direction lamp function 00H
042EH Security_Opt 00/01 Close to Security floor succor run
0430H *B 00H
0432H 00H
Security_Floor Close to Security_floor bit set
0434H 00H
0436H 00H
5. 0500H Installed_Node[0] 00 / 01 ID No.1 OPB 01H
Car 0502H Installed_Node[1] 00 / 01
node ID No.2 OPB 00H
spec 0504H Installed_Node[2] 00 / 01 ID No.3 OPB 00H
0506H Installed_Node[3] 00 / 01 ID No.4 OPB 00H
0508H Unused 00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
10
PART Address LABEL
050CH Bt_Bz_Cut 00 / 01 Cage button BZ sound cut 00H
050EH Bt_Bz_Toggle 00 / 01 EFO(Russia) BZ sound applied 00H
0510H DML_Indi 00 / 01 DML CPI 01H

0512H Lamp_Indi Unused 00H
0514H Sub_Lamp1 Setting usage of additional CPI lamp 1 06H
Emergen
Without
Inspect
VIP
Full
cy
*H 0H 1H 2H 3H 4H
Safety Off
In use
Auto
Full
6H 7H 8H 9H
0516H Sub_Lamp2 *H Setting usage of additional CPI lamp 2 02H
0518H Sub_Lamp3 *H Setting usage of additional CPI lamp 3 00H
051AH Sub_Lamp4 *H Setting usage of additional CPI lamp 4
051CH –
Unused
051EH
11
PART Address LABEL
DATA DESCRIPTION DEFAULT
6. 0600H *H Two rows of Hall net (ex> Duplex) 00H
Hall
0602H~
node Use_Bside Unused
0608H
spec
VIP_Button *B VIP B/T Installed FL (Max. 3 FL)
060AH 1 - 8 FL 5000060AH Add 00H
060CH 9 - 16FL 5000060CH Add 00H
060EH 17 - 24FL 5000060EH Add 00H
0610H 25 - 32FL 50000610H Add 00H
0612H -
0632H Unused
0634H DML Indi 00 / 01 DML Indi 01H

0636H Unused 00H
0638H Sub_Lamp1 *H Setting usage of additional indicator lamp 1 01H
Emergen
Without
Inspect
Start
VIP
Full
cy
0H 1H 2H 3H 4H 5H
Safety Off
In use
Auto
Full
6H 7H 8H 9H
063AH
Sub_Lamp2 *H Setting usage of additional indicator lamp 2 02H
063CH Sub_Lamp3 *H Setting usage of additional indicator lamp 3 00H

063EH
Sub_Lamp4 *H Setting usage of additional indicator lamp 4 00H
0640H Unused
0642H Button Jam Detecting time
Button_Jam_Detect_
*H z Unit : sec B4H
Time
ex) In case 180sec (3 min) => 0xB4
0644H –
064AH Unused
064CH
Lamp_Indi 00 / 01 Lamp Type INDI 00H
064EH Call_Related_INDI 00 / 01 B/T call related Indicator (VIX-532) 00H
0650H - Indi_On_Floor *B B/T call related Indicator usually on floor
0656H
0650H 1 ~ 8FL 00H
0652H 9 ~ 16FL 00H
0654H 17 ~ 24FL 00H
0656H 25 ~ 32FL 00H
0658H PAR_COM 00/01 Use DOH PCB Hall select communication 00H
ways
12
PART Address LABEL
7. 0700H DAV_Door 00 / 01 When DAV1 Door applied 00H

Door
spec 0702H Nudging 00 / 01 Nudging device 00H
0704H Unused 00 / 01 00H
0706H Door_Lock_Magnet 00 / 01 DAV or Car door locking 00H
0708H Close_Buzzer 00 / 01 Close buzzer 00H
070AH Open_Bt_Flick 00 / 01 Open button lighting ON 01H
070CH 00 / 01 Door closing after completion 00H
Earthquake_Door_Close
of earthquake control operation
070EH Fire_Door_Close 00 / 01 Door closing after completion 00H
of fire control operation
0710H Auto_Private_Power_ Door closing after completion
00 / 01 00H
Door_Close of private power control operation
0712H Unused
0714H Door operation count for detecting Close
Close_Lock_Limit_Count *H 0CH
Lock
0716H –
0796H Unused
0798H Open_Time[0] FFH FFH

079AH Open_Time[1] 00H Unspecified Door Time 00H
079CH Open_Time[2] *H Door Opening Time for hall call (sec)
03H
3 sec=03H, 2 sec = 02H, 1sec = 01H
079EH Open_Time[3] *H Door Opening Time for car call (sec) 02H
07A0H Open_Time[4] *H Door Opening Time of non-condition 05H
(sec)
07A2H Open_Time[5] *H Opening Time for disabled persons (sec) 05H
07A4H Open_Time[6] *H Opening Time for Control operation (sec) 0FH
07A6H Unused
07B8H Door_Type *H Door Machine Type setting 00H
00H 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H
SBD A D S S AV, DAV SM ANLI
K MAV SO
07CAH Russia_OPZX 00 / 01H Applied for Russia APT (TCD 240) 00H
07CCH Return Floor Auto Open 00 / 01 Door open automatically, arrived at escape 00H
floor under fire operation.(Russia)
07CEH Photo_Reopen_Cut_Cnt *H Max. Reopen count by Photo sensor 05H
07D0H Photo_Cut_Buzzer 00 / 01 Buzzer work when photo beam cut (close) 01H
07D2H Photo_Cut_Limit *H Photo beam cut limit time (sec) 20H
07D4H LDS_Off_BZ_Time *H Landing Door open detecting time(sec) 0AH
07D6H CLS contact holding DMC Cut
CLS_Hold 00H
(Only for SBD1 door)
13
PART Address LABEL
8. 0800H -
Call 0808H Unused
service
spec 080AH Non_Stop1_Trigger_Con 00 / 01 NON STOP1 Switch 01H
d
080CH Non_Stop2_Trigger_Con 00 / 01 NON STOP2 Switch 01H
d
080EH - Unused
081CH 00H
081EH Hall_Up_Call *B Setting in HALL UP CALL available FL bit 7FH

0820H 00H
0822H 00H
0824H 00H
0826H Hall_Down_Call *B Setting in HALL DOWN CALL available FL bit FEH
0828H 00H
082AH 00H
082CH 00H
082EH A_Cage_Call_Patt *B Setting in E/L #1 A type(front side) CAR FFH
0830H CALL available bit 00H
0832H 00H
0834H 00H
0836H - Unused
083CH 00H
083EH B_Cage_Call_Patt *B Setting in E/L #1 B type(rear side) CAR FFH

0840H CALL available bit 00H
0842H 00H
0844H 00H
0846H - Unused
084CH
8. 084EH Non_Stop_1 *B Setting in NON STOP1 specified FL bit Svc 55H

Call 0850H pattern used when switch input. 55H
service * Set to service FL
spec 0852H 55H
0854H 55H
0856H Non_Stop_2 *B Setting in NON STOP2 specified FL bit Svc ABH
0858H pattern used when switch input. 00H
085AH * Set to service FL 00H
085CH 00H
Force_Stop[0] Setting in compulsion stop FL bit for UP
*B
direction
085EH 085EH 1 ~ 8FL 00H
0860H 0860H 9 ~ 16FL 00H
0862H 0862H 17 ~ 24FL 00H
0864H 0864H 25 ~ 32FL 00H
14
PART Address LABEL
Force_Stop[1] Setting in compulsion stop FL bit for DOWN
direction
0866H *B 0866H 1 ~ 8FL 00H
0868H 0868H 9 ~ 16FL 00H
086AH 086AH 17 ~ 24FL 00H
086CH 086CH 25 ~ 32FL 00H
086EH- Unused
08DEH
08E0H Hall_Service_Map[0] *H Normal call service map 83H
08E2H Hall_Service_Map[1] *H Unused 00H
08E4H Hall_Service_Map[2] *H Disabled person call service map 23H
08E6H Hall_Service_Map[3] *H Unused 00H
Definition of service map
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
A B C D
Hold
Type Type Type Type E/L No.2 E/L No.1
Flag
B/T B/T B/T B/T
* Hold Flag : In case hall call is registered , even if service type is changed to
non-stop floor, it will service before reset.
z A Type B/T : HALL NET 1 line DHG HU/HD
z B Type B/T : HALL NET 2 lines DHG HU/HD
z C Type B/T : HALL NET 1 line DHG HUC/HDC
z D Type B/T : HALL NET 2 lines DHG HUC/HDC
☞) 83H Æ A Type B/T setting for E/L No. 1 and 2
21H Æ C Type B/T setting for E/L No. 1
08E8H – Unused
*H 00H
09FCH
15
PART Address LABEL
9. 0A00H *H Addition value for stand-by lift at reference 32H
Dispat 0A02H floor
Ref_Fl_Wait_Car
ch *H 0032H = 50 00H
spec Delay time = 50 * 100 ms = 5 s
0A04H *H Addition value for stand-by lift without 32H
Non_Dir_Car direction
0A06H *H 00H
5sec
0A08H *H Subtraction value for door closed lift 03H
Closed_Car
0A0AH *H 300ms 00H
0A0CH *H 02H
Subtraction value for ready to running
0A0EH Ready_To_Run_Car
*H 200 ms 00H
0A10H *H 00H
Run_Car Subtraction value for running lift
0A12H *H 00H
0A14H *H 00H
Unused
0A16H *H 00H
10. 0A80H Assistance operation detecting timer (sec) 32H
SPD_Nplex_Timer[0] *H
Parall Setting time :28H(40sec)~78H(120sec) (50sec)
el 0A82H Start of dispersion delay timer (sec) 1EH
SPD_Nplex_Timer[1] *H
runnin Setting time :00H ~ 3CH(60sec) (30sec)
g 0A84H SPD_Nplex_Timer[2] *H Unused FFH
spec 0A86H
SPD_Nplex_Timer[3] *H Unused FFH
16
PART Address LABEL
DATA VIRTUAL INPUT SPEC
11. 0B00H - Fixed input area VID_Vi_Map[port no.][bit no.][0] : input specification
Virtual 0B2EH VID_Vi_Map[port no][ bit no.][][1] : state specification
input state specification) 01H ⇒ reverse (B-CON)
spec 0B30H VID_Vi_Map[0][12][0] VI_SD2U 00H ⇒ normal (A-CON)
0B32H VID_Vi_Map[0][12][1] 01H ex) VID_Vi_Map[0][3][0] = VI_DLD
0B34H VID_Vi_Map[0][13][0] VI_SD2D VID_Vi_Map[0][3][0] = 00H
0B36H VID_Vi_Map[0][13][1] 01H Bit 3 of port No. 0 is used DLD input,
0B38H - Fixed input area input state is A-CON
0B52H
0B54H VID_Vi_Map[1][5][0] VI_LDU 00H VI_NULL 16H VI_R4HW

0B56H VID_Vi_Map[1][5][1] 01H 01H VI_R5SC 17H VI_MAINT_C
0B58H VID_Vi_Map[1][6][0] VI_LDD 02H 18H
0B5AH VID_Vi_Map[1][6][1] 01H 03H VI_UL 19H
0B5CH VID_Vi_Map[1][7][0] VI_R4FM 04H VI_DL 1AH
0B5EH VID_Vi_Map[1][7][1] 00H 05H VI_R5SCS 1BH
0B60H - 06H 1DH
Fixed input area
0B62H 07H 1EH
0B64H VID_Vi_Map[1][9][0] VI_R4EQ 08H 1FH
0B66H VID_Vi_Map[1][9][1] 00H 09H 20H

0B68H VID_Vi_Map[1][10][0] VI_R7NP 0AH 21H VI_SD1U
0B6AH VID_Vi_Map[1][10][1] 01H 0BH 22H VI_SD2U
0B6CH VID_Vi_Map[1][11][0] VI_R4GS 0CH 23H VI_SD1D

0B6EH VID_Vi_Map[1][11][1] 00H 0DH 24H VI_SD2D
0B70H VID_Vi_Map[1][12][0] VI_R4CT 0EH 25H VI_LDC
0B72H VID_Vi_Map[1][12][1] 00H 0FH 26H
0B74H VID_Vi_Map[1][13][0] VI_R2UL 10H VI_V48 27H VI_LDU
0B76H VID_Vi_Map[1][13][1] 00H 11H VI_R5SX 28H VI_LDD
0B78H VI_PARKIN 12H VI_MAINT_M 29H VI_C1BR
VID_Vi_Map[1][14][0]
G
0B7AH VID_Vi_Map[1][14][1] 00H 13H VI_R1MU 2AH VI_C1ST
0B7CH VID_Vi_Map[1][15][0] 00H 14H VI_R1MD 2BH VI_CDS
0B7EH VID_Vi_Map[1][15][1] 00H 15H 2CH VI_LDS
0B80H VID_Vi_Map[2][0][0] 00H 2DH VI_DOLS 4DH
0B82H VID_Vi_Map[2][0][1] 00H 2EH VI_DCLS 4EH VI_R4GS
0B84H 2FH VI_SAFETY_ 4FH VI_R4CT
VID_Vi_Map[2][1][0] 00H
SHOE
0B86H VID_Vi_Map[2][1][1] 00H 30H 50H
0B88H VID_Vi_Map[2][2][0] 00H 31H 51H
0B8AH VID_Vi_Map[2][2][1] 00H 32H 52H
0B8CH VID_Vi_Map[2][3][0] 00H 33H 53H
0B8EH VID_Vi_Map[2][3][1] 00H 34H 54H
0B90H - Fixed input area 35H 55H
0B92H
36H 56H
0B94H VID_Vi_Map[2][5][0] 00H 37H 57H
0B96H VID_Vi_Map[2][5][1] 00H 38H 58H
0B98H - Fixed input area 39H 59H
0B9AH
3AH 5AH
0B9CH VID_Vi_Map[2][7][0] 00H 3BH 5BH
0B9EH VID_Vi_Map[2][7][1] 00H 3CH 5CH
17
PART Address LABEL
0BA0H - Unused 3DH 5DH VI_1ST_FIRE
0BBEH
3EH 5EH VI_2ND_FIRE
3FH 5FH VI_R1MM
* mark is fixed input (can’t editing) 40H 60H VI_RDMC
41H VI_R7NP 61H VI_PARKING
42H 62H
43H VI_R7RD 63H VI_HIGH
44H VI_R4FM
45H VI_R4FS
46H VI_EQ
47H
48H
49H
4AH
4BH
4CH
18
PART Address LABEL
12. 0C00H - Fixed output area VID_Vo_Map[Variable][0] : Output port specification
Virtual 0C52H VID_Vo_Map[Variable][1] : Output bit specification
Output VID_Vo_Map[Variable][2] : Output state specification
spec 0C54H VID_Vo_Map[14][0] 00H state specification) 01H ⇒ reverse (B-CON)
0C56H VID_Vo_Map[14][1] 00H 00H ⇒ normal (A-CON)
0C58H VID_Vo_Map[14][2] 00H ex) VID_Vo_Map[0][0] = 1H
0C5AH VID_Vo_Map[15][0] 00H VID_Vo_Map[0][1] = 0H
0C5CH VID_Vo_Map[15][1] 00H
VID_Vo_Map[0][2] = 0H
0C5EH VID_Vo_Map[15][2] 00H Bit 0 of port No. 1 is used C1BR output, non-reverse.
0C60H VID_Vo_Map[16][0] 00H Variabl
Description
e
0C62H VID_Vo_Map[16][1] 00H 0 VO_C1BR
0C64H VID_Vo_Map[16][2] 00H 1 VO_C1ST
0C66H VID_Vo_Map[17][0] 01H 2 VO_R5SC
0C68H VID_Vo_Map[17][1] 0DH 3 VO_OPEN
0C6AH VID_Vo_Map[17][2] 00H 4 VO_CLOSE
0C6CH VID_Vo_Map[18][0] 02H 5 VO_WHEEL_CHAIR_DOOR
0C6EH VID_Vo_Map[18][1] 05H 6 VO_NUDGING
0C70H VID_Vo_Map[18][2] 00H 7 VO_R1ML
0C72H - Fixed output (R1HI) 8 VO_COOLER
0C76H
9 VO_CAR_LIGHT
0C78H VID_Vo_Map[20][0] 02H 10 VO_CAR_FAN
0C7AH VID_Vo_Map[20][1] 03H 11 VO_INV_FAN
0C7CH VID_Vo_Map[20][2] 00H 12 VO_R4F1
0C7EH VID_Vo_Map[21][0] 02H 13 VO_R4F2
0C80H VID_Vo_Map[21][1] 02H 14 VO_EQ_RESET
0C82H VID_Vo_Map[21][2] 00H 15 VO_V_WAVE_RESET
16 VO_RESCUE_RETURN
17 VO_R2DM
18 VO_R4RF
19 VO_R1H1
20 VO_ROPE_GRIPPER
21 VO_R4FSX
22 VO_LDS_OFF_BUZZER
0CBEH VID_Vo_Map[31][2] 23 VO_RDZ
19
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary,No-mark:Decimal
PART Address LABEL 00H:without,01H:with)
DATA DESCRIPTION
13. 0D00H - Fixed Timer area m sec. is indicated according to timer spec.
Timer 0D30H timer value is 4 byte variable.
spec Value is specified in address and reverse order in
0D38H Direction error detecting 540 EEPROM.
0D40H R5SC On/Off error detecting 540 Ex.) TM_PHOTO_OFF_DETECT is
0D48H C1ST On/Off error detecting 540 displayed by
$50000D10H |
0D50H Operation mode input error 990
($50000D12H << 8) |
detecting
($50000D14H << 16) |
0D58H - Fixed Timer area
($50000BD16H << 32).
0D78H
For example., TM_PHOTO_OFF_
DETECT = 1000 m sec = 3E8H m sec, and is stored
0D80H C1BR On/Off error detecting 540 in
0D88H Suppress On/Off error detecting 360 $50000D10H = E8H
0D90H – Fixed Timer area $50000D12H = 03H
0DC8H $50000D14H = 00H
0DD0H VOICE_CLOSE_START_T 990 $50000D16H = 00H.
0DD8H – Fixed Timer area
0E08H Thus, after conversing value required to change into
HEX, change in order of LSB from the below
0E10H Car FAN Off Timer 5000 address.
0E18H Unused
0E20H Unused
0E28H Cooler draining timer 30060
0E30H - Fixed Timer area
0E48H
0E50H Unused
0E58H Unused
0E60H Unused
0E68H Extend Open timer 180000
0E70H - Fixed Timer area
0E78H
0E80H CLOSE_LOCK_DETECT_T 10080

0E88H CLOSE_LOCK_50SEC_T 50040
0E90H OPEN_LOCK_DETECT_T 10080
0E98H DOOR_THERMO_DETECT_T 30060
0EA0H BACKUP_OP_DETECT_T 10080
0EA8H - Fixed Timer area
0ED0H
0ED8H POSI_OFF_ERR_T 2070
0EE0H Encoder broken wire detecting 1620
0EE8H BRAKE_OFF_DETECT_T 3060
0EF0H - Fixed Timer area
0FA0H
20
PART Address LABEL
14. 1000H - Fixed input area CND_I_Map[port no.][bit no.][0] : input specification
In car 101AH CND_I_Map[port no.][bit no.][1] : state specification
virtual ex) 01H ⇒ reverse (B-CON)
input 101CH CND_I_Map[0][7][0] 00H 00H ⇒ normal (A-CON)
spec 101EH CND_I_Map[0][7][1] 00H ex) CND_I_Map[0][3][0] = CN_UP
1020H - Fixed input area CND_I_Map[0][3][1] = 00H
1036H Bit 3 of port No. 0 is UP input, state is reverse.
1038H CND_I_Map[1][6][0] 00H

103AH CND_I_Map[1][6][1] 00H
103CH - Fixed input area spe spe
Description Description
104AH c c
00H CN_NULL 16H CN_NON_STOP1
104CH CND_I_Map[2][3][0] 00H 01H CN_HIGH 17H CN_NON_STOP2
104EH CND_I_Map[2][3][1] 00H 02H CN_IN_CAR 18H CN_P_SHOE
1050H CND_I_Map[2][4][0] 00H CN_CALL_PRIORI
03H CN_ON_CAR 19H
TY
1052H CND_I_Map[2][4][1] 00H 04H CN_ATT 1AH CN_1ST_FIRE
1054H Fixed input area 05H CN_INDP 1BH CN_2ND_FIRE
1056H 06H CN_PARK 1CH
1058H CND_I_Map[2][6][0] 00H 07H CN_EFS 1DH
105AH CND_I_Map[2][6][1] 00H 08H CN_OPEN 1EH
105CH - Fixed input area
09H CN_E_OPEN 1FH
1072H
0A
CN_CLOSE 20H CN_WATER_FULL
H
1074H 0B
CND_I_Map[3][5][0] CN_LW2 CN_UP 21H CN_DCPU
H
1076H 0C
CND_I_Map[3][5][1] 01H CN_DOWN 22H CN_DERR2
H
1078H 0D
CND_I_Map[3][6][0] CN_LW8 CN_START 23H CN_DERR1
H
107AH 0E
CND_I_Map[3][6][1] 00H CN_BY_PASS 24H CN_DERR0
H
107CH CND_I_Map[3][7][0] CN_LW11 0FH CN_DCO 25H CN_CLS
107EH CND_I_Map[3][7][1] 01H 10H CN_LW2 26H CN_MON
11H CN_LW8
12H CN_LW11
CN_ON_CAR_CL
13H
OSE
14H CN_ON_CAR_UP
15H CN_ON_CAR_DO
WN
21
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary,No-mark:Decimal
PART Address LABEL 00H:without,01H:with)
DATA DESCRIPTION
15. 1560H SPD_Hall_Svc_Option_Spec
01H Normal call service permitted 01H
Hall [NORMAL_SVC]
call 1562H SPD_Hall_Svc_Option_Spec
00H Rear call service permitted 01H
servic [BSIDE_SVC]
e 1564H SPD_Hall_Svc_Option_Spec
permit 01H Disabled persons call service permitted 01H
[WHEEL_SVC]
ted 1566H SPD_Hall_Svc_Option_Spec Not permit bit 0 VIP service
Code [VIP_SVC] 00H bit 1 When this bit is set, car call canceled
spec immediately
permit bit 2 ‘0’ : VIP mode is canceled during
07H deceleration for last car call
‘1’ : VIP mode is canceled after door close
completion of last car call
bit 3 Lock Type Button
bit 4
bit 5
bit 6
bit 7
22
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary,No-
PART Address LABEL mark:Decimal00H:without,01H:with)
DATA DESCRIPTION
16. 1570H NCD_Bit_Acd[0].Operation 0 Operation bit definition
Non-
Parall 1572H NCD_Bit_Acd[0].Ref_Fl 0 bit 0 Anti-nuisance control
contr
el function stopped
ol
Operat 1574H NCD_Bit_Acd[0].Dis_Fl 0 bit 1 Hall floor, direction
mode
ion Indication stopped
Mode 1576H NCD_Bit_Acd[1].Operation 0 bit 2 Lantern function stopped
Permit 1578H NCD_Bit_Acd[1].Ref_Fl ATT 59H bit 3 Chime /gong function
ted Mode stopped
Code 157AH NCD_Bit_Acd[1].Dis_Fl 0 bit 4 Assistance operation valid
spec 157CH NCD_Bit_Acd[2].Operation 23H bit 5 Close B/T invalid
VIP
157EH NCD_Bit_Acd[2].Ref_Fl 0 bit 6 Specified floor return
stand
permitted
by
1580H NCD_Bit_Acd[2].Dis_Fl mode 0 bit 7 Dispersion start delay
permitted
1582H NCD_Bit_Acd[3].Operation VIP 0FH
1584H NCD_Bit_Acd[3].Ref_Fl runni 0 Ref_Fl( Dis_Fl ) bit definition
1586H NCD_Bit_Acd[3].Dis_Fl ng 0 bit 0 Non-Inter-Lock
mode
1588H NCD_Bit_Acd[4].Operation Offic 10H bit 1 Zone dispersion
158AH NCD_Bit_Acd[4].Ref_Fl e 55H bit 2 Start floor advance control
atten permitted
158CH NCD_Bit_Acd[4].Dis_Fl danc 0 bit 3 Door open after dispersion
e complete
mode
158EH NCD_Bit_Acd[5].Operation 80H bit 4 UP direction when dispersion
Singl
1590H NCD_Bit_Acd[5].Ref_Fl 51H bit 5 DOWN direction when
e
dispersion
Mode
1592H NCD_Bit_Acd[5].Dis_Fl 0 bit 6 Dispersion operation permitted
1594H NCD_Bit_Acd[6].Operation Paral 90H bit 7
1596H NCD_Bit_Acd[6].Ref_Fl lel 50H
1598H NCD_Bit_Acd[6].Dis_Fl Mode 42H
23
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary,No-mark:Decimal00H:without,01H:with)
PART Address LABEL DEFA
DATA DESCRIPTION
ULT
17. 1A00H –
Floor 1A08H
heigh 1A0AH –
Floor height measured data for 1st floor
t 1A10H
table 1A12H –
Floor height measured data for 2nd floor
1A1AH
1A1CH –
Floor height measured data for 3rd floor
1A24H
1B10H- *H
1B16H FHT_SUM Floor height table sum data
18. 1C00H- *H
PCB 1C0AH Password Password
secur
ity 1C0CH- *H
1C1CH PCB_Protection PCB approval No.
spec
1C1EH- *H
Unique_ID_Lon[0] Main LON ID
1C28H
1C2AH- *H
Unique_ID_Lon[1] Car LON ID
1C34H
1C36H- *H
Unused Unused
1C4CH
1C4EH- *H
Encoder_ID[0] MAIN LON ID
1C5CH
1C5EH- *H
1C6CH Encoder_ID[1] Car LON ID
19. 3E00H Velocity_Adjust *H Parameter ( Rated velocity adjust )
Perfo * Max. adjust range ±4 m/min
rman
ce
speed-down : 0×01H, 0×02H, 0×03H, 0×04H
Para- Speed-up : 0×81H, 0×82H, 0×83H, 0×84H
meter
3E02H *H Time setting of 1st deceleration zone velocity
: Rising Time Set (Multi-step deceleration
Time 9 function)
ex) 1sec : 0×10 1.5sec : 0×15
3E04H *H Time setting of 1st deceleration zone uniform
Time 10 velocity (Multi-step deceleration function)
ex) 0.5sec : 0×05 2sec : 0×20
24
1. Button type
Explanation of Service Map

Ex )
A B/T B B/T C B/T D B/T Hold No.2 No.1
Front normal
1 1 1
Hall call
Rear normal
Hall call
Front Disable
1 1
call
Rear Disable
call
In case of above
Front normal hall call Call will registered by A B/T input line, and E/L No.1,2 are able to service.
Rear normal hall call Service is impossible because there was not set for input B/T & E/L which is possible
to service.
Front disable call Call will registered by C B/T input line, and E/L No.1 is able to service.
Rear disable call Service is impossible because there was not set for input B/T & E/L which is possible
to service.
* Hold bit function is for maintain the old registered Hall call and service when it change to Non-stop FL.
z VIP call service depends on VIP floor pattern setting.
* B/T Type
Type DIP S/W 7 DHG B/T Connector STANDARD
A OFF HU/HD Front normal
B ON HU/HD Rear normal
C OFF HUC/HDC Front Disable
D ON HUC/HDC Rear Disable
*In case of parallel operation, hall network should be set same as simplex operation,
because each E/L has it own hall network configuration.
25
2. Floor SPEC setting
ex 1) DUPLEX operation : E/L No.1 information: (8/8, B3,B2,B1,1~5), E/L No.2 information: (6/6, B11~5)
ADDRESS LABEL No.1 DATA No.2 DATA N

0300H TOTAL 08H 06H
No.2 first shelter plate is

038CH S. INFOR C1H C3H rd
Start from 3 floor
038EH C2H C4H
0390H C3H C5H
0392H C4H C6H
0394H C5H C7H
0396H C6H C8H
0398H C7H 00H
039AH C8H 00H
0410H REFERENCE 1 04H 04H
0418H DISPERSION 1 07H 07H
041CH TOP 08H 08H
041EH MIDDLE 05H 05H
0420H BOTTOM 01H 03H
081EH H_UP_CALL 7FH 7FH
0826H H_DN_CALL FEH FEH
082EH C_CAL_PATT FFH FFH
26
Test & Commissioning Rev. No. 0
for SI210 Controller Doc. No. 695-108
FOD Page 9/32

Overseas Support Team
Test & Commissioning Date MAR. 2003
2) Checking after power supply
① Turn ON the building power.
② Check the input voltage of DOC-120 PCB.
※ Verify that DC is 48V±5% between AB connector No.1 and F.G.
(For checking safety circuit-R5SC)
※ Check the voltage output of SMPS on DOC-120 PCB TB1 terminal block.
DOC-120 PCB Measuring Point Voltage

TB1 5V - GND DC +5V ± 5%
terminal block 15V - GND DC +15V ± 5%
③ Check input voltage of DCL-242
※ Verify that voltage between CCN1 connector No.4 on DCL PCB and ground is
DC 24V±5% in operating panel.
※ Verify that voltage between ONC connector No.13 on DCL PCB and ground
is DC48V±5% in operating panel.
※ Verify that voltage between CCN1 connector No.3 on DCL PCB and ground is
DC 0V∼ 0.1V in operating panel.
④ Check voltage DOP-116 PCB
※ XHA MIC 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 : DC 24V±10%
⑤ Check WDTs of DPC-120,121 PCB
※ Verify that LD2 CPU LED(green) flickers at 0.5 second interval on the power supply.
(It flickers at 0.25 seconds when the motor is running)
Caution: WDT(watch dog timer) monitors that the speed control CPU performs
calculation correctly. If WDT does not flicker at 0.5 second interval, or ON only or
FOD Page 10/32

OFF only, speed control CPU may failed seriously.

Thus, if only one error occurs, thorough inspection is required. At this time,
check 5V power supply, ROM or ROM socket, and connector connection.
※ Check ALM LED
Verify that LD1 ALM LED(Red) lights up after the power supply, and then, OFF in about
2 seconds.(ALM LED is for inverter hardware safety check)
a) Detecting over_ current on inverter.(or J5H (=DPC-111,112)JUMPER is not inserted)
b) WDT failure on speed control CPU.
c) Short-circuit of IGBT U-phase arm and failure of gate Trans power.
d) Short-circuit of IGBT V-phase arm and failure of gate trans power.
e) Short-circuit of IGBT W-phase arm and failure of gate trans power. IPM ARM SHORT
and GATE SMPS voltage error detection
f) Detecting over_voltage on DC link end.
g) Failure of regenerative IGBT, gate trans, Gate SMPS power.
ALM LED lights up when hardware errors are detected as stated in a) ~ g).
- Verify that JP4 jumper is properly inserted.( LED1 turn ON if not inserted)
- Verify that WDT LED flickers normally.
- In the above c) ~ g), check the connectors of DPP-1XX PCB and verify that Gate
SMPS(trans) input is applied by AC 110V±10%.(GTS connector in control panel
No.1↔ 3 : AC110V)
- Check IGBT stack for connection conditions(disconnection and loose volt).
⑥ Check C1VD contactor input(Option)
- Verify that C1VD contactor is inputted in about 3 seconds after the power supply.
Caution: If DC link voltage does not reach 330V 8 seconds after C1VD input(low- voltage
error), turn OFF C1VD contactor and then ON. Then, check the voltage after 8
seconds. If voltage is still low, turn OFF the contact to generate charging circuit
failure error.
- In this case, main power circuit connection, GATE SMPS(trans) input or connection,
charging circuit OFF, or IGBT, regenerative IGBT ON may fail. Thus, check these
conditions. If start the recharging, LD1 will be light ON.
Caution: It takes about 10 min. for DC link voltage to be completely discharged when
FOD Page 11/32

power OFF. Thus, never touch DPP-1XX PCB and the stack when LD1 lights up.
- When LED does not light up though C1VD contactor is input after the power supply
inverter may be short, or regenerative IGBT ON, charging circuit OFF or LED diode may
fail. Checking should be carried out after DC link voltage is disconnected.
⑦ Check DPP-1XX PCB
- Checks that charging detecting LED is ON.

LD1(red) on PCB lights up if DC link voltage is 50V or more and dims, then, turns OFF if
the voltage is less 50V. LD1 lights up again when the DC link begins to be charged.
- When LED does not light ON even if after the power supply, inverter may be short, or
regenerative IGBT ON, charging circuit OFF or LED may fail.
Checking shall be carried out after DC link voltage is disconnected.
Caution: It takes about 10 min. for DC link voltage to be completely charged when power off.
Thus, never touch DPP-1XX PCB and stack area while LD1 lights ON.
3) Checking voltage
Check MCCB and PCB voltage on each section as shown in table1 and 2.
Table 1) AC voltage input (Trans 2nd side output)
PS-12,14,16 3Φ 85V FS1,2/6A LED1,2 'BRAKE COIL,C1ST,C1BR driving
PS-07,09,11 3Φ 37V FS4,5/3A LED4,5 Relay driving,external input,I/Fsignal,switch input
PS-01,03,05 3Φ 19.2V FS6,7/3A LED6,7 CAR LON PCB power

PS-02,04,06 3Φ 19.2V FS8,9,10,11/10A LED8,9,10,11 HALL BUTTON power
PS-17,19 AC 110V FS12/3A LED12 SMPS input power
PS-17,19 AC 110V FS12/3A LED12 INV. FAN driving
PS-18,20 AC 110V FS13/3A LED13 GATE SMPS,GATE TRANS input power
PS-21 "E" GATE SMPS,GATE TRANS "E"
PS-13,15 AC 110V FS14/5A LED14 Door motor input power(SBD1)
PS-13,15,10 AC 110V FS14,16/3A,6A LED14,16 Door motor input power(SAV1,MAV1,DAV1,HAV1)
TML2-02,01 AC 220V FS15/10A LED15 Checking lighting power supplied(DOP-113PCB)
TML3-02,01 AC 220V FS15/10A LED15 Checking lighting power supplied(DOP-116 PCB)
Table 2) AC/DC voltage output

UB-03,05 DC 110V FS3:3A(Base model) LED3 'BRAKE COIL,C1ST,C1BR driving
UB-04,01 DC 48V Relay driving,external input,I/Fsignal,switch input
UB-07,02 DC 24V CAR LON PCB power
TML2-06,05 DC 24V HALL BUTTON power(25~32FL)
SMPS-01,02 AC 110V SMPS input power
FOD Page 12/32

4. Non-scaffolding method (MSK operation)

4.1. Preparation for MSK
1) Cable work of machine room and hoistway (Non-scaffolding operation)
Caution : Complete governor installation, roping and switch connection.
Governor switch should not be in common.
① Make UL and DL of limit switch common in DOM PCB TML1 terminal block.
※ Make UL switch common with terminal block TML1-07 and TML1-08.
※ Make DL switch common with terminal block TML1-07 and TML1-03.
② Wire the cable of the lowest final limit switch(LSD).
a) Wire the final limit switch cable from the

Control panel that M/C room duct piping has
been completed, to control panel, and bind
it(Refer to Fig.1). M/C Room
b) Draw the cable for lower final limit switch

down to PIT floor through M/C room duct
piping.
c) Bind the cable giving extra in the cord support
of car lower section
FOD Page 13/32

d) Wire and bind the remainder cable up to

top of car, and then fix MIC terminal block at
a reachable position.
③ Check connection and insulation.
a) Wire the limit switch ground line Adapter MIC T/B
to control panel and MIC terminal block.

b) Insert adapter cable into final
limit switch cable MIC in machine room, and
insert final limit switch cable, MSB, BZ and
ORS to MIC terminal block in(Refer to Fig.2)
c) Check the connection and insulation
d) If item c) is normal, insert an adapter plug
into "MSK" CAP in the control panel.
e) Turn power ON.
(Fig.1) Wiring diagram for

MSK operation
ADAPTER MIC T/B FOR MSK OPERATION CTRL B/D MIC

MSK운전용 ADAPTER MIC 단 PANEL
"MSK" 21P
"MSK"
ADAPTER CABLE
FOR LOWER LIMIT SW
MIC TO INSERT
"9P CAP HOUSING"
FOR MSB SW TO "LSD"

INSERT
"7P CAP HOUSING" "LSD"
FOR WARNING
LAMP/BUZZER OF
LOWER FINAL
MSK CAR
LIMIT
"13P CAP HOUSING"
SW CABLE
FOR MIC FOR
COLUMN & STOP SW "LSD"
"9P CAP HOUSING"
POSITION ASSEMBLED:ASSEMBLE MIC TERMINAL BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM FOR MSK OPERATION
FOR MSK OPR TO LOWER PART OF UPPER BEAM. INSERT
FOD Page 14/32

2) Operation under scaffold-free method

① Make sure the car is travelling in the up
Direction with MSB's up button pressed
and the car is in the down direction with
MSB's down button pressed.
② If an error occurs during operations,
put MSB E.STOP switch to the ON position.

② Should the car is travelling in opposition
Directions of the running commands,
check the connection status of the motor
and R.E. ※ Refer to 3) ⑵ ①~②
in case of the car in opposite direction.
④ Be sure to restore to the original state upon the completion of non-scaffolding work.
a) Release UL and DL of limit switch from common state at TML1 terminal block.
※ For UL switch, release terminal block TML1-07 & TML1-08 from common state.
※ For DL switch, release terminal block TML1-07 & TML1-03 from common state.
b) Remove MSK connector plug(21P) and connecting plug(9P, 7P) from control panel
and connect to the final limit switches in hoistway.
4.2 Operation from machine room

1) Operation by DOR-13X PCB
① Put AUTO/MAINT of S1 switch on DOR-13X PCB to the MAINT position.
※ DOR-13X PCB has NORMAL/MAINT,UP/DN, DMC, NORMAL/STOP switches.

FOD Page 15/32

For M/C ROOM operation should be set NORMAL/MAINT S/W to MAINT side,
and UP/DN S/W to UP or DN toggle.
※ Low speed operation from machine room should be done with the doors closed
(CDS "ON", LDS "ON")
② If "ACD=04" at column 1∼ 6 of row 1 on ANN, MAINT(low speed) operation
is available.
③ Carry out low speed operation from machine room by UP/DN switch on DOR-13X PCB
to UP/DN.
④ Verify that operating direction conforms to operation command by moving it about
100mm.
⑤ Should the car is travelling in opposite directions of running commands, check the
connection status of the motor and R.E.
2) Connection method when motor rotates reversal
① Regular and / reverse arrangement(Refer to Fig.3)
Regular arrangement: Car is placed on the motor side.

Reverse arrangement : Car is arranged on the pulley.
REGULAR ARRANGEMENT REVERSE ARRANGEMENT
PULLEY
Motor
DRIVING PULLEY
T/R
SHEAVE
M/C T/R
DRIVING
M/C
SHEAVE
Motor
(Fig.7) REGULAR/REVERSE ARRANGEMENT

② Connection method
a) Interchange U-and W-phase in the event of reverse arrangement or motor is running

in opposite direction.
b) If rotary encodes are connected reversal, insert DIR
jumper on DOC-120 PCB. (Refer to Fig.4) 1 2 3 1 2 3
(Fig.4) JUMPER SETTING
③ When motor or rotary encoder is connected reversal,
followings will occur.

FOD Page 16/32

a) Reverse connection of motor: Motor vibrates during operations and stops for emergency
after error "41" occurs.
b) Reverse connection of R.E: The car travels in opposite directions of the running
commands and stop within 5 sec.
3) When UP operation
① DOR-13X PCB(INSPECTION S/W ASY) AUTO / MAINT S/W to MAINT
② UP/DN S/W to the "UP" position until destination
③ ANN shows "U" and the direction of car travelling up at column 16 of row 2.
4) When DOWN operation
① DOR-13X PCB(INSPECTION S/W ASY) AUTO / MAINT S/W to MAINT
② UP/DN S/W to the "DN" position until destination
③ ANN shows "DOWN" and the direction of car travelling up at column 16 of row 2.
※ Checking point during commissioning

Swiching-on of Main MCCB
YES
Initial screen on ANN
YES
NO -. Check SMPS input/output
SYS1,2 LEDs flicker
-. Check DOC-120 PCB
YES
-. Check T-cable for connection
CAR communication NO
-. Check SC jack on DOC-120 PCB
LON LED OFF or ON -. Check C-LON fuse in control panel
YES
NO -. Check E.STOP switch(APP/TOCI Box)
#R5SC RY "ON" -. Check E.STOP switch(DOC,DOR PCB)
-. EES,GRS,SCS,FLU,FLD
YES
NO -. Check switch
Give UP or DN call
-. Check safety circuit
through control panel
-. Check connections
YES
NO -. When motor rotates reversely,
E/L up(down) change the DIR position on
DOC-120 PCB.(Refer to Fig.4)
FOD Page 16/32

5) IN CAR operation (Standard : Non-applied)
① Switch the operation switch of the on-car connection box to "NORMAL" position.
② Perform IN CAR low speed operation by using top floor button, bottom floor button or
UP/DOWN button of control panel.

6) ON CAR operation
① Switch the operation mode in OPB from "NORMAL" to "MAINT".
(OPB IN_CAR applied)
② Switch the operation switch of on-car connection box to "ON-CAR" operation mode.
③ Check the operation of ON-CAR switch, MSB(switch) and T.O.C.I Box on car.
Caution : Switch ON E.STOP switch and verify that the car operates.
Get on or off a car after switched ON the E.STOP switch.
Upon the completion of low speed operation, verify that the car interferes with entrance
and equipment, while running the car down at 1 meter intervals.
4.3 Governor test
※ During governor wedge test, if traction machine sheave doesn't idle for 5 sec. or more,
rotary encoder will fail.

After restoration, enter "A43E", "A44E" for all clear error.
FOD Page 17/32

Governor and safety wedge operation test Tripping test
1 Switch to on-car operation on the 1 Separate the governor line.

car top
2 Set up the digital tachometer.
With the switch in the OFF position
2 check that the car comes to stop 3 Remove split pin from connection part
(UP and DN) of governor rope and prepare free fall
3 Drop catch weight. Drop governor rope without braking
4 and measure the speed at the time

Make "SCS" common at TML1 terminal of switching OFF and weight activating
in front of control panel(02 and 06
4 of TML1) and verify that wedge stops Restore all conditions to original
the descending by gripping the rail 5 ones and verify that there is no
and sheave idles when E/L runs down error by performing UP/DN running.(See table7)
5 Return the catch weight to the original Table 7) Governor tripping speed
position by running up the car Speed Car side
(m/min) Switch Weight
Remove the common line from "SCS" 30~45 57±2 61±2
6 and return the governor switch 60 75±2 79±2
lever to the original position. 90 113±2 117±2
105 131±2 137±2
Restore all conditions to original
7 ones and verify that there is no
error by performing UP/DN running.
FOD Page 18/32

5. Preparing high-speed commissioning
5.1 Preparation
1) Installing UL and FLU
① Distance between CAM and switch should be 11±1 mm.
② When car is ±5 mm of bottom or top floor level, UL shall contact with CAM and not
operate.(When running UP and DOWN slow, car stops at 50~70mm)
③ FLU should be in position of 200±10 mm from UL.(Refer to Fig. 1 and Table 1)
2) Check on UL and FLU operation condition
① Lower the car 2~3 meter above the top floor level in low speed operation.
② Run the car in the up direction under speed operation. Distance where the car has
stopped by the operation of UL should be within 70 mm.
③ Repeat item ①.
④ Run the car in the up direction after making UL common. Distance where the car
has stopped by the operation of FLU should be within about 270 mm.
⑤ Run the car in the UP and DOWN direction after switching OFF UL.
(This time, car shall run DOWN but shall not run UP.)
⑥ Run the car UP and DOWN after turning FLU OFF.
(This time, car shall not run both UP and DOWN.)
⑦ Check error while running the car UP and DOWN
after restoring FLU and UL.
3) Check installation and

operation status of DL and
FOD Page 19/32

FLD Repeat above item 2)

in the bottom floor.
(Fig.1) INSTALLING FINAL LIMIT

SWITCH
Table 1) Limit switch installed position
Distance L1 L2 L3 L4 L5
SPEED FLU(D) UL(D) FLU ~ UL SD1U(1D) SD2U(2D)
30 200 50 150 450
45 200 50 150 600
60 200 50 150 1000
90 200 50 150 1400 2000
105 200 50 150 1800 2700
※ On the basis of bending point side of limit switch CAM when car is on "0"
level(Landing sill of bottom and top floor).
4) Cleaning
Section Working contents
-. Clean control panel, governor, TR M/C, duct and floor.
Machine room -. Assemble control panel, governor,TR M/C sheave and duct cover.
-. Latch the machine room door.(By builder)
Entrance and -. Clean hall door equipment, landing sill, rail and rail bracket.
Hoist way -. Clean rail (Sand defected rail surface with a file)
-. Clean car door equipment on and inside the car.

FOD Page 20/32

5) Compensation chain
① Bring the car down to the bottom floor and install a compensation chain support to
the bottom of the car.
② Install a compensation chain latch at 400mm above pit floor of the counter weight rail.
(Refer to Figure 2)
③ Connect the chain to the support of the car by using 'U" bolt and bring the car up.
※ Be sure that there is sufficient extra chain(300mm) on the car side.
④ When the car reaches the top floor,
hang and bind the remainder

compensation chain and untwist the
bands.
⑤ Connect the compensation chain to
the bottom of counter weight with "U"

bolt at 230±20mm above pit floor and
cut the rest of chain. (Refer to Fig. 2)
⑥ When compensation chain is
connected, assemble double nut and

(Fig.2)Assembling compen. chain
split pin.
※ Applicable standard for compensation chain(Refer to Table 2)
Table 2) Applicable standard Legend : Chain Rope None
Speed Passengers Stroke (Travel) (m)

Usage Roppin
(m/min) (Load) 20 25 30 40 60 Above 60
P ≤ 15
FOD Page 21/32

Note 1) The above standard is applicable to a standard specification. Thus, when car weight
increases due to car interior decoration, separately calculate and apply a standard.
Note 2) For below cases, compensation chain will not be applicable.

Passengers Speed(m/min) Stroke TYPE Remark
11 ~ 15 45,60,90,105 40M or less TRUNK Standard SIZE
17 60,90,105 40M or less Passenger Spec. size
17 60,90,105 40M or less TRUNK Spec. size
5.2 Car balancing

1) Adjusting guide shoe
① Run the car down to the bottom floor.
② Adjust car balance with the gap(30mm) between landing and car sill kept.
③ The gap of wedge body shall be the same on the right and left.
④ Raise and adjust the wedge to return automatically(free fall).
⑤ Verify that wedge stroke is 84mm and the distance between rail and wedge is
5±0.5mm.
⑥ Tighten the fastening nut of the tie rod attached to sling until it contacts with the tie rod.
FOD Page 22/32

※ Tighten the nut half a turn after it contacts with tie rod guide.(Same in 4 points)
※ How to adjust guide shoe
a) Tighten fastening bolt and set the sizes of push nut and ring to 10mm, with guide
shoe slightly contacting with 6mm size of "A" section.
b) If this 10mm size is not obtained, the car vibrates because the light hold rubber
cannot move. (Refer to Fig. 3)
c) If 6mm size of "A" section is not obtained, regular push pressure(32Kg) cannot be
obtained. If the size is too large, the car may vibrate severely and interfere with
hoistway equipment and car equipment.
d) If the size is smaller than 6mm in "A" section, pushing pressure becomes too
big and starting shock and stopping shock may occur.
⑦ Adjust the guide shoe and install the oiler.
(Fig.3) Adjusting guide shoe
2) Adjusting guide roller
① Tension the rope(same spring size) and run the car down to the bottom floor.
② No interference will be allowed between clutch cam and landing door.(Close the door)
FOD Page 23/32

③ Keep the car loosening all roller set bolts of the guide rollers.
(4 points on upper/lower section of car)
④ Loosen bracket and cam for fixing limit switch to avoid interference with the car.
⑤ Stay the car in no load condition.
⑥ Verify that car operation is not hindered because fastening nut of tie rod is tightened.
⑦ Hang the balance weights below the car and adjust balance so that car may be
aligned with the rail center line in static condition.
※ Wedge body gap shall be the same in right and left side.
※ Raise the wedge and check that it restores properly.
※ Verify that wedge stroke is 84mm and the clearance between rail and wedge is
5±0.5mm. At this time, the clearance between hall and car sill should be 30mm.
⑧ Tighten the guide roller spring nut(Left/right No.①) to adjust the spring length to 30mm.
Then guide roller contacts the rail. Tighten both spring nuts No.② and ③
to adjust the spring length to 30mm.(Perform in upper and lower section at a time)
(Refer to Fig. 4)
84
FOD Page 24/32

(Fig.4) Adjusting guide roller
⑨ The guide roller adjusted with spring should be ratable by 20Kg force.
⑩ Install the limit SW loosened on the normal position.
⑪ Fasten the nut of the tie rod attached to the sling so as to contact slightly.
※ Tighten the nut half a turn after it contacts the tie rod guide.(Same at 4 points)
※ How to adjust guide roller
a) It is desirable to adjust the car balance in the middle of the floors after works for
movable cable, compensation rope or chain, wiring, etc. are completed. However,
generally, it may be carried out to the bottom floor in consideration of workability.
b) Guide roller should be adjusted within 5kg of front and rear force and within 10kg of
right and left force(but, 3kg and 6kg for 300m/min or faster).
This force should be measured while tensing up/down and right/left of the roller guide
body with spring balance hanging.
c) Also, loading additional balance weights on to the car obtains more sub weight when
balancing. Thus performing car balance with minimum balance weight is essential.
d) Bad balanced car could cause vibration or damage of guide roller. Special attention is
needed.
5.3 Installing and adjusting position detector(POSI) and position detector bracket
1) Adjusting shield plate distance of POSI
① Position the car to the bottom floor level, install POSI bracket temporarily on the rail,
and adjust it up and down vertically on to the basis of the rail.(Refer to Fig. 5)
② Install levelling device on to the support arm of the door machine base.
SHIELD
SHIELD POSI. PLATE
PLATE 40mm or more
RED-MARK 14
18. 5 120
278
FOD Page 25/32

③ Position the temporarily induction plate installed on to the middle of POSI,
adjust it to be shielded up to 40mm(red-mark) deep and fix it.
Table 3) Function and usage
No. Name Function and usage ② LDU
① LDC Floor height measure/door zone sensing./floor count.

① LDC
② LDU Slack rope compensation
③ LDD
③ LDD
④ Connect MIC connector(LD) of POSI to machine room and on car connection box.
⑤ Turn on door machine DMC and DCO.
Caution: If a magnetic material is near, its operational features may be varied.
MAGNETIC MATERIAL
70mm
MAGNETIC MATERIA
MAGNETIC MATERIA
MAGNETIC MATERIA
MAGNETIC MATERIA
70mm 70mm 50mm

MG SW
s ide s ide
70mm
MAGNETIC MATERIAL
(Fig. 6) Min. gap between magnetic material and POSI

FOD Page 26/32

FOD Page 25/32

6. POTENTIO METER
6.1 Installation
Car ¹Ù´Ú
Ä« Floor
Cushion Rubber
¹æÁø°í¹« L
½ºÅ©·ç
Screw
60mm
BASE
1) Move the base and adjust the distance(L) from car bottom and top of base to be 15mm
by screw
2) Spec setting of Potentio meter ※ (Load sensor type + Number of sensor)
Applied 1EA : $0018 => “41” ,DFTR : “81” Potentio meter : 40 DFTR : 80
Applied 2EA : $0018 => “42” ,DFTR : “82”
SPEC1 Dip S/W pin No.4 ON position on the DOC-120 PCB.
6.2 Connection table
MIC name : POT MIC name : PTMA

NO Signal Name NO Signal Name MIC name : PTM1 PTM
1 P24 1 NO Signal Name
2 REF_VOLT 2 REF_VOLT 1 REF_VOLT 1
3 SIGNAL1 3 SIGNAL1 2 SIGNAL

2
4 GDC 4 GDC 3 GDC
5 REF_VOLT 5 4
3
6 SIGNAL2 6 5
7 GDC 7 POTENTIOMETER ASY
8 8 (AEG00C629)
DCL240PCB 9
10
11 MIC name : PTM2 PTM
12 NO Signal Name
13 REF_VOLT 1 REF_VOLT 1
14 SIGNAL2 2 SIGNAL
15 GDC 3 GDC 2
16 4
3
17 5
18
19
"PTM"CABLE` ASY 20 * In case it supplied 1 sensor,
(AEG00C746) 21 connect the MIC to PTM1
FOD Page 26/32

7. Adjusting in high speed operation

7.1 Operating board ID & CPI check
1) Car operating board ID & CPI check by ANN
① Enter "A83E" in ANN normal mode.
② "CAR CHK" which means CAR CHECK is displayed in ANN.
③ DCL-242 PCB operates.
④ Bottom floor car call button lights ON as Tab.1 according to car operating board ID
set in DCL-242 PCB.

Tab.1) Car operating board ID
NO Car OPB ID(HEX) Light ON times
1 Front MAIN 1 1 time
2 Front SUB 2 2 times
3 Disabled MAIN 3 3 times
4 Disabled SUB 4 4 times
5 Rear MAIN 5 5 times
6 Rear SUB 6 6 times
⑤ CPI of appropriate OPB indicates ID settled.
⑥ Each lamp(UP,DOWN,FULL,OUT OF SERVICE) of appropriate OPB CPI lights ON
in order.
⑦ Items ④~⑥ are repeated in approximately 6 sec. period.
⑧ To release CAR CHECK MODE, enter "FFFF" to switch to normal mode.
2) Check point during abnormal operation
※ LED indication confirmation
LED-LD1 indicates operation state of DCL-242 PCB, and the spec. is as follows.
NO State Condition Remark
1 Light OFF CPU RUN ,Comm. Error P24V power error, PCB(H/W) defects
CPU RUN OK,Comm. Error Comm. line's bad connection,
2 ON in 1 sec. Period
DIP SW's setting error
3 ON in 0.3 sec. period CPU RUN OK,Comm. OK
FOD Page 27/32

※ DIP switch
① Setting car operating board ID
Operation board ID's value should not exceed from the value set from Tab.1).
Especially, car operating board ID of DCL-242 PCB for in-car, on-car running
OPR SW input must be set from front of MAIN(01 HEX). When value other than
above specified is set, communication of control panel with DOC-120 PCB cannot
be established. At this time, CPI is cleared and call is not registered.
② Setting terminal resistance
Set terminal resistance at the end of communication line(See Fig.3).

When terminal resistance is not set in communication end line, DCL-242 PCB
installed to operating board back section of the terminal resistance set can not
communicate with DOC-120 PCB. This time, CPI is cleared and the call is
not registered.
7.2 Hall button & IND check

1) Setting floor ID : using DIP switch (SW1-8P)
① Structural drawing of DIP switch
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(Fig.1) Structural drawing of DIP switch
② Setting DIP switch

ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Floor ID setting segment (Hex) Button type segment
(Fig.2) BIT assigning of DIP switch

FOD Page 28/32

※ Setting the ID is possible, 63 maximum, by using Floor ID setting segment(No.1~6).
(OFF condition does not exist.)
③ Button type setting by using button type segment(No.7~8)
DIP switch No.

Button type
7 8
OFF OFF General button
ON OFF DUPLEX 2'ND HALL NET
④ Setting DIP switch
ex.1) When setting the lowest floor hall button ID(ID=01)

ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
⑤ DIP switch operation method
- Verify DIP switch state, which is OFF(state when delivery) before operating.
- Operate DIP switch in direction of ON.
- For DIP switch setting, set 1 from bottom floor as reference floor and increase
by 1 according to increase of each floor(See Tab.2). But, if there is non-stop
floor, set ID without consideration of that floor.
Tab.2) Example of general type 15 stories(12 above & 3 under the ground) building floor ID
B/D floors SVC floors Setting DIP SW(HEX) Remark
12 STOP 0D
11 STOP 0C
9 STOP 0B
8 STOP 0A
7 STOP 9
6 STOP 8
4 STOP 7
3 STOP 6
2 STOP 5
1 STOP 4
B1 STOP 3
FOD Page 29/32

⑥ Floor ID setting table using DIP switch(DS1)
- Setting general type Floor ID Ex) 1 : ON 0 : OFF
DIP SW 1
Absolute FL HEX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
2 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 3
∫ ∫ ∫
31 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1F
32 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 20
2) Button connection check
※ Diagram of hall serial communication
DOC- 120 PCB

SH
Control panel
TX1
LED 1 2 3 4
DC24V
SH
XHA(CAP)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
XHA(PLUG)
Machine
room 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GND DC24V
HA TOP FL
1
DHG- 161 PCB
2
GND 3
DC24V 4
5
FOD Page 30/32

3) Hall button & IND PCB check(on the basis of Simplex)
① Check point before power ON
※ Perform this before inserting hoist way cable plug.
- Turn off the control panel power.

- Check resistance, disconnection, and jumper in control panel as Tab.3.
Tab.3) Check points before power ON
R = 2± 1Ω (check of pulse trans problem in

1 XHA CAP 1 - 2
DOC-120 PCB)
2 XHA CAP 3 - 4 R = 1㏀ ± 200Ω(DC24V power short check)
3 DOC PCB SH Jumper Must be inserted(TRM R connection state check)
After SH disconnected, R of both ends of SH
4 DOC PCB SH Jumper
must be 120± 10Ω (TRM R check).
※ After checking above item 4, re-insert SH(JUMPER) in DOC-120 PCB.
- Check hoist way cable(communication network) as Tab.4.

FOD Page 31/32

Tab.4) Checks for hoist way cable(communication network)
R = 120± 10Ω (Check of TRM R in diverging box

1 XHA PLUG 1 - 2
of bottom floor)
2 XHA PLUG 3 - 4 Must be opened(Check of DC24V power shortly)
- Insert connector of hoist way cable(XHA).
- If above items ②, ③, ④ are normal, power ON.
② Check points after power ON
- Checks of control panel side

1 TX1, IDLE1 LED in DOC-120 PCB Both of 2 LEDs must be flickered
③ Setting Hall check mode
- Switch operation board running switch to independent side.

- Set button & IND PCB check mode.
- If "A82E" entered with KEY PAD of ANN, the below will be displayed in LCD's row 4.
R4 H A L L C H K K :
- Move to floor to be check
- HALL B/T and IND PCB check at hall side
- Verify HALL B/T and IND PCB's operating as below flow chart.
- Canceling the HALL CHECK mode by "FFFF" key in.
R4 H A L L C H K K : F F F F
- Switch operation board running switch to normal side.
HALL CHECK MODE?

NO
YES
B8 character ON
B8 character ON UP LAMP ON
B8 character ON DN LAMP ON
FOD Page 32/32

4) Installation step of Hall B/T and IND board

① After disconnecting XHA MIC in controller, change the operation mode to MAINT on
the car.
② DIP SW(SW1) Floor ID setting on DHG-161 PCB
③ Connection of HA mic jack on DHG-161
④ Connection of HI1 mic jack for DHG-161 PCB and IND board(DCM-1XX) joint.
HI2 mic jack : For DUPLEX Lift No.2
⑤ Connection of HU,HD(for B/T interface) on DHG-161 PCB.
⑥ Connection of HUC,HDC(for Duplex No.2, disabled person B/T applied) on
DHG-161 PCB.
⑦ Connection of HF1(Hall lantern applied) mic jack on DHG-161.
(HF2 :For DUPLEX Lift No.2)
⑧ Connection of HC1(Hall chime applied) mic jack on DHG-161.
(HC2 :For DUPLEX Lift No.2)
⑨Repeat above ②~⑧ against all floors.

FOD Page 33/32

⑩ When you complete work until ⑨, connect XHA MIC to CP after main power off.
⑪ Turn on the main power after XHA MIC connection to CP
* Above work procedure is to protect PCB damage that occur sometimes while you work
in hoistway for wiring.

Otis Sigma SI210 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Otis Sigma SI210 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Test & Commissioning

2. Comparison between DI210 & SI210 Controller…...................................................7

Appendix1. Cut view of traveling cable………………………………………….……..15

2) What is the distributed control system?

C1ST 15Kw or above RE

DPP- 131, 111 DPB- 100( Ext ensi on)

M/C Room, Hoist way, Controller

I/F Car si gnal

78K BPS LON c ontrol SD1D

4) Main functions of distributed control

DOC-120 PCB 186 (16 Bit) Relative E/L

DPRAM (256B) DPRAM (2 KB)

DSP(16 G/A (COM. G/A (COM. EMBEDDED CON-

-. Main functions of distributed controller

1.2 Major Specification

Items DI1 60 m/min DI1 90~105 m/min

2) Functions of control panel block

NO Block Configuration Functions

Generates AC VOL and door supplied

NO Block Configuration Functions

11 DOC-120 PCB Operation controlling CPU PCB which controls operation

sequence and Position, detects security circuit,

IPM driving(built-in Regen.IGBT),Detecting DC LINK safety

Inputs machine room OPR and EEPROM displays E/L

DOA-100 PCB and TCD conditions.

As a local monitoring board B/D, performs a gate array

*DOS-100 PCB communication, using DOC-120 CRT port

(Relay contact output).

DC power supply(CAR LON:24V,I/F:48V, Contactor: 110V),

*DOR-131 PCB For emergency, Micro leveling operation

DOM-110A PCB Connects control panel and outer equipment

3) Applicable external equipment

NO Unit Name Applicable Standard

* Inputs by additional function S/W and load compensation device.

2. Comparison between Di210 & unified Si210 Controller.

Si1 Machine, load detector for S.G*

Di1 Machine, load detector for M/S*,PTM*

Di1 OPB : Di1 external, DCL-240 applied

Si1 Machine, load detector for S.G*

Si1 T/M*: WLC,WMC(Brake: Current control)

Si1 DOOR: SBD1(Distributed control)

*: Unified CP Si1 IND : Si1 external, DOT* essential

2-2. Major changed parts

When one of SAV1, MAV1, DAV1& HAV1 door is applied,

Figure of DR CABLE: For the connection, refer to name tags on cable.

① Wire and connect DR CABLE(# AEG05C372)

② Insert the plugs of DR CABLE into DRIN/DROUT cap of DCL-243 PCB.

③ At another side of DR CABLE, connect receptacles into Y3-01,02, Y4-08,09 and

fork terminal to TERM1-01.

⑤ Check if SPEC DATA in address $0014 is $01H.

⑥ Apparatus box on car top is not changed as comparing with Di1.

(Refer to the connection of Y4-08)

② The function of DIP S/W on DCL PCB

SPEC DATA for load detector(Potential meter) is different.

※ 0: OFF, 1: ON, X: N/A * T.R.: Terminal resistor

① Above application is followed even unified CP.

② Installation procedures are same as before.

2) Potential meter X 1EA: $41H

★ Load compensation (In case potential meter applied)

1) NO LOAD POINT SET: “A61E“(Same as Di1 CP)

→ For the details, refer to below.

A62E - FULL LOAD POINT SET

When “LOAD?” is displayed, enter “100E”.

Di1 Machine, load detector for M/S,PTM

: Unified CP Si1 IND : Si1 external, DOT essential

① Figure of unified CP: 1273(H)750(W)395(D)

◆ IPM (AEG05C440A, AEG05C441A) in unified CP is named as S-IPM, other IPM is